Home

Owner`s Manual Panamera

1. Menu change Change main menu area Available instrument cluster functions Start Stop Chr Start stop timing Vehicle menu Display vehicle menu Trip menu Display trip menu TPM menu Display TPM menu Chrono menu Display chrono menu ACC menu Display ACC menu Audio menu Display audio menu Phone menu Display telephone menu Navi menu Display navigation menu Map menu Display navigation map on the multi function display Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 151 Overview of Warning Messages lf a warning message appears always refer to the corresponding sections in this Owner s Manual Warning messages are issued only if all measurement prerequisites are met Therefore check all fluid levels regularly in particular always check the engine oil level before refuelling Warning message categories Red warning System failure warning gt Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately Yellow warning Fault or system failure warning gt Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity Yellow warning Information message gt Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity or remedy yourself Light in Warning message on multi function instrument display panel Oil press too low Fault Oil pressure monitoring Oil temperature too high
2. No indicator light comes on when you select PASM Comfort default setting One indicator light comes on when you select PASM Sport Two indicator lights come on when you select PASM Sport Plus In addition the selected chassis setup is shown on the multi function display in the instrument panel for approx 4 seconds Note The mode cannot be changed if a door or the tailgate is opened or when the engine is switched off When the vehicle is stopped the ride height may be adjusted automatically in order to balance the vehicle load High Level The level control system allows you to raise the vehicle in maneuvering mode by approx 0 8 in 20 mm compared with the normal level in order to drive over curbs and ramps High Level can only be selected manually and at speeds of less than approx 20 mph 30 km h Note High Level must not be used on public roads since the prescribed installation height of the reflectors can be exceeded in High Level Driving and Driving Safety 209 Selecting High Level 1 Switch on ignition 2 Start the engine 3 Press button c5 When High Level is selected the indicator light on the button lights up The message High Level selected appears on the multi function display Note on operation The last selected level is stored in the memory after the ignition is switched off The level control system automatically switches from High Level at
3. ceeceeeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 249 LOCKING ihe venele mee spree mcecttaarevenst 24 Unlocking the Vehicle suiscserairineksronnererrnin 29 Porsche Stability Management PSM Functional description ceecee ee 202 Multi function light in the tachometer 0 205 COVEIVICW hasnt mano SE 1111 c 8 E E mane mney E ons O SAEI E E tears 205 338 Index Porsche Traction Management PTM Functional GESCNIPUOM ciccssseccisciessvssverieonciscsevs 202 Power steering Checking and adding hydraulic fluid 260 Power windows Adjusting after connecting battery ccccceeeees 88 Maune CNS ee E OE Opening closing windows with rocker switch 86 Overview of driver s door control panel ma 80 Overview of passenger s door control panel 86 Powerlift tailgate Cocina e E OPen a E A E Re ay Safety notes 0 Peete eesti eee eee ase Pressure WSS ar OSI A E a E E a R 20 Protection against towing inclination sensor Switching off with Porsche Entry amp Drive 248 Switching off with remote control teeta 247 PSM Porsche Stability Management Functional description siicirerccrnccmatnmmnarvinin 202 Multi function light in the tachometer 005 205 oere E ni Reprod nena stiee OUD 201 soy LIN 11 0 8 eee ersae a A Switching OM sy 22 ee ecenesesecncceteenetanacedacances wien OO Warning light on the multifunction dis
4. 0 lee teens ee eee 257 Cooled GIOVE DOK aa 219 Cooling system Warning on multifunction display 110 Cornering light BEU omer E E rates ects mprcr re renee trae terh tener 94 Installing headlights peeves CSE PERE EE ET 309 Removing headlights IN Meer rene rent are ent 309 E earner ee rr cee rer cea eT er renee E 94 Courtesy lighting Entry fUNCtION c ccccccceeeeeeseeseeeeee sD Crankcase ventilation ee meee e ees eee eee Cruise control Accelerating ccccccccccccccecesessessssssteseeeeseeeeesenees 177 Deceleratne aa a mate men ner ne eM one wl 77 Functional AESC O eee LS Interrupting Operation ssenresireerreereeerennsnnreennnenn I Storing speed eeren A EE TE 176 wite hine o a a SAS S 178 SKEME O a E 176 Cupholder Promt 2 e E a Gray 278 D Data bank for vehicle data A a enero n oes Daytime divine lights occ re a a Oo Defrosting windshield siesccmstiassuemarraccestetvcinmaeesnvomtviaan 2D Air conditioning system scccecesseeeees eee 73 Dimensions e aa a enc cateanessausiesiddonans wee 330 Dimmer Adjusting brightness of instrument lighting 95 Displacement Technical data cccccccsseesssssssseeees 324 Display on multi function display Overview of warning messages cceeeeeeeeeeeee 152 Display on the multifunction display Overview of Warning messages cccsceeeeesteeeeees 152 Displaying average fuel consumption ccccccceeesseee
5. gt Pull the PDK selector lever or shift button on the steering wheel back You can shift up or down by the corresponding number of gears by quickly pressing or pulling the shift buttons or selector lever several times in succession The transmission can be shifted up or down by several gears in succession by continuously operating the selector lever or shift buttons You can shift up or down at any time depending on driving speed and engine speed Gear changes that would exceed the upper or lower engine speed limit are not executed by the control unit There is no automatic upshift at the upper engine speed limit in selector lever position M Upshift Suppression can be cancelled by kickdown operation If for example the engine speed limit is reached during overtaking and an automatic upshift does not occur the transmission shifts up in this case as a result of kickdown operation gt Select an appropriately low gear on upward and downward slopes This will ensure optimum use of engine power and engine braking To shift up automatically at the upper engine speed limit gt Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full throttle point kickdown Failure of the selector lever display on the instrument panel The warning Gearbox emergency operation appears in red on the multifunction display Effect No selector lever position is displayed on the instrument panel Vehicle can be driven only until
6. 1N Caution Risk of damage The vehicle may touch the ground as a result of reduced ground clear ance gt Drive carefully and slowly on steep slopes e g parking lots curbs uneven roads lifting platforms etc gt Avoid steep ramps Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake PCCB gt Please see the chapter BRAKES on Page 172 The high performance brake system is designed for optimal braking effect at all soeeds and temperatures Certain speeds braking forces and ambient condi tions such as temperature and humidity therefore might cause brake noises Wear on the different components and braking system such as brake pads and brake discs depends to a great extent on the individual driving style and the conditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed in actual miles on the road The values communicated by Porsche are based on normal operation adapted to traffic Wear increases considerably when the vehicle is driven on race tracks or through an aggressive driving style gt Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer about the current guidelines in effect before such use of your vehicle Dear Porsche Owner A lot has gone into the manufacture of your Porsche including advanced engineering rigid quality control and demanding inspections These engineering and safety features will be enhanced by you the safe driver who knows her his car and all controls who maintains the vehi
7. Panamera Owner s Manual WKD 970 121 10 06 09 Porsche the Porsche Crest Panamera PCCB PCM PDK PSM and Tequipment are registered trademarks and the distinctive shapes of Porsche automobiles are trademarks of Dr Ing h c F Porsche AG All rights reserved Printed in Germany Orientation guides in the Owner s Manual The orientation guides in the Owner s Manual are highlighted in yellow Overall Table of Contents At the start of the Owner s Manual you will find an overview of the overall contents of the Owner s Manual Section Contents There is a summary of topics with the corresponding page numbers at the beginning of each main chapter Index There is a detailed alphabetical index at the end of this Owner s Manual Dear Owner We would like to thank you for your purchase of a Porsche Panamera Judging by the car you have chosen you are a motorist of a special breed and you are probably no novice when it comes to automobiles Remember however as with any vehicle you should take time to familiarize yourself with your Porsche and its performance characteristics Always drive within your own unique capabilities as a driver and your level of experience with your Porsche Ensure that anyone else driving your Porsche does the same To prevent or minimize injury always use your Safety belts Never consume alcohol or drugs before or during the operation of your vehicle This Owner s M
8. cccccceseeeeees 139 Adjusting on multi function display 138 Adjusting volume of warning and information PONS E sis octiencdsadicurs E E ET 150 Air conditioning settings ccccccccssesssseseeeeeeees 146 Changing button Pou on multi function steenne Wheelz a eee eee eect eee Changing the language L ee eee PEENI EA 150 Light and VISION settings ccccceesesesrsesssseeeeeeeeees 142 Lockine setine s 25 o trees eee a Resetting to factory SettingS ccccceceeessseeeee 139 Selecting settings MENU cccesesseesssseseeeeeeees 138 Setting date and time ATEEN ee EEA 147 OUNCES tee hetrenecanewassateonnsseunnmetveeusna stent 149 Storing on person buttons Parr een ee tree a Storing on the key A E aren runner 40 Vents POMS e rene danse nine eo Opening closing A a E 82 Viscosity engine olre a are aana a E 256 NWOICE OHIO I EE ATE E A E 192 W Warning messages on multi function do OTE E E E oe Warning triangle storage location rape eee 279 Washer fluid Poio ce a OU NE EEIT a tare E eae ncem Resneree NR 329 OPE ener resnettaaeresnet 259 Washing the vehicle instructions ccccccccceesseseeeees 2 0 Weights Detinitions aee a e a AO Weights Technical data c ccccccccccscessesseseeseeseersrees 328 Welcome Home function A Ollaravesoeansaseamnenretatinitersenenareseutee oe Wheel alignment eerren 2BD Wheel Change Tan a a 287 Wheels
9. gt Adapt the tire pressure to the load After you change the tire pressure you must also update the setting for Tire Pressure Monitoring For information on setting Tire Pressure Monitoring on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Information on tire pressures for partially and fully loaded vehicles can be found under Technical data in this Owner s Manual gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE FOR COLD TIRES 68 F 20 C on page 326 Luggage Compartment Cover 1 Warning Risk of injury In the event of braking direction changes or in an accident objects can slide into the passenger compartment and endanger the occupants gt Do not place objects on the retractable luggage compartment cover or on the fixed luggage compartment cover Retractable luggage compartment cover Luggage can be protected against prying eyes with the retractable luggage compartment cover gt Always pull out the retractable luggage compartment cover when transporting objects in the luggage compartment The retractable luggage compartment cover is not designed to carry objects Pulling out retractable luggage compartment cover 1 Pull out the retractable cover 2 Engage the cover on the tailgate at the left 3 Pull the cover to the right using the grab handles and engage tt The retractable cover will center itself Retracting retractab
10. gt Do not drive at a speed of more than 80 mph 130 km h when the roof transport system is fitted and loaded gt Do not drive at a speed of more than 110 mph 180 km h when the roof transport system is fitted but not loaded Obey all traffic laws gt Load the roof transport system so that the load does not protrude over the sides of the roof transport system Never load the roof transport system wider than the width of the vehicle gt Position the center of gravity of the load as low as possible with respect to the roof transport system and distribute the load evenly over the load area gt Secure the load so that it will not move during the journey Do not use elastic rubber tensioners 232 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 1N Caution Washing the vehicle in a car wash or failure to observe the overall vehicle height or the maximum permitted gross weight can damage the vehicle or roof transport system gt Remove the complete roof transport system before washing the vehicle in a car wash gt Check the overall vehicle height with the roof transport system fitted before driving into multi storey car parks garages underground garages and tunnels gt Do not exceed the maximum roof load maximum vehicle weight and maximum axle loads For information on maximum permitted loads and weights gt Please see the chapter WEIGHTS on page 328 gt Do not exceed the maximu
11. Preconditions In order to delete programmed signals and store garage door opener signals the ignition must be switched on and the turn signals must be off When using the garage door opener the vehicle must be within the range of the receiver Parking 243 Deleting programmed signals from the keys This process deletes the standard factory set codes Do not repeat this process if you want to assign additional signals to the buttons gt Keep the two outer buttons and on the overhead operating console keypad pressed for approx 20 seconds until the indicator light A on the button starts to flash quickly 244 Parking 591 276 Assigning garage door opener signal to key with fixed code system l The standard factory set codes must be deleted before programming for the first time Press and hold the desired button on the overhead operating console keypad until the indicator light A on the button starts to flash slowly You now have 5 minutes to teach the button Hold the original remote control approx 12 in 30 cm away from the marked position figure and press and hold the transmit button until the vehicle s turn signal lights flash on and off three times and or the indicator light A starts flashing quickly The turn signal lights flash three times and the indicator light A flashes quickly to confirm that the new signal has been programmed successfully Several a
12. 593 806 L z W Taa Ai a Fa Gao i k B d SWR3 Tire info Summer tires 20 inch std faster 100 mph Partly load 10 42 Am i z B2 F a Viewing Tire info in the Tire pressure menu 1 Select gt Tire pressure 2 Tire info and confirm The current settings are displayed Selecting Charge in the Tire pressure menu 1 Select gt Tire pressure 2 Charge and confirm 3 Select load type and confirm Available setting options Part load Full load gt Adapt the pressure of the tires to the selected load type See Fill info in the Tire pressure menu lf this menu is not displayed the specified tire pressures are valid for all types of vehicle load 593 807 S SWR3 Comfort press Comfort Standard Std faster 100 mph Selecting Comfort pressure in the Tire pressure menu 1 Select gt Tire pressure 2 Comfort press and confirm 3 Select required pressure and confirm Available setting options Comfort Standard For speeds up to 100 mph 160 km h the tire pressures can be reduced to increase driving comfort The Tire Pressure Monitoring system must be set to the applicable tire pressure comfort pressure or standard pressure lf you selected Comfort press the TPM system automatically uses lower pressure values when monitoring tire pressures The com
13. Driving Performance The specifications refer to a vehicle with DIN curb weight without performance reducing additional equipment e g special tires Acceleration 0 62 mph Maximum speed 100 km h values in brackets relate to Sport Plus mode 176 ph BSH 5 46 2 sco 175 mp 282 4 5 0 second 18 npn BOS Ki EZIO seconds Acceleration 0 60 mph 96 km h Tire Pressure and Technical Data 329 Dimensions Length Width without exterior mirrors Width with exterior mirrors Height at DIN curb weight Ground clearance at maximum gross weight 18 inch wheels front rear 19 inch wheels front rear 20 inch wheels front rear 330 Tire Pressure and Technical Data Panamera S Panamera 4S Panamera Turbo 195 67 in 4970 mm 76 02 in 1931 mm 83 23 in 2114 mm 55 83 in 1418 mm 114 96 in 2920 mm 3 31 in 84 mm 4 41 in 112 mm 65 28 in 1658 mm 65 42 in 1661 6 mm 65 20 in 1656 mm 64 80 in 1645 8 mm front 64 80 in 1646 mm rear 11J x 20 wheel 64 24 in 1631 8 mm rear 10 5J x 20 wheel 64 48 in 1637 8 mm A ABD automatic brake differential Functionaldescnption t a eee ssees seston 2 ABS anti lock brake system Functional description ccncessoesctanntvieernrcencuberrscoends L07 Warning light on instrument panel eer ae 207 AC button Air Conditioning SYSt M cccceesessssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 71 AC MAX button Air conditioning SYStEM ccsccc
14. Odometer The displays for the total mileage and individual trips are integrated in the speedometer on the instrument panel The upper display counts the total mileage the lower display shows individual trips After exceeding 9 999 kilometers or 6 213 miles the trip counter returns to O K Reset Button for Trip Counter Display Brightness Setting for Instrument Lighting Resetting trip counter display gt Press rotary switch K for approximately 1 second The trip counter display is reset to 0 Adjusting brightness of instrument lighting For information on adjusting the brightness of the instrument lighting gt Please see the chapter INSTRUMENT LIGHTING on page 95 L PDK Display for Selector Lever Position Engaged Gear When the engine is running the selector lever position and engaged forward gear are indicated in gates D or M Warning messages If the selector lever is between two positions Effects The corresponding selector lever position in the instrument panel flashes and the warning Gear selector not engaged appears on the multi function display Action required Operate the footbrake and engage the selector lever properly If there is a fault in the transmission Depending on priority either the warning Fault Transmission will appear in yellow or red or the warning Gearbox temperature too high will appear on the multi function display Yellow
15. Sequence of operation 1N Warning The jack must be used only to raise the car for wheel changing The jack must never be used as a support to work underneath the vehicle If the jack is accidentally dislodged you or bystanders could suffer severe personal injury gt Never jack up other vehicles or other loads with the jack gt Always place the car on stable supports if you have to work under it When working under the vehicle always use safety stands specifically designed for this purpose Please use a suitable knee rest to protect your clothing against soiling Activate the electric parking brake and shift into 1st gear or move the PDK selector lever to position P Remove the ignition key or control unit on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive Switch on the emergency flasher if necessary Secure the vehicle against rolling away e g by means of wedges at the wheels on the opposite side This is particularly important on slopes Slightly loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel to be changed Lift the vehicle only at the specified jacking points Raise the vehicle until the wheel lifts off the ground Please see the chapter RAISING THE VEHICLE WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM TROLLEY JACK OR STANDARD JACK on page 290 Remove 1 or 2 wheel bolts see corresponding figure Minor Repairs 291 Screw in one assembly aid on vehicles without PCCB 8 Screw in assembly aids in
16. Swivelling Down Mirror Glass as Parking Aid When reverse gear is engaged the mirror on the passenger s side swivels down slightly to show the curb area 242 Parking Preconditions The ignition must be switched on The function must be activated on the multi function display For further information on setting the parking aid gt Please see the chapter ADJUSTING REVERSING OPTIONS on page 144 Swivelling down mirror glass manually lf the function was deactivated on the multi function display the exterior mirror on the passenger s side can also be swivelled down manually 1 Engage reverse gear The indicator light on the selection button A for adjusting the exterior mirror on the driver s Side lights up 2 Press the selection button B for adjusting the exterior mirror on the passenger s side The mirror on the passenger s side Swivels down Note on operation The position of the automatically lowered mirror glass can be changed as required using the adjustment button C This setting is stored on the car key on vehicles with driver memory or comfort memory Moving mirror to its initial position The mirror swivels back to its initial position after a certain time delay if the vehicle is shifted out of reverse gear or immediately if the vehicle reaches a speed of more than 9 mph 15 km h The exterior mirror on the passenger s side can also be moved to its initial p
17. The measurement unit for the Tire Pressure Monitoring display can be changed 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Units 2 Tire pressure 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options bar _ psi Setting unit for boost pressure gauge The measurement unit for the boost pressure gauge can be changed 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Units 2 Boost pressure 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options bar kk a psi Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 149 Setting unit for fuel consumption display The unit can be set for the fuel consumption display 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Units 2 Consumption 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options 1 100 km MPG US MPG UKP km l Changing the language The language of the display text on the multi function display can be changed 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Language 2 Select desired language and confirm Adjusting volume of warning and information tones The volume of the warning tones and ParkAssist information tones can be adjusted 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Volume and confirm 150 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display
18. 205 km h The rear spoiler retracts automatically from position B to position A at approx 110 mph 180 km h Sport Plus mode activated The rear spoiler extends automatically from position A to position B at approx 55 mph 90 km h The rear spoiler retracts automatically from position B to position A at approx 40 mph 60 km h Warning Risk of injury during manual retraction or extension of the rear spoiler when the vehicle is stationary gt Make sure that no persons or objects are within the range of movement of the rear spoiler Risk of damage from pushing the vehicle by the spoiler gt Do not push the vehicle at the rear spoiler Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System OE eee ra nen na re se RR 218 Drinks Holder Cupholder ccccccceeesseee eee 221 Font ASHAY oriire raneren aat 224 Rear Ashtray ccccccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeees 224 Cigarette Lighter neistina 225 Refrigerated box in the rear of the vehicle 226 Folding Rear Seats Forward and Returning to Upright POSIION sincstittentiintetsctediatetionan 226 Luggage Compartment 227 Stoning LOGOS cececsrcte cacsegeaeae cous teceeneeceteenc 228 Luggage Compartment Cover ssir 229 Fixed Luggage Compartment Cover 231 SK BAS a tees tees ecemn ese eatin 23l Roof Transport System 232 Loading Information 236 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 2 17 Storage 1N War
19. I a ri d 152 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Oil temperature display defective Meaning Action required Stop immediately in a suitable place and switch engine off Do not continue driving Select Oil level on the multi function display Add engine oil if necessary Do not continue driving if the warning light comes on even when the oil level is correct Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Switch off engine and allow to cool Check oil level and if necessary add oil Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Light in instrument panel Warning light on the coolant temperature gauge lights up Warning light on the coolant temperature gauge flashes Warning light on the coolant temperature gauge flashes Warning message on multi function Failure Oil level measurement Minimum oil level reached Oil level below minimum Oil level Maximum reached Engine temperature too high Check coolant level Coolant display defective Fault Generator Boost pressure display defective Reduced engine power Fault Check Engine Fault Check Engine Meaning Action required Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Top up engine oil immediately Top up engine oil immediately Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity and have the oil d
20. SAE 5W 404 SAE 5W 50 1 Generally you can find details on the manufacturer approvals on the oil containers or as a notice displayed by the retailer The current approval status is also available from your authorized Porsche dealer 2 SAE viscosity class Example SAE OW 40 Specification OW Viscosity specification for low temperatures winter Specification 40 Viscosity specification for high temperatures 3 For all temperature ranges For the temperature range over 13 F 25 C Always observe the following points Use engine oils approved by Porsche only This is a precondition for optimum and problem free driving Regular oil changes are part of servicing It is important that the service intervals particularly the oil change intervals are observed in accordance with the specifications in the Maintenance booklet Oils approved by Porsche can be mixed with each other Porsche engines are designed so that no oil additives may be used A label is located in the engine compartment which provides you with information on suitable oil for your engine Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you Caution Fire hazard if engine oil comes into contact with hot engine parts Risk of damage if engine oil comes into contact with the drive belt gt Exercise extreme caution when topping up engine oil gt Top up engine oil only w
21. Switching on intermittent operation of rear window wiper gt Push switch C upwards to detent position INT Switching off intermittent operation of rear window wiper gt Push switch C downwards to detent position OFF 104 Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers Manual wiping gt Push switch C on the wiper stalk all the way down from detent position OFF or all the way up from detent position INT The washer system wipes as long as the switch is pressed down Switching on the rear window wiper when reverse gear is engaged In the multifunction display you can configure the rear wiper to automatically perform a series of wipes when it rains or when the windshield wipers are used while reverse gear Is engaged For information on configuring the automatic function for activating the rear wiper when reverse gear is engaged gt Please see the chapter SETTING ACTIVATION OF THE REAR WIPER WHEN REVERSE GEAR IS ENGAGED on page 143 Maintenance note gt Clean the wiper blades with window cleaner at regular intervals especially after washing the vehicle in a car wash We recommend Porsche window cleaner If the wiper blades are very dirty e g soiled with insect remains they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth lf the wiper blades rub or squeak this may be due to the following f the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash wax residues may adhere to the windshield These wax residues can be r
22. Tire wear The original equipment tires on your Porsche have built in tire wear indicators They are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as approximately 1 2 in 12 mm bands when the tire tread depth is down to 1 16 of an in 1 6 mm When the indicators appear in two or more adjacent grooves it is time to replace the tires We recommend however that you do not let the tires wear down to this extent Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly and are even less effective on wet roads In the United States state laws may govern the minimum tread depth permissible Follow all such laws Minor Repairs 283 1 Danger Driving on worn tires can result in loss of control of the vehicle and could cause serious personal injuries or death gt Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden deflation and loss of control which could cause severe personal injury gt lf you notice that tires are wearing unevenly consult your authorized Porsche dealer Uneven wear may not always be due to improper wheel alignment It can be the result of individual driving habits such as cornering at high speeds If the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted regularly abnormal tire wear can also occur 284 Minor Repairs Tire care gt Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims gt lf you must drive over a curb or other obstacle drive slowly and at an obtuse ang
23. auxiliary high beam headlight Changing bulb H7 55W for static cornering light 1 Remove the headlight gt Please see the chapter REMOVING HEADLIGHTS on page 309 2 Press the release tab and open the cover 3 10 Minor Repairs 3 Turn the bulb socket counter clockwise and remove tt 4 Remove defective bulb and replace it Make sure that the bulb is installed in the correct position Close cover on headlight The release tab must engage fully 6 Install the headlight Please see the chapter INSTALLING HEADLIGHTS on page 309 Check operation of bulbs Changing bulb H7 55W for auxiliary high beam headlight 1 Remove the headlight gt Please see the chapter REMOVING HEADLIGHTS on page 309 2 Press in the release tab and open the cover 3 Turn the bulb socket counter clockwise and remove it Remove defective bulb and replace it Make sure that the bulb is installed in the correct position Close cover on headlight The release tab must engage fully 6 Install the headlight Please see the chapter INSTALLING HEADLIGHTS on page 309 Check operation of bulbs Minor Repairs 3 1 1 Side Turn Signal Light Changing bulb WY5W gt Open the door Caution Danger of crushing if the door is closed while removing the turn signal light gt Do not close the door while removing the turn signal light 312 Minor Repairs
24. 1 Select gt Navigation gt Destination input 2 Last destination or Stored destinations or POls and confirm 3 Select desired navigation destination and confirm Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 123 Starting route guidance lf route guidance Is inactive and you have entered a new navigation destination you can then start route guidance 1 Select gt Navigation 2 Start route guidance and confirm Stopping route guidance You can stop route guidance while in progress 1 Select gt Navigation 2 Stop route guidance and confirm 124 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Displaying and modifying the navigation map In the Map main menu you can view and modify the map display on the navigation system 1 Select gt Map Modifying map display 1 Select gt Map and confirm 2 Select display option and confirm 3 Confirm selection Function is active ak Function is not active Available display options Auto zoom The scale of the map Is set automatically from the current position of the vehicle to the next navigation maneuver point Z 3D map Three dimensional map display North up The map always faces north Enlarging and reducing map display The zoom factor of the map display can be adapted individually 1 Select gt Map gt Manual zoom and con
25. After this time it can be re activated by quickly flooring the accelerator pedal again PSM Porsche Stability Management control is more sporty in Sport Plus mode PSM interventions are later than in Normal mode The driver can maneuver the vehicle with greater agility at its performance limits without having to dispense with the assistance of PSM in emergency situations This helps to achieve optimal lap times particularly on race circuits with a dry road surface Please see the chapter PORSCHE STABILITY MANAGEMENT PSM on page 202 Adaptive cruise control regulates speed and distance more dynamically The Auto Start Stop function is deactivated Please see the chapter AUTO START STOP FUNCTION on page 169 The rear spoiler extends earlier and retracts later Sport Plus mode only Please see the chapter RETRACTABLE REAR SPOILER on page 214 The system switches from High Level Please see the chapter HIGH LEVEL on page 209 Switching Sport mode on and off gt Press button SPORT When Sport mode is switched on the indicator light on the button lights up The word SPORT appears on the digital speedometer A sporty gear changing map is enabled and the gear shifting times are shorter for the PDK transmission A sporty driving style is recognized more quickly and the gear changing speeds are adapted to driving performance Braking downshifts are initi
26. Available display contents Station name Rem fuel rng Compass Boost pressure Blank line No information appears in the upper status area A Displaying PCM information on the multi function display You can configure the multi function display to temporarily display different items of information relating to Porsche Communication Management PCM 1 3 4 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Display PCM display and confirm Select desired PCM information Confirm selection Information is displayed tee Information is not displayed Available PCM information Map info Navigation map appears automatically when navigation information is available Phone info Information on incoming and outgoing calls is displayed Voice control Help text appears when the voice control button is pressed Arrow info Navigation arrow appears automatically when navigation information is available Speed limit Speed limits marked on the map in the navigation system are displayed Adapting lower status area You can assign the current time and outside temperature to the lower status area B in the multi function display 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Display 2 Lower line and confirm 3 Select the desired display contents and confirm Available d
27. High beam headlight right Side turn signals front Cornering light front left lgnition lock lighting Turn signal front left right Footwell lights lgnition lock anti removal lock Power steering control valves 16 clutch sensor RHD air conditioning sun sensor T Notwsed o 18 Notused SSC 19 Notused o LHD ignition lock control unit light 20 5 Switch Emergency flasher switch LED No Designation A No Designation Steering column lock Left hand drive vehicles only 6 LHD headlight cleaning system 27 gnition coils P28 Notused id Oil level sensor camshaft sensor Oxygen sensors behind catalytic converter Electric control valves for engine Engine control unit Fan activation tank leakage detection 34 Valves for engine Oxygen sensors ahead of catalytic converter Minor Repairs 299 Left hand drive vehicles only Steering column lock 25 Filler flap closed open Windshield washer pump front rear 27 A Left hand drive vehicles only Turn signal rear left Marker light front right Low beam headlight left High beam headlight left Cornering light front right Engine compartment lid light 30 Shutter elements right left Active brake ventilation open closed Heatable washer jets Engine compartment lid 30 Headlight beam adjustment Designation A 36 Notused SY ee a Front cigarette lighter luggage compartment socket Seat adjustment front left without memory RHD cent
28. Note The headlights can mist up due to temperature and humidity gt To ensure optimum ventilation do not cover the gap between headlight and body 591 226 Removing headlights 1 Switch off the ignition and remove the ignition key or pull out the control unit on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive 2 Open the engine compartment lid 3 Take a socket wrench out of the tool kit 4 Place the socket wrench on the release and turn in direction of arrow until you feel and hear the headlight being released 591 228 ater Pull headlight approx 4 in 10 cm forward out of the fender Press back the release tab of the connector A and pull connector off Press the release lever on the underside of the rapid action coupling on the breather hose B up and pull it off Pull headlight out completely Installing headlights 1 Move the headlight release mechanism to unlock position Insert the headlight into the guide rails attach the connector A and breather hose B and then slide the headlight fully into the fender 2 Press the headlight to the rear and simultaneously turn the socket wrench in direction of arrow You should feel and hear the headlight locking mechanism engage 3 Check that the headlight is seated securely 4 Remove the socket wrench and place it in the tool kit 5 Close engine compartment lid Minor Repairs 309 Changing bulbs for static cornering light
29. Rest your outstretched arm on the steering wheel Set the backrest angle and the steering wheel position so that your wrist rests on the outer rim of the steering wheel At the same time the shoulders must still be in noticeable contact with the backrest 3 Adjust the seat height to give yourself enough headroom and a good overview of the vehicle 4 Electrically adjustable seat Adjust the seat angle until your thighs rest lightly on the seat cushion Adjusting Front Seats Adjusting the seat 1 Warning Risk of accidents The seat may move further than desired if you attempt to adjust it when driving You may lose control of the vehicle gt Do not adjust the seat when driving Danger of injury if persons or animals are in the movement range of the seat during seat adjustment gt Adjust the seat so that no one is put at risk A Seat angle adjustment B Seat height adjustment C Fore and aft adjustment D Backrest angle adjustment VY IE 7 Lumbar support adjustment backrest curvature for pelvic and spinal column support Seat cushion depth adjustment Seat cushion side bolster adjustment Backrest side bolster adjustment Press each control in the direction indicated by the arrows until the desired setting is reached Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 39 Driver s door memory buttons driver memory or comfort memory Storing Vehicle Settings Driver memory The current seat
30. Set light switch to AUTO The following lights remain switched on for a certain period to allow you to get in and out of your vehicle safely and with improved visibility in darkness Daytime driving lights Courtesy lights in the exterior mirrors on vehicles with comfort memory Front and rear side marker lights Licence plate lights Welcome Home function off delay When the vehicle is locked the lights remain switched on for the duration of the off delay preset on the multi function display For information on adjusting the off delay of the external lights on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter ADJUSTING EXTERIOR LIGHTS on page 142 Entry function When the vehicle is unlocked the area around the vehicle is illuminated for the duration of the off delay preset on the multi function display The lights are switched off when the ignition is switched on or the light switch is set to a position other than AUTO For information on adjusting the off delay of the external lights on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter ADJUSTING EXTERIOR LIGHTS on page 142 Instrument lighting The lighting is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness by the light sensor B In addition when the vehicle lighting is switched on the instrument and switch brightness can be adjusted manually gt Turn adjustment button A in the appropriate direction
31. The doors are unlocked 2 Pull the door handle Note on operation The vehicle is locked automatically after 30 seconds if none of the doors or the tailgate is opened The alarm system is not activated lf the interior surveillance system and inclination sensor have been switched off restricted anti theft protection this also remains the case after automatic relocking As a result the doors can be opened from inside by pulling once on the front door opener or by pulling twice on the rear door opener gt Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that the alarm system will be triggered if the door is opened When locked again the interior surveillance system and inclination sensor are activated once more Switching off operational readiness for vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive Operational readiness of Porsche Entry amp Drive is switched off after 96 hours for the driver s door and after 36 hours for the passenger doors if the vehicle is not unlocked within this time 1 Pull the door handle once to activate the system again 2 Pull the door handle again to open the door Opening and Locking 23 Locking doors Locking with the key 1 Close the door 2 Press button amp once The emergency flasher flashes twice and an acoustic signal will sound twice The doors cannot be opened from outside or lf persons or animals are remaining in the vehicle press button amp twice The emergency fl
32. The vehicle cannot be locked if the any of the doors or the tailgate are not completely closed A warning signal sounds in the passenger compartment and a warning message appears on the multi function display The key must be outside the vehicle when locking the vehicle doors otherwise the vehicle doors cannot be locked ifthe key is out of range the vehicle doors can no longer be opened after they are locked Automatic door locking and automatic door unlocking 1 Warning In an emergency situation where you need to exit the car through an automatically locked door remember the following procedure to open the door gt Unlock the doors by pressing the central locking button or gt Pull the inside door handle on the front door once or on the rear door twice to open the door In the multi function display of the instrument panel you have the option of selecting diverse variants of automatic door locking and automatic door unlocking For information on modifying the opening and locking settings gt Please see the chapter LOCKING SETTINGS on page 145 Unlocking and opening tailgate When the tailgate is unlocked the vehicle doors are also unlocked The vehicle is locked again automatically after 30 seconds if none of the vehicle doors or the tailgate is opened 4 Danger Risk of carbon monoxide poisoning Exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment when the tailgate is open
33. Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving conditions warrant it Always keep a Safe distance from the vehicle in front of you depending on traffic road and weather conditions Reduce speed at night and during inclement weather Driving in wet weather requires caution and reduced speeds particularly on roads with standing water as the handling characteristics of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydro planing of the tires Always observe speed limits and obey road signs and traffic laws When tired get well off the road stop and take a rest Turn the engine off Do not sit in the vehicle with engine idling Please see the chapter ENGINE EXHAUST on Page 2 When parked always put the electric parking brake on and put the PDK selector lever in position P On hills also turn the front wheels toward the curb When emergency repairs become necessary move the vehicle well off the road Turn on the emergency flasher and use other warning devices to alert other motorists Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas where the hot exhaust system may come in contact with dry grass brush spilled fuel or other flammable material Make it a habit to have the engine oil checked with every refueling Break in hints for the first 2 000 miles 3 000 kilometers The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance from your new Porsche Despite the most modern high precision manufac turing me
34. a speed of approx 20 mph 30 km h 2 10 Driving and Driving Safety Switching level control on and off Automatic level control must be switched off when driving onto a lifting platform or when raising one wheel For information on jacking up the vehicle gt Please see the chapter RAISING VEHICLES WITH A LEVEL CONTROL SYSTEM on page 290 Switching off level control 1 Switch on ignition 2 Press and hold button lt gt for approximately 10 seconds The message Control off appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel Note Level control can only be switched off when the vehicle is stationary Switching on level control 1 Lower the vehicle 2 Switch on ignition 3 Press and hold button lt for approximately 10 seconds The message Control on appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel Notes Level control is switched on automatically at a speed of more than approx 4 mph 7 km h Warning message The system automatically detects PASM faults and displays them on the multi function display in the instrument panel For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 gt Adapt your driving style according to the changed conditions gt Contact a qualified specialist workshop in order to correct the fault We recommend that you have an authori
35. be towed and must be transported on a flat bed For information on towing and tow starting gt Please see the chapter TOWING on page 316 In heavy rain while driving through water or after leaving a car wash the braking action may be delayed and increased pressure may be required gt For this reason keep further back from the vehicle in front and dry the brakes by applying them at intervals Make sure that the traffic behind you is not affected After a long drive over salted or gritted roads a coating may form on the brake discs and pads that significantly reduces friction and therefore also braking effect gt Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed grey cast iron they will unavoidably start to corrode if your vehicle is parked for an extended period The brakes will tend to rub as a result The nature extent and effects of corrosion depend on the amount of time the vehicle was parked whether road salt or grit was spread and whether grease dissolving agents were used in car washes not on vehicles with Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake To prevent corrosion of the brake discs brake them dry before parking the vehicle not on vehicles with Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake lf braking comfort is noticeably impaired we recommend that you have the brake system checked by an authorized Porsche dealer gt To relieve the brake system on downhill stretches change down to a lower gea
36. compartment cover without fold away rear roller blind l Insert the retractable cover holder into the mounting point at the right from the rear seat 2 Make sure that the release button is pressed 3 Slide the end cap inwards 4 Insert the retractable cover holder at the left and let the end cap go The release button engages automatically a Fixed Luggage Compartment Cover The fixed luggage compartment cover is a movable fixture engaged behind the rear seats at the left and right It can be disengaged and removed as required Disengaging fixed luggage compartment cover at the tailgate gt Press fixing clips C together in the tailgate and pull them out in a downward direction Ski Bag Skis can be transported safely and without damaging the passenger compartment using the ski bag Notes gt Read the packaging and fitting instructions on the ski bag gt Fold up the ski bag only when it is dry Using the ski bag 1 Pack one to max two pairs of skis max 17 kg in the ski bag with the tips of the skis facing forward The zipper must be facing the rear of the vehicle 2 Close the zipper on the ski bag 3 Tighten the closing belt on the ski bag securely Make sure that the closing belt goes all the way around the skis ahead of where the skis are secured in direction of travel 4 Pass the ski bag through between the rear seats or fold the right seat backrest forward 5 Place
37. time it is a good idea to ventilate the interior briefly with the windows open Depending on the outside temperature and humidity condensation can drip from the evaporator and form a pool under the vehicle This is normal and not a sign of leaks Information on automatic load switch off lf the charging condition of the battery is critical the following air conditioning or heating functions are restricted initially and then switched off Heated seats Heated rear window External mirror heating Fresh air blower Air conditioning compressor Air Conditioning 15 fo REAR 8 ir tJ Front control panel 2 zone and 4 zone air conditioning systems Automatically Controlled Air Conditioning Depending on various factors e g sunlight air quality ambient temperature misted windows the air conditioning system adjusts the preset interior temperature air distribution and air quantity fully automatically Automatic mode is deactivated as soon as the settings are adjusted manually In this case automatic climate control still regulates the air conditioning functions that have not been modified manually 76 Air Conditioning LETT Please read the information on REST mode see page 71 AC mode see page 71 AC MAX mode see page 72 MONO mode see page 74 Defrosting the windshield see page 73 Air recirculation mode see page 74 Air conditioning compressor see page 75 Front contro
38. weight on the armrest the passenger s air bag can be switched off gt Select an upright seat position and do not support weight on the armrests or lean out of the window Always keep feet in the footwell while driving Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat area Do not lean against the inside of the door or outside the window while the vehicle is moving gt Ifa child restraint system is installed on the passenger s seat do not adjust the seat Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 49 Seat adjustment for the passenger s seat 1 Danger Safety belts only offer protection when the backrest is positioned at a comfortable upright seating angle and the belts are properly positioned on the body Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious personal injury or death in an accident gt Do not operate the car with the driver or passenger backrests excessively reclined Vehicle modifications to accommodate persons with disabilities Because modifications to your vehicle could compromise your advanced air bag system please call 1 800 PORSCHE prior to having your vehicle modified 50 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Automatic deactivation of the passenger air bags Before transporting a child on the passenger seat gt Please see the chapter CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS on page 52 When an up to one year old child is seated in the child restraint system the front air bag is automatically deac
39. 1 The current driving speed is stored as the desired speed which will be maintained automatically within the control range from 20 to 100 mph 30 to 210 km h and appears orange in the status display A The red triangle B under the progress bar for the speed control range shows the speed of your vehicle 2 Release the accelerator pedal The desired speed is maintained automatically unless a vehicle travelling in front is detected as driving slower than the desired speed Note lf your vehicle is stopped the message Impossible when parked appears on the multi function display when you press the control stalk forward position 1 lf a stationary object was detected in front the message Stationary object appears on the multi function display Increasing the desired speed gt Push the control stalk on the steering wheel forward position 1 The desired speed is increased in steps of 1 mph 1 km h or Press the control stalk on the steering wheel forward and keep it pressed position 1 The desired speed is increased in steps of 5 mph 10 km h The status display A shows the new desired speed The red triangle B under the progress bar for the speed control range shows the speed of your vehicle Reducing the desired speed gt Briefly pull the control stalk on the steering wheel towards the steering wheel position 2 The desired speed is decreased in steps of 1 mph 1 km h or Pull the contr
40. 1 1 1 Fuel reserve warning lf less than approximately 4 US gallons 15 liters of fuel remains in the tank or the range on remaining fuel falls below approx 30 miles 50 km when the ignition is switched on or the engine is running the warning light on the multi function display in the instrument panel lights up gt Refuel at the next opportunity t Caution A shortage of fuel may damage the emission control system gt Never drive the tank dry gt f the warning lights have come on do not take bends at high speed For information on the emission control system gt Please see the chapter EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM on page 262 H Digital Speedometer The digital soeedometer H is integrated in the tachometer on the instrument panel 1 12 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Upshift Prompt Indicator The consumption oriented shift indicator to the right of the digital speed display on the tachometer helps you to develop a fuel saving driving style The upshift indicator lights up prompting you to shift up to the next higher gear depending on the selected gear engine speed and accelerator pedal position The upshift indicator is only active when Sport or Sport Plus mode is switched off On vehicles with PDK transmission the upshift prompt is only available in manual selection mode gt Change to the next higher gear when the shift indicator lights up J
41. 34 i 39 r k a 36 pa P 36 10 42 am B2 F da 2 The Tire pressure function displays the temperature dependent tire pressures actual pressures in the four wheels You can watch the tire pressure rise as the temperature increases while driving This display is only for information gt Under no circumstances should the tire pressures be changed based on this display 593 818 AE LS es al SVWHS Fill info Partly load J l psi i 10 42 am 4 82 ae Viewing Fill info in the Tire pressure menu only when vehicle is stationary 1 Select gt Tire pressure 2 Fill info and confirm Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 129 You can read the tire pressures to be corrected on this display The tire pressure to be corrected refill pressure is indicated on the displayed wheel Example If 1 5 psi 0 1 bar is displayed for the rear right tire 1 5 psi 0 1 bar must be added to this tire The displayed pressures take into account the tire temperature gt Only use the pressure specifications from the Fill info display in the tire pressure menu or from the respective tire pressure warning to correct the tire pressure Note Each time the ignition is switched on it make take approx 1 minute until all tire pressures are displayed Dashes appear instead of the tire pressures 130 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display
42. 98 RON 93 CLC or AKI Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available Be assured that your vehicle will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON 90 CLC or AKI since the engine s Electronic Oktane knock control will adapt the ignition timing if necessary It is important to observe the regular service intervals and particularly the oil change intervals specified in the Maintenance booklet The use of UNLEADED FUEL ONLY is critically important to the life of the catalytic converters Deposits from leaded fuels will ruin the converters and make them ineffective as an emission control device Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel tank opening and gas station pumps that dispense unleaded fuel have smaller nozzles This will prevent accidental pumping of leaded fuel into cars with catalytic converters 268 Maintenance and Car Care Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the continental U S and Canada Therefore we recommend you do not take your car to areas or countries where unleaded fuel may not be available Octane ratings Octane rating indicates a fuel s ability to resist detonation Therefore buying the correct octane gas is important to prevent engine damage The RON octane rating is based on the research method The CLC U S Cost of Livi
43. ABS it is still the driver s responsibility to adapt his driving style and maneuvers in line with road and weather conditions as well as the traffic situation The increased safety that is provided should not induce you to take greater risks with your safety The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be overcome even with ABS Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed cannot be reduced by ABS ABS ensures Full steering control The vehicle remains steerable Good driving stability No skidding due to locked wheels Optimum braking distance Shorter stopping distance in most cases Prevention of wheel locking No flat spots on the tires Function The decisive advantage of ABS lies in the driving stability and maneuverability of the vehicle in hazardous situations ABS prevents locking of the wheels during full braking on almost all road surfaces until just before the vehicle stops ABS begins to control the braking process as soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock This controlled braking process is comparable with extremely rapid cadence braking The pulsating brake pedal and a juddering noise warn the driver to adapt his driving speed to the road conditions gt lf full braking is necessary press the brake pedal fully during the whole braking operation even though the pedal is pulsating Do not reduce brake pressure ABS Warning light USA Warning light Canada If the ABS
44. Adjusting ParkAssist volume The volume of the ParkAssist information tones can be adjusted 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Volume 2 ParkAssist 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options Loud Medium Low Adjusting volume of warning tones The volume of the warning tones can be adjusted individually 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Volume 2 Warn tones 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options Loud Medium Low Changing button assignment on multi function steering wheel The assignment of the MFS button on the multi function display can be changed individually Functions from the multi function display or PCM can be assigned to the MFS button 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Steering wheel op 2 Multif key and confirm 3 Select PCM function or Inst clus fun and confirm 4 Select desired function assignment and confirm Available PCM functions Source change Change audio source Voice control Activate voice control Dri instr Rep Repeat voice instruction from the navigation system Station track lt Previous radio station title Station track gt Next radio station track _ Map Display navigation map in PCM
45. Aucune e O CHANING ecccccccccccsssssececcsssssseeccsssseeseeessvseees ware 292 Fixing aflat Geter eaten ee Retr rer Serres ater 293 General information reece ee 280 Inscription on alloy wheels cc scccesessseseeees 209 Inscription ON radial tire eee eee eee eea ees 2OO OG arene annie gtrenncenuentae Maran ioniiare cc eens 325 Replacing tires general information ata 285 RIM OUSEL vcsicccrasauasevenersck sorenisaevcaumedbandencaetnnnc OD Security wheel bolt wrench socket 293 ZO areca eater E E a eae de eee 325 Snow chains general information ienee 288 OEE T ee enone mein 36 Tire pressure DAC ccc cccccccccssssececcsssssseeceesssseeeeeess323 Tire pressure data psi bar ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 326 Tire sealant E eee rasta ares means Hf gc c creer ae an aire T Rs 00 Wheel balancing v cisscssstsrcanssayennnsepavisarsunnivvnaaveaslOD Wheel bolts care instructiOns c cccceeeseeeeeeeee 293 Winter tires general information c00s000 207 Windows Adjusting after connecting battery ee 88 Care instructions maan aaeeea a aen 212 Opening closing with rocker Switch 00066 80 Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid n n 259 Antifreeze teasers nee eines ter ea fasten 09 Filling capacity 00 ee Windshield wiper washer Stalk ccscccsssscccscssssseeeceose ae 102 Rain sensor adjustment Mere ree nea 103 Re
46. D 593 004 i iit r at 106 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display ztom7mtmM ono U D gt GQ Tachometer Speedometer Multi function display Engine oil temperature gauge Coolant temperature gauge Engine oil pressure gauge Fuel gauge Digital speedometer Upshift prompt indicator Odometer K Reset button for trip counter display Brightness setting for instrument panel PDK indicator for selector lever position engaged gear Instrument Panel USA Models Warning and indicator lights on the tachometer KS BRAKE 8 8 Emission control warning light Check Engine Air bag warning light Seat belt warning light PSM warning light PSM OFF warning light ABS warning light Turn signal left Turn signal right Brake warning light High beam indicator light Electric parking brake warning light Warning and indicator lights on the speedometer Q Rear fog light indicator light HD HOLD function indicator light ZD Low beam indicator light Z O Adaptive light system warning light ft Tire pressure warning light Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 107 p o 594 004 108 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display ztom7mtmM ono U D gt GQ Tachometer Speedometer Multi function display Engine oil temperature gauge Coolant temperature gauge Engine oil pressure gauge Fuel gauge Digital speedometer Upshift prompt indicator Odometer K Reset bu
47. Engine oil pressure gauge See page 111 3 Engine oil temperature gauge See page 110 4 Speedometer See page 110 5 Tachometer See page 110 6 Multi function display See page 115 7 Windshield wipers See page 102 8 Coolant temperature gauge See page 110 9 Fuel gauge See page 111 10 PDK shift buttons See page 61 11 Adaptive cruise control See page 178 12 Horn See page 61 13 Telephone controls multi function display See page 115 591 273 Dashboard 1 Sport Chrono clock See page 135 2 Porsche Communication Management PCM See page 191 3 Air vents See page 82 4 Glove box See page 218 5 Drinks holder cupholder See page 222 6 Front center console See page 14 7 Ashtray cigarette lighter See page 224 8 Drinks holder cupholder See page 222 9 Armrest storage compartment See page 219 Overview Illustrations 13 14 Overview Illustrations 10 11 12 13 EZE EAS Front Center Console 1 Heated seats seat ventilation See page 43 2 Air conditioning See page 70 3 Emergency flasher See page 97 4 Central locking See page 31 5 Heated rear window external mirror heating See page 84 6 Sport Sport Plus modes See page 212 7 Porsche Active Suspension Management PASM See page 208 8 High level See page 210 9 Porsche Stability Management PSM See page 202 10 Auto Start Stop function See page 169 11 Roll up sunblind on re
48. Entry on and off You can configure the driver s seat and steering wheel to move back automatically and allow the driver to get in and out of the vehicle more easily 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Locking 2 Select Comfort Entry 3 Confirm selection Comfort Entry is activated Pel Comfort Entry is deactivated Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 145 Setting air conditioning The automatic air conditioning can be changed individually 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Air conditioning and confirm Adjusting air flow The strength of the air flow and the air quantity can be adjusted 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Air conditioning 2 Climate style and confirm 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options Soft Normal Strong 146 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Switching extended ventilation panel on and off The extended ventilation panel on top of the dashboard can be switched on or off 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Air conditioning 2 Vent panel 3 Confirm selection Ventilation panel is activated Maf Ventilation panel is deactivated Setting central vents to blow colder air The temperature of the air blown from the central vents can be decreased The preset interior temperature remains t
49. Every time the ignition is turned on the gong will sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and passenger to buckle up In addition the gong will sound for approximately 90 seconds if vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The safety belt warning lights in the instrument panel and multi function display will go off as soon as the driver has buckled up Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 45 Fastening the safety belt gt Assume a comfortable sitting position Adjust the backrest of the front seat so that the belt always rests on your upper body and runs across the middle of your shoulder Grasp the belt tongue and pull the belt in a Slow continuous motion across your chest and lap 46 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Note on operation The belt can be blocked if the vehicle is standing at an angle or if the belt is pulled out using a jerking movement gt The belt cannot be pulled out while accelera ting and slowing down when cornering and when driving uphill Insert the belt tongue into the appropriate buckle on the inboard side of the seat until it locks securely with an audible click Make sure that belts are not trapped or twisted and that they are not rubbing on sharp edges The horizontal section of the belt should always fit snugly across the pelvis Therefore after fastening the belt always pull the diagonal part of the belt upwards Pregnant women should position the belt as low as po
50. FUNCTION DISPLAY on page 83 gt Please see the chapter SETTING AIR CONDITIONING on page 146 On vehicles with comfort memory all air conditioning settings are stored on the relevant ignition key when the vehicle is locked REST mode Using engine residual heat The residual heat of the engine can be used to heat the interior for up to 20 minutes after the ignition has been switched off gt When the ignition is switched off Press button AUTA on the front control panel The indicator light on the button lights up The air conditioning settings cannot be changed in REST mode Deactivating the function gt Press button YT on the front control panel The indicator light on the button goes out or Switch on ignition The indicator light on the button indicates the previous setting Note on operation lf the battery voltage is too low REST mode is restricted initially and then switched off AC mode In automatic mode AC mode is always activated The power of the compressor from the air conditioning system is regulated fully automatically according to requirements At outside temperatures below approx 38 F 3 C the air conditioning compressor is switched off automatically For information on switching automatic mode on and off gt Please see the chapter SWITCHING AUTOMATIC MODE ON OFF on page 77 Air Conditioning 7 1 Switching on AC mode If you wish to cool the p
51. Fault Transmission warning Effects Restricted gearshift comfort reverse gear fails Action required Have the fault corrected immediately Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Red Fault Transmission warning Effect Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a stop Action required It is not possible to continue driving Stop the vehicle immediately in a suitable place Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop Warning Gearbox temperature too high Effects Warning jerks can be felt when driving off and the engine power may be restricted Action required Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on a hill for example Hold the vehicle with the brake Reduce engine load Stop the vehicle in a suitable place if possible Allow the engine to run in selector lever position P or N until the warning disappears gt Please see the chapter REDUCED DRIVING PROGRAM on page 199 gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE DOPPELKUPPLUNG PDK on page 193 Battery Alternator ra Warning message The warning message Fault Generator will appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel if the vehicle electrical system voltage drops significantly gt Stop ata safe place and switch the engine o
52. Gare Switching on AUTO position ere PT Tan eT 92 Lights Care IMSUMUCTONS erreser eenen EA Replacing BUDS cer a nee a 308 Switching front reading light on off E E ee 98 Switching front reading lights on off automatically 99 Switching on when entering the vehicle 95 Switching on when leaving the vehicle 95 Load Disengaging luggage compartment cover 231 General information on eos ee ee Pee 228 Loading and securing ski bag eee LIL Position of tie COWNn ringS eee eee eee a 227 Removing installing retractable luggage cComparmaent COVED a 229 Retractable luggage compartment cover pulling Out retracting ccccceecccesssssteeeeeessssees 229 Loading Disengaging luggage Eaten COVEF onanan 231 General intormations e e ee a a 228 Loading and securing ski bag Pree ream tre ao Position of tie down rings ccc cccccccsessseeeeeeeees 227 Removing installing retractable luggage COMpartMent COVED sisaisediericnatenmviesiomnmnicneeo Retractable luggage compartment cover pulling Out retracting aee ierann meee Loading int OnmAtlONesmsacticateieetetadiigsitiaaainiteienaaatan tan ite 236 336 Index Loadspace Opening and closing the floOr ccccccsecceceeesrees 227 OKEE T 221 Position of tie down aS eee P27 Lock child lock Enabling disabling opening rear doors from ECE i ee cre E T E E A a Enabling disabling power windows switches in Mere mdoa E T ES Switching rear control
53. MEU gees 200 Y Reiss talk a terre mene oe eee 96 U Ultrasound sensor ParkASSISt ccccccccccssessseeeeeeeesees 239 Undercoating care ET occ cecccsseecccssseecccsssseeece 273 Universal audio interface installation position STAEN 192 Unlocking Opening vehicle door from insid ee OL Unlocking and opening tailgate ccccceeee 25 Unlocking vehicle door from inside 0 ccceecee 32 Unlocking vehicle door with car key remote control 23 Unlocking vehicle door with Porsche Entry amp Drive EAU E Preteens mene dene RO 23 IS ok VLA 1 8 a3 a E ONC ir lent nee 112 USB interface installation po DON a i 192 Using engine residual ETE I EE E NE Air conditioning system e E are 71 V Vani MOE ee a A Vehicle BrE E A E E E O E E E E 19 S e E E 304 Vehicle dalana a a A Vehicle door Locking from inside ceecee eee at Locking with car key remote control 006 24 Locking with Porsche Entry amp Drive keyless 24 Malfunctions when opening and closing 35 Switching child lock for rear doors on off 32 Unlocking with car key remote control 000 23 Unlocking with Porsche Entry amp Drive keyless 23 Vehicle information Retrieving on multi function display 0000 119 Vehicle key remote control Changing Dattery ereet eea aaea eE aaea a COT Vehicle settings Adapting multifunction display
54. Off delay a 0 a E PAE RC MICRe ood eek 95 CO ye E ees seer E see es E sopeeutesse eceest 254 Change Bet a Bini ghar ia eas E A E A T T256 Change quantiD ea euerect 329 Checking level E E T ET T2 Consumption ssuvcerenssusuannanavnecrsassithesnearaseelaneannensiwanats 6 Filler Oea 255 General information c ccccccccssssecesessssssteeeeees 254 ENIES E E ea E E E 121 EEE a a a ee mr nnrr ner 152 Oil level warning on the multi function display 255 Temperature gauge cccccccscecseecssseeesseeesssaees 110 NOP OI a a ervseeecracavinetreeevreasss 255 On board computer Measuring oil level T 121 Menu OVErViICW ccccceeeeeees eee ae 117 Multi function display ccccccccesssssceceeesessseeeeeees ald bo Operating PFINCIPle os sesess sees ccssessentaneees Serene ol 5 Overview of warning messages sccceceeeesseeeeees 152 Tire Pressure Monitoring 127 Opening and closing Closing tailgate automatically cccccccseeseeeeee 28 Engine compartment lid ccccccccceeessssseeeeeeeeeees 23 Locking vehicle door with car key remote contoh mame een mm or Oh 2A Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry amp Drive er 24 Luggage compartment flOr 227 Opening and locking vehicle door from inside 31 Opening tailgate aE a a 27 Mde alll Eis 0 10 mee ene meer are ona ee ne erate ner ad 88 Unlocking vehicle door with car key remote COMMON cscsacssmsavsssissnaciniay
55. Programming signal changeable code system 244 Programming signal fixed code system 244 Hot exhaust pipes 6 veceosetncencnarnstusborsndcnesenrysetecrenstceancameasaens l Identification number position cnr 323 Ignition lock Emergency operation of the key c csccesseeeees 166 FUNCTION all GOSCIPTION a a a 5 oe ane nnescesteceecee 164 Removing ignition key PDK transmission 195 Immobiliser Functional description eine 250 EE O A E E E E OO Inclination sensor kunctiomindie atoni a a a cenit EA 249 Switching off with button in door handle Porsche Entry amp Drive cascacsuescermssitisseietesrm AO Switching off with car key cccceeeeee Pees 247 Instrument cluster Adu tne Mentine a adic 95 Cooling system temperature gauge 110 Engine oil temperature 2auge ccceeeeeeeee L10 Fuel SAU SC menee e RE E E 111 odometer a ts unienamaases ke SHCOCOMEIEN cision ceseeavaveeecavignacectadsauetciasteceennes 110 Tachometer a eeateats een ere Vee 110 Warning and indicator lights overview 107 Instrument panel cal UES vi a esa edi 1a een ree T O Cooling system temperature gauge S 110 Engine oil temperature gauge rere ees 110 puele uce a E cree aes 111 Gale gil i l gemma nemo nase nse ine enon anes eee speedometer a T Maehometer a E 110 Warning and indicator lights overvieW 00 107 Interior mirror Switching automatic anti dazz
56. Revers opt and confirm 2 Select Blind opening 3 Confirm selection Rear roll up blind is lowered Teak Rear roll up blind is not lowered Locking settings The locking and unlocking settings on the vehicle can be adjusted The Easy Entry function can be switched on and off 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Locking and confirm Setting door unlocking You can configure specific doors to unlock when the vehicle is unlocked 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Locking 2 Door unlock and confirm 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options All doors All doors and the tailgate are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked Driver s door The driver s door and the tailgate are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked Setting door locking You can configure the doors to remain unlocked or lock automatically after a delay on entering the vehicle 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Locking 2 Door lock and confirm 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options Off The doors are not locked automatically after entering the vehicle After ign on The doors are locked automatically when the ignition is switched on After drive off The doors are locked automatically after driving off Switching Comfort
57. Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Display and confirm Selecting main menu display contents Individual elements in the main menu can be hidden and shown as required The main menu items Audio Navigation Map Phone Trip Tire pressure and Sport Chrono can be hidden or shown The Settings menu item cannot be hidden 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Display 2 Menu scope and confirm Select the desired main menu items 4 Confirm selection Menu item is displayed ial Menu item is hidden OO Adapting display contents of audio main menu In the audio main menu you can display either a list of all radio stations currently within range or a list of all stored radio stations 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Display 2 Audio and confirm 3 Select the desired display contents and confirm Available display contents Station list List of stations currently within range Preset list List of stored stations For information on the station and preset lists gt Please observe the separate operating manual for the Porsche communication Management PCM Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 139 SWH3 Vehicle Ei 12 5v M 216mi 194 f 01 14 2009 10 27 am 8 F Multi function display configuration example Adapting di
58. Stopping the engine The Auto Start Stop function stops the engine as soon as the vehicle stops moving 1 Use the footbrake to hold the vehicle in place 2 Keep the footbrake pressed or Move PDK selector lever to position P Preconditions for stopping the engine Engine compartment lid closed Driver detected driver s seat belt fastened and driver s door closed PDK selector lever in position D N or P or transmission range 1 or 2 selected manually Engine transmission and battery are at operating temperature Vehicle was driven at a speed of more than approx 1 mph 2 km h for at least 1 5 seconds since the engine last stopped automatically Starting the engine The Auto Start Stop function starts the engine gt In PDK selector lever position D N or manually selected transmission range 1 or 2 Release the footbrake or Press the accelerator or gt Move PDK selector lever to position R You can drive off normally Note The engine will start automatically in certain situations e g if the vehicle starts rolling if air conditioning causes reduced comfort or if the brake booster vacuum is reduced Starting the engine manually after leaving the vehicle lf the driver s seat belt is unbuckled or the driver s door is opened after the engine was stopped automatically the engine will not start automatically Furthermore if the brake is released the engine has to be starte
59. The indicator light on the button goes out The engine stops automatically when the vehicle stops 170 Driving and Driving Safety Auto Start Stop function display Stopping the engine automatically and restart readiness lf the engine was stopped automatically by the Auto Start Stop function and if the driver is detected in the vehicle driver s seat belt fastened and driver s door closed the indicator light on the multi function display in the instrument panel will light up green Engine does not stop or is not ready to restart If the Auto Stop function is not available or if no driver is detected in the vehicle after the engine has stopped automatically driver s seat belt open or driver s door open the indicator light on the multi function display in the instrument panel will light up yellow when the vehicle is stationary The Auto Start Stop system has detected that Atleast one precondition for stopping the engine automatically is not met or There is at least one exception for the Auto Start Stop function For information on preconditions for stopping the engine automatically gt Please see the chapter PRECONDITIONS FOR STOPPING THE ENGINE on page 169 For information on exceptions for the Auto Start Stop function gt Please see the chapter EXCEPTIONS FOR THE AUTO START STOP FUNCTION on page 169 Note lf the indicator light in the multi function display continuousl
60. Throughout this booklet left is designated as the driver s side of the vehicle and right as the passenger s side of the vehicle Text illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on the information available at the time of printing It has always been Porsche s policy to continu ously improve its products Porsche therefore reserves the right to make changes in design and specification and to make additions or improve ments in its product without incurring any obliga tion to install them on products previously manu factured We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable driving in your Porsche 4 Important For your own protection and longer service life of your car please heed all operating instructions and special warnings These special warnings use the safety alert symbol followed by the words Danger Warning and Caution These special warnings contain important messages regarding your safety and or the potential for damage to your Porsche Ignoring them could result in serious mechanical failure serious personal injury or death gt Do not alter your Porsche Any alteration could create dangerous conditions or defeat safety engineering features built into your car gt Do not misuse your Porsche Use it safely and consistently with the law according to the driving conditions and the instructions in this manual Alteration or misuse of your Porsche could cause accidents and serious person
61. a Seem E Cem 46 Warning light on the tometer a45 Safety button in the armrest Disabling rear control Pale and power windows 80 Safety compliance sticker e eeaeee 322 Sealant sealing set For defective TINGS oitecussnncet auiieueesmasts enue 293 Seals Care iNStUCHONS cance ce eeveteeeseosestta eens 275 Seat belts Care instructions cacacssnnsnaneainurebessneavaneeaivaectuecianetne 10 Seamer E E ss 40 Seat VENIAM 2c cccniecesecsereseucs seseceeses erences vee 44 ie a teen meena an eter teenie mans 44 Switching ON ecosssecsscssssisesesssssivessessssieessesssseeesesssss 44 Seats Adjusting the front Seat 6006 See een eae 39 Child restraint system eerren cep cece eee 2 Folding rear Seats fOrward ccecsccccscesssssseeeeees 226 FE E E a ea betta yee eed ee E S 38 Gh avitiiehctie a ieiccuastel iii ieteriene nee 38 Retrieving settings memory Geert E 41 Storing setings memory eee eee e 41 Selector lever position display PDK transmission 194 Setting air quantity ANPE OC MONI ES SYSTEM cectieccetnriecctquiaterceeeusreea 79 Setting automatic air recirculation mode Air conditioning SYSTOM 2 ccccciced ciecpseeeeesseceneneessccer 7D Setting fan Air conditioning SYSt M ccccccccceeeessssseeeeeeeseees 79 Setting temperature Air conditioning SYSte M cc ccccscsssssseeesssssssseee JO Setting the date cccccccsscceecesssseeeeesssssseeeeeeessesseeees 147 Setting the time 06 reed
62. a leather cleaner Always read the instructions for use given on the containers We recommend the Porsche leather care product gt Treat cleaned leather only with a leather care product We recommend the Porsche leather care product Cleaning carpet floor mats gt Use a vacuum cleaner or a brush not too soft for cleaning V Heavy dirt and stains can be removed with a stain remover We recommend Porsche stain remover To protect carpets the Porsche range of accessories includes mats of the correct size and with the appropriate fastening 1N Warning Risk of an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Always check the movement of the pedals before driving and make sure that they are not obstructed by a floor mat or any other object gt Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding into positions that could interfere with the safe operation of your vehicle do not lay them loosely in the vehicle Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you floor mats of correct size including a securing possibility Maintenance and Car Care 275 Cleaning air bag covers 1 Danger Risk of serious or fatal injury from impaired operation of the air bag system caused by incorrect cleaning gt While it is appropriate to use normal surface cleaning methods on the interior of your vehicle do not undertake deep cleaning of air bag related components such as the padded covers on the steeri
63. air conditioned area to switch back to automatic mode lf the air quantity was reduced so much that OFF appears on the air conditioning system display the supply of air from the outside is interrupted 1N Warning Risk of accidents due to impaired vision The windows can mist up if the air quantity setting is OFF gt Only select air quantity setting OFF for short periods gt If windows mist up press amp for the left and right vehicle side on the front control panel upwards increase air quantity Air distribution front control panel Setting air distribution manually Front control panel gt Press button Sj The air flows to the windshield and the side windows gt Press button Di The air flows from the central and side vents The air vents must be open gt Press button ZS The air flows to the footwell The indicator light on the button lights up Air distribution rear control panel 4 zone air conditioning Rear control panel 4 zone air conditioning gt Press button oF The air flows from the central vents and the vents in the door pillars The air vents must be open gt Press button ws The air flows from the central vents into the footwell and from the vent in the door pillar gt Press button ZW The air flows into the footwell and from the vent in the door pillar The indicator light on the button lights up Air Conditioning 79 Cancelling manual air distributio
64. and render the occupants unconscious if longterm exposure occurs resulting in an accident In a stopped vehicle carbon monoxide can also lead to death gt Always keep the tailgate closed when the engine is running gt Always keep the tailgate closed while driving Unlocking with the key 1 Press button lt 2 Press the unlocking handle arrow on the tailgate and open the tailgate Opening and Locking 25 Unlocking with Porsche Entry amp Drive keyless 1 Warning Risk of being locked out of vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Do not leave the key in the vehicle if the vehicle is locked and access can be gained through the tailgate The vehicle is automatically locked when the tailgate is closed If the key is left in the vehicle the emergency flasher flashes once and a horn signal sounds Within approximately 30 seconds the tailgate can be opened by pressing the unlocking handle arrow After 30 seconds have elapsed the vehicle can be unlocked again only with the second key If you are in the rear area of the vehicle with the key and press the unlocking handle the tailgate is unlocked gt Press the unlocking handle on the tailgate and open the tailgate 26 Opening and Locking The tailgate has a power closing mechanism 1 Pull down the tailgate by means of the closing handle arrow and press gently into the lock The tailgate is automatically pulled closed 2 Briefl
65. are removed mark the direction of rotation and position of each wheel Example FR front right FL RR and RL gt Always fit the wheels in accordance with the markings Minor Repairs 287 Snow chains 1N Warning Risk of damage to body axle or brake components gt Use only the fine link snow chains recom mended and authorized by Porsche so that sufficient clearance between the wheel well and the chain is assured gt Please see the chapter WHEELS TIRES on page 325 gt Follow instructions issued by the supplier of the chains Fit snow chains only on the rear axle gt Remove spacers If snow chains are mounted gt Before fitting chains remove accumulated ice and snow from the wheel well gt Vehicles with snow chains must not be driven faster than 30 mph 50 km h Different states and countries have varying statu tory requirements regarding maximum speed gt Check with local authorities for possible restrictions gt Remove chains as soon as the roads are free of ice and snow 288 Minor Repairs 593 339 Example of Inscription Inscription on radial tire A Tire size Example P 265 40ZR18 101Y P The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle This information is not included on all tires 265 Indication of tire width in mm 40 Indication of tire height to tire width ratio in percent ZR Belt type code letter for radial 18 Indication of rim diam
66. as ISOFIX to the LATCH anchorages You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compatible at your authorized Porsche dealer gt Always observe the separate installation instructions for your child seat A statement by the seat manufacturer of compliance with this federal standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint 1 Danger Risk of serious personal injury or death to the child gt Follow all child restraint instructions and warnings in this manual When using an infant or child restraint system be sure to follow all manufacturer s instructions on installation and use Infants and small children should neither be held on the lap nor should they share a safety belt with another occupant while the vehicle is in motion Children too big for child restraint systems must use regular safety belts A shoulder belt can be used providing it does not cross the face or the neck of the child Choose a child restraint system according to the age and size of the child Child restraint systems that are damaged or have been heavily stressed in an accident must be replaced immediately Children could be endangered in a crash if their child restraints are not properly secured in vehicle Do not affix objects to child restraint systems or cover them with other materials gt For maximum safety and protection do not u
67. as the For information on setting the off delay for the interior light gt Please see the chapter SETTING INTERIOR LIGHTING OFF DELAY on page 143 Switching automatic interior lighting on and off gt Press button A When the automatic interior lighting is switched off the indicator light in the button lights up When the automatic interior lighting is switched on in darkness the interior lighting is switched on when a door is unlocked or opened when the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock or when the steering wheel is locked on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive ignition is switched on or the vehicle is locked Orientation lighting Lights in the front operating console the inner door handles the storage trays and the rear light units help vehicle occupants to locate important controls in the vehicle in darkness and ensure better overall orientation The lights are switched on when the vehicle is unlocked and switched off again automatically when the vehicle is locked Dimming brightness adjustment The brightness of the orientation lighting is adjusted on the multifunction display For information on adjusting the brightness of the orientation lighting gt Please see the chapter ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS OF ORIENTATION LIGHTING on page 143 Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 99 Automatic interior light switch off function In darkness the interior lighting
68. battery is located in the battery box under the left front seat Charge state A well charged battery will not only prevent starting problems but will also last longer In order to avoid unintended battery discharge gt Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city traffic on short trips or in a line of traffic gt Always remove the ignition key from the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle or switch ignition off in vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Avoid using the Porsche Communication Management system and the audio system when the engine is not running Maintenance note In the cold season in particular or if you mainly drive only short distances it may become necessary to recharge the battery from time to time Minor Repairs 303 Battery care gt Ensure that battery is securely mounted gt Keep terminals and connections clean and properly tightened Corrosion can be prevented by coating the terminals and connections with petroleum jelly or silicone Spray gt Ensure that vent caps are securely tightened to prevent spillage Checking the electrolyte fluid level only on low maintenance batteries Generally the electrolyte level must be checked more often in summer than in the winter and more often when driving long distances gt When adding water use only clean containers In no case may alcohol e g window cleaner residues be permitted to enter the battery gt Unsc
69. by using multigrade oils since these are largely independent of seasonal fluctuations in temperature lf your vehicle is used frequently in stop and go traffic in cold weather the engine will not always be properly warmed up Condensation from products of combustion may accumulate in the oil In this case it is advisable to change the oil more frequently so that your engine once again has 100 efficient engine oil Engine oil performance class Engine oil is not only a lubricant but also serves to keep the engine clean to neutralize the contaminants which penetrates into the engine through combustion and to protect the engine against corrosion To perform these functions the oil is provided with additives which have been specially developed for these functions The efficiency of an oil is expressed for example by the API ILSAC or ACEA classifications Viscosity Like all liquids engine oil is viscous when cold and thin bodied when warm The viscosity of an oil is expressed by its SAE class For cold viscosity measured at temperatures below 32 F 0 C the SAE class is given as a number and the letter W as in winter for hot viscosity measured at 212 F 100 C the SAE class is given only as a number The viscosity of an oil is therefore always the same If it has the same number of an SAE class Oils with two viscosities are called multigrade oils oils with only one viscosity are termed single grade
70. can be continuously adjusted manually to protect against the direct entry of sunlight The slide tilt roof can be slid open or lifted at the rear 1N Warning Risk of injury when operating or automatically closing the slide tilt roof gt Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured when the slide tilt roof is operated gt Always remove ignition key when leaving the vehicle or switch ignition off on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive Always take the ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle Uninformed persons e g children could injure themselves when operating the slide tilt roof gt In case of danger operate the sliding roof button in the opposite direction or release the car key immediately if using the comfort function im iM a Operational readiness of the slide tilt roof With ignition switched on maximum of 10 minutes after the ignition is switched off but only until driver s or passenger door is first opened Note on operation The slide tilt roof has a force limiter If obstructed during the closing process the slide tilt roof opens again immediately Operating slide tilt roof The slide tilt roof is operated using the button in the overhead operating console The sliding roof button has a two stage function for all directions of motion lf the button is moved to the first setting in one direction the slide tilt roof is adjusted manually in the
71. chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Measured oil level The oil level reading is shown on the segment display in the oil level menu lf the segments are filled in up to the top line the oil level has reached the maximum mark gt Under no circumstances add engine oil If the bottom segment is filled in the oil level has reached the minimum mark The message Check Minimum reached appears on the multi function display gt Add engine oil immediately If the bottom segment is red the oil level has dropped below the minimum mark The message Oil level below minimum appears on the multi function display gt Add engine oil immediately Top up quantity The difference between the minimum and maximum marks on the segment display is approx 1 litre One segment of the display corresponds to a top up quantity of approx 0 26 US quarts 0 25 liters gt Never add more engine oil than required to reach the maximum mark Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 121 591 305 The maximum permitted engine filling capacity has been exceeded Exceeding the maximum Capacity may result in blue smoke formation and cause long term damage to the catalytic converters depending on the overfill quantity and various external influences lf too much engine oil was added the message Oil level Maximum reached appears on the multi function display gt Have the oil quanti
72. control stalk Cruise control readiness The grey symbol on the multi function display in the instrument panel indicates readiness Maintaining and storing speed 1 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed using the accelerator pedal 2 Push the control stalk on the steering wheel forward position 1 The current driving speed is now stored as the desired speed which will be maintained automatically Desired speed ia The desired speed that was stored is displayed under the cruise control symbol which has now turned orange Accelerating e g to overtake Variant 1 gt Increase the speed as usual with the accelerator pedal When you ease off the accelerator the previously stored value is set again Variant 2 gt Push the control stalk on the steering wheel forward position 1 The desired speed is increased in steps of 1 mph 1 km h or Press the control stalk on the steering wheel forward and keep it pressed position 1 The desired speed is increased in steps of 5 mph 10 km h The new desired speed is displayed on the multifunction display in the instrument panel Decelerating gt Briefly pull the control stalk on the steering wheel towards the steering wheel position 2 The desired speed is decreased in steps of 1 mph 1 km h or Pull the control stalk on the steering wheel towards the steering wheel and keep it pulled position 2 The desired speed is decreased in step
73. copper in brake dust must not remain too long on alloy wheels Contact corrosion can cause pitting Note Cleaners with an oxide removing effect or wrong pH value as are commonly used for other metals as well as mechanical tools and products will damage the oxide layer and are therefore unsuitable gt Use only cleaners for alloy wheels pH value 9 5 Products with the wrong pH value can destroy the protective layer on the wheels We recommend Porsche cleaner for light alloy rims gt f possible wash the wheels every two weeks with a sponge or washing brush If the wheels are exposed to road salt grit or industrial dust weekly cleaning is necessary gt Every three months after cleaning treat the wheels with car wax or an acid free grease e g Vaseline Rub the grease in well with a soft cloth gt Please see the chapter CLEANING IN CAR WASHES on page 271 4 Danger Danger of accident resulting in serious personal injury or death if cleaning agents e g wheel cleaning agents come into contact with the brake discs The resulting film on the brake discs can impair braking performance gt Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into contact with the brake discs gt lf cleaning agent has come into contact with the brake discs clean the brake discs thoroughly with a strong jet of water gt Paying attention to any road users behind you dry the brake discs by applying the brakes Stainle
74. coverings or pillows to the passenger s seat Do not affix things to the passenger s seat or cover it with other materials Do not cover the back of the backrest Do not make changes to the passenger s seat the cushion or foam the occupant sensor and to the seat base frame No changes must be made to the wiring or components of the air bag system Do not install any wiring for electrical accessory equipment in the vicinity of the air bag wiring harnesses Doing so may disable the air bag system or cause inadvertent inflation gt lf the warning light comes on the air bag system should be repaired immediately by your authorized Porsche dealer gt Always keep feet in the footwell while driving Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat area Do not lean against the inside of the door or outside the window while the vehicle is moving gt Using accessories not approved by Porsche can cause the occupant sensing to be impaired gt Do not squeeze objects such as the fire extinguisher or first aid kit under the seat gt Only have seats removed and installed by an authorized Porsche dealer so that occupant sensing components will not be damaged gt Give your passenger all of the information in this chapter Note Air bag components e g steering wheel seats may be disassembled only by an authorized Porsche dealer gt When disposing of a used air bag unit our Safety instructions must be followed
75. data Driving performance cccccccceesscccccssseeeessseeeeeees 329 PINGING ae a esas eee eae eeu 324 Tire pressure psi ban me a aaa ae GLO WINES wheds ma enn 325 NCI ONES pacer mania oni eaa seein te 328 Technical modifications to the vehicle information 235 ASIE E E E anatase E N Using via multi function Spa 125 Test stands Brake test a eager ieee caneer ae 253 Performance test QOD Theft protection ORR ere ee Ree On E eee Fo Tie down PINGS ssessesseseesesaseeeeesaescsessnnsnescsnitensancnneen 228 Tie down rings fastening pone in 1 luggage COMPon ile It sreue teas A E ian cc eee ene 227 Tire E E a E E E TRO E E E E E A cenncaoetecaerenes 283 BLE Tee 0 E rete nea eae my ert ener 281 Se a nee CR er rei ne Pr noma iain E ES Tire DNE S SURE so cas sussesnarysiiacuenitsdtenevensytanessnsriscnanconsldatien st 326 Air pressure psi bar Pirie E E earner reer ie 326 BEIT OFS174 Dan a E eer 326 340 Index Pline miormaton e ae a tence amc e tenn ttcen enn nnn 129 Selecting comfort pressure sssrin 131 SHeed Wane ayaa r a a el System learning 6 aiied sesriincanenaseoresnrneesevensusrancrssated O4 Tire pressure plate 323 Tire type information ccceesseceeeees R 130 ET iir cope ener reece rte E en ener eee ats Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM oo ccscccsssscccccsssseesecessssseeee127 Tire pressure plate oe ean eee ee ee 323 TIRES CALAN E os A E E A tations 279 Tire sealant sea
76. delay for the lighting in the passenger compartment after closing the vehicle doors can be adapted individually 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Interior lights 2 Fade out and confirm 3 Set desired off delay and confirm Setting wiper operation You have the option of adjusting the activation mode of the rain sensor and the rear wiper 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Wiper and confirm Setting rain sensor activation Activation of the rain sensor for the windshield wipers on the windshield in wiper stalk position 1 can be adjusted For information on the front wipers gt Please see the chapter FRONT WIPER AND HEADLIGHT WASHER SYSTEM on page 102 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Wiper 2 Rain sensor and confirm 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options Automatic The rain sensor is activated automatically if the wiper stalk is in position 1 when the ignition is switched on Manual The rain sensor remains deactivated if the wiper stalk is in position 1 when the ignition is switched on Setting activation of the rear wiper when reverse gear is engaged You can configure the rear wiper to automatically perform a series of wipes when it is raining when reverse gear I
77. display light up Temperature air quantity and air distribution are adjusted automatically for the relevant air conditioned area a i m re WHINE Note on operation lf necessary the automatic system can be controlled manually The manual setting is retained until the appropriate function button is pressed again or the button AUTO is pressed Rear control panel left air conditioned area ol khwONE Db Air conditioning display left side AUTO mode left side automatic mode Temperature left side Air quantity left side Air to door vents and central vents left side Air to door vents central vents and to footwell on left side Air to door vents and footwell on left side Rear control panel right air conditioned area Air conditioning display right side AUTO mode right side automatic mode Temperature right side Air quantity right side Air to door vents and central vents right side Air to door vents central vents and to footwell on right side Air to footwell right side Air Conditioning 17 Temperature and air quantity front control panel Setting temperature For personal comfort the interior temperature can be adjusted individually between 60 F 16 C and 87 F 29 5 C Recommendation 72 F 22 C The selected temperature is shown on the display above the button TEMP Increasing temperature gt Press button TEMP for the rel
78. e Drinks Holder Cupholder c ccccsseeeeeeeeeeee 221 Front ASHAY saiman Nans 224 Rear ASU AY a core doutvaseor ties ech inecerstas 224 Cigarette Behta sci sacar wean 225 Refrigerated box in the rear of the vehicle 226 Folding Rear Seats Forward and Returning to Upright Position r S E AE 226 Luggage Compartment 221 Stowing Loads eae a e e eie 228 Luggage Compartment COVE seeen 229 Fixed Luggage Compartment Cover 231 SRV EG EE EE E a 231 Roof Transport System sssrinin 232 Loading Information secc 236 Parking woe ceeeceeneeececcecescensesereeseeeessresc ee OO PAINS SSM eee A 239 Rearview CaMera ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 241 Swivelling Down Mirror Glass as Par RIGA aa a weetaataeneinoinen 242 Garage Door Opener eerren 243 Alarm System and Theft Protection cscsscsssssescsseseesnseeeeses Alarm System and Passenger Compartment Monitoring ccccssssseeeeeeees 247 MOBIZZ err a a 250 Locking the Steering Column 0000080 250 Theft Protection cescascennerecetiesesanencvevtaas 250 Maintenance and Car Care 2091 Exercise Extreme Caution when Working ON your vehicle ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 252 Face Cll ees a neurites dreneterennrersets 254 Checking Engine Oil Level aneneen 254 Topping Up Engine Oll l 255 Checking Coolant Level and Adding 61510 F211 a E 257 Brake Fluid ncen 258 Washer Fluid ce 259 Power Steering si
79. engine is potentially hazardous If warning lights should come on to indicate improper operation they would go unnoticed gt Never leave the engine idling unattended Danger of fire close to the hot exhaust system gt Do not park or drive your vehicle where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system For information on the emission control system gt Please see the chapter EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM on page 262 gt lf your car catches on fire for any reason call the fire department Do not endanger your life by attempting to put out the fire Starting the vehicle gt Operate the footbrake gt Move PDK selector lever to position P or N gt Do not press the accelerator pedal The engine control unit will provide the correct starting mixture gt Turn the ignition key or control unit Porsche Entry amp Drive to ignition lock position 2 The starting process is carried out and completed automatically as soon as ignition lock position 2 start engine is reached The ignition key or control unit is reset automatically to ignition lock position 1 ignition on gt Do not operate the starter for more than approx 10 seconds If necessary repeat the starting procedure after a pause of approx 10 seconds Turn the ignition key back to ignition lock position O initial position first The first operation of the starter is ended automatically w
80. expressly ap proved by Porsche could void the user s authority to operate this equipment The alarm system monitors the following alarm contacts Alarm contacts in doors tailgate engine compartment lid and headlights Interior surveillance Movement in the interior when the vehicle is locked e g attempted theft after breaking a window Inclination sensor Tilting of the vehicle e g attempt to tow away the vehicle lf one of these alarm contacts Is interrupted the alarm horn sounds for approx 30 seconds and the emergency flasher flashes on and off After 5 seconds of interruption the alarm Is triggered again This cycle is repeated ten times Switching on gt The alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked Switching off gt The alarm system is deactivated when the vehicle is unlocked Note on operation gt f you unlock the vehicle with the emergency key in the door lock you must switch the ignition on ignition lock position 1 within 10 seconds of opening the door in order to prevent the alarm system from being triggered The vehicle is locked again automatically after 20 seconds if no doors are opened Switching off the alarm system if it is triggered gt Unlock vehicle doors with the remote control or Switch on ignition Switching off interior surveillance and inclination sensor If people or animals are remaining in the locked vehicle or the vehicle is being tra
81. fault Tire Pressure too low for speeds greater xxx Tire change Update settings Fault Tire pressure check Driving light on Parking light on Example Check front left direction indicator Dynamic cornering light defective Auto driving light control defective Check static cornering light left right Headlight beam adjust defective Rain light sensor defective Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Meaning Action required Temporary fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring system Tire pressure is not monitored Top speed for the preset comfort pressure exceeded The tire settings on the multi function display must be updated after changing a wheel Fault in Tire Pressure Monitoring system Tire pressure is not monitored Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Driving light side light on Left right parking light on The reported light is faulty Check bulb Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop The reported light is faulty Check bulb Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Adjust your speed and driving style Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Switch on wipers light manually Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Light in instrument pane
82. fingerprints scrapes or stickers on the surfaces This may cause poor sound quality Hold the disc only on the edge or center hole gt When notin use take the disc out of the player put the disc back into its case and store it away from dust heat damp and direct sunlight Leaving the disc on the dashboard in the sun can damage the disc 190 Driving and Driving Safety gt lf the disc gets dirty clean the disc by wiping the surfaces from the center to the outside in a radial direction with a soft cloth Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti static record preservative Disc cleaners are available in audio stores Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms Important legal and safety information regarding the use of cellular telephones Some states may prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving a vehicle Check the laws and regulations on the use of cellular telephones in the areas where you drive 1 Danger Risk of an accident Severe personal injury or death can result in the event of an accident Looking away from the road or turning your attention away from your driving can cause an accident and lead to serious personal injury or death When using your cellular telephone you should always gt Give full attention to your driving pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if traffic conditions so require and gt Keep both hands on the steering wheel use hand
83. fire extinguisher close at hand Incomplete or improper servicing may cause problems in the operation of the car If in doubt about any servicing have it done by your authorized Porsche dealer Improper maintenance during the warranty period may affect your Porsche warranty coverage Supplies of fluids e g engine oil washer fluid brake fluid or coolant are hazardous to your health Keep these fluids out of children s reach and dispose of them in accordance with the appropriate regulations Some countries require additional tools and special spare parts to be carried in your vehicle Please make enquiries before driving abroad Technical Modifications gt Modifications may be carried out on your vehicle only if approved by Porsche This ensures that your Porsche will remain reliable and safe to drive and that it will not be damaged as a result of the modifications Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you 1 Safety notes gt Only use genuine Porsche spare parts for your vehicle or spare parts of similar quality which have been manufactured according to the specifications and production requirements of Porsche These parts are available from your authorized Porsche dealer or a qualified specialist workshop Safety related accessories should only be used if they are from the Porsche Tequipment range or are tested and approved by Porsche Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advi
84. if swallowed Brake fluid also attacks paintwork gt Keep brake fluid out of children s reach gt Immediately rinse off spilled brake fluid with clean water gt fbrake fluid gets into your eye immediately rinse with clean water for a few minutes Then see a doctor immediately gt Please note all the information on the refill container of the brake fluid Changing brake fluid Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over time The absorbed water can impair braking efficiency gt Itis important therefore to have the brake fluid changed in accordance with the change intervals specified in the Maintenance booklet BRAKE Brake warning light USA The warning light on the instrument panel and the warning message on the multi function display alert you to the fact that the brake fluid level is too low and could indicate brake circuit failure if the pedal travel is greater than normal Brake warning light Canada Note on operation lf the warning light and warning message appear when driving gt Stop immediately in a suitable place gt Do not continue driving Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Washer Fluid We recommend window cleaner concentrates approved by Porsche for either summer or winter depending on the season Your auth
85. in the event of an accident gt To deactivate the emergency flasher switch off the ignition wait approx 5 seconds and then switch the ignition back on again For information on switching the ignition on and off gt Please see the chapter IGNITION LOCK STEERING LOCK on page 164 A Emergency Flasher The emergency flasher can be switched on regardless of the position of the ignition lock Switching on and off gt Press the emergency flasher button on the center console All turn signal lights and the indicator light in the button flash when the button is operated lf the emergency flasher remains active for longer periods the illumination phase of the flashing interval is shortened to preserve the lights 4 Danger Risk of an accident resutling in serious personal injury or death gt Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency repairs move the car well off the road Switch on the emergency flasher and mark the car with road flares or other warning devices gt Do not remain in the car Someone approaching from the rear may not realize your vehicle is stopped and cause a collision Danger of fire gt Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas where the hot ehaust system may come in contact with dry grass brush fuel spill or other flammable material Hot engine compartment components can burn skin on contact gt Before working on any part in the engine compartment turn the engin
86. in your vehicle you can use the function keys of the multi function steering wheel to operate the following Porsche communication systems Telephone PCM Multifunction display in the instrument panel Readiness for operation of the multi function steering wheel With ignition switched on gt Please observe the operating instructions supplied for the Porsche communication systems before operating the function keys Note on operation The Porsche communication systems cannot be switched on and off using the multi function steering wheel Function buttons on the multi function steering wheel The rotary buttons at the top left and right of the steering wheel can also be pressed Turn volume control bed Upwards increase volume Downwards decrease volume Press volume control Switch volume mute on and off Turn rotary knob Select highlight the main menu or menu item on the multifunction display by turning the rotary knob upward or downward Press rotary knob Go to submenu or activate selected function Press MFS button Call up the stored function The button can be assigned the desired function in the multi function display on the instrument panel gt Press Back button Return to the menu Press Handset Pickup button Accept a telephone call v 3 Press Handset Hangup button End or refuse a telephone call Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 63 Sun Visors gt
87. is switched on the seat and steering wheel move to the stored position Exiting the vehicle The steering wheel moves upwards After the ignition key is removed or After the ignition is switched off and the driver s door is opened on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive The driver s seat moves to the rear After the driver s door is opened Adjusting Rear Seats A Seat cushion depth adjustment B Backrest angle adjustment C Lumbar support adjustment backrest curvature for pelvic and spinal column support gt Press each control in the direction indicated by the arrows until the desired setting is reached 4 Caution Risk of damage When using a child restraint system on the passenger s seat the seat or the seat belt may be damaged if the passenger s seat is adjusted gt Ifa child restraint system is installed on the passenger s seat do not adjust the seat For information on child restraint systems gt Please see the chapter CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS on page 52 Adjusting Passenger Seat From Rear D E F G gt Adjusting backrest angle forward Adjusting backrest angle to the rear Adjusting seat forward and upwards Adjusting seat to the rear and downwards Press the button until the desired setting is reached Adjustment of the passenger seat from the rear control panel can be interrupted at any time by pressing one of the adjustment buttons on the pa
88. it comes to a stop Action required gt Itis not possible to continue driving Stop the vehicle immediately in a suitable place Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop gt Please see the chapter TOWING on page 316 Stopping gt Fora brief stop e g at traffic lights leave the selector lever in drive position and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal gt Do not hold the vehicle on a slope using the accelerator Use the brake pedal or the electric parking brake instead gt Before leaving the vehicle always apply the electric parking brake and move the selector lever to position P Parking gt Go easy on the accelerator gt When parking or maneuvering in a small space control the speed by careful use of the footbrake Driving in winter In wintry road conditions it is advisable to take steep inclines in manual mode This prevents gear changes occurring that could cause wheel spin Tow starting towing gt Please see the chapter TOWING on page 316 Reduced driving program If there is a fault in the transmission Depending on priority either the Gearbox emergency operation warning in yellow or red or the warning Gearbox temperature too high will appear on the multi function display Gearbox emergency operation warning in yellow Effects Restricted gearshift comfort reverse gear may not function Action required gt Hav
89. it locks securely All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop The steering wheel lock is faulty Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Relieve the steering lock by turning the steering wheel to the left or right Steering wheel heating is switched on Steering wheel heating is switched off For vehicles with PDCC Power steering fluid level too low Please visit a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Make sure that you have the car key with you Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Replace the battery in the car key i 7 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 15 Light in instrument panel Warning message on multi function N 2 Y lt Fault Porsche Entry amp Drive Multiple keys recognized in vehicle Close doors to lock vehicle Chassis system fault Chassis system failure Control on Control off not allowed not possible Vehicle extremely low Vehicle extremely high Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Meaning Action required Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Information message Several vehicle keys in the vehicle e g in the possession of a passenger Close all doors and the tailgate before locking the vehicle Vehicle handling may be affected Ada
90. level to trigger illumination of Tire Pressure Monitoring low tire pressure telltale Low tire pressure reduces the road safety of the vehicle and destroys the tire and wheel Tire Pressure Monitoring gives a warning about tire damage caused by a natural loss in pressure as well as about a gradual loss of pressure caused by foreign objects Tire Pressure Monitoring cannot warn you about tire damage that occurs suddenly e g flat tire due to abrupt external effects gt When a red tire pressure warning appears stop immediately in a suitable place and check the tires for damage If necessary remedy the damage with a tire sealant gt Do not by any means continue to drive with defective tires gt Sealing the tire with tire sealant is only an emergency repair so you can drive to the nearest specialist workshop The permitted top speed is 50 mph 80 km h gt Do not drive with tires in which the tire pressure drops again very quickly In case of doubt have tires checked by a specialist workshop gt Defective tires must be replaced immediately at an authorized Porsche dealer Tires must never be repaired under any circumstances gt f Tire Pressure Monitoring is defective e g defective wheel transmitter contact an authorized Porsche dealer immediately and have the damage repaired The tire pressure will not be monitored at all or will be monitored only partially when Tire Pressure Monitoring is defective Fo
91. lf the tire settings are not updated the message Tire change Update settings is displayed on the multi function display gt Update the multi function display settings the next time the vehicle is stationary Pressure increase as the result of temperature increase In accordance with physical principles the tire pressure changes as the temperature changes The tire pressure increases or decreases by 0 1 bar 1 5 psi for every 18 F 10 C change in temperature Partial monitoring Monitoring of the other wheels is continued if there is a fault in one or two wheel transmitters The tire pressure warning light lights up The message Restricted monitoring appears on the multi function display No tire pressures are displayed on the multi function display for wheels with faulty wheel transmitters No monitoring In the event of faults Tire Pressure Monitoring cannot monitor the tire pressure The warning light on the instrument panel lights up and a corresponding message appears on the multi function display Monitoring is not active if Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty if wheel transmitters for Tire Pressure Monitoring are missing during the learning phase after the tire settings have been updated after a wheel change without updating the tire settings if more than four wheel transmitters are recognized if there is external interference by other
92. loadspace floor in the luggage compartment The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts especially in the tire tread Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an emergency solution so you can drive to the nearest workshop Even if the tire is air tight Minor Repairs 293 it may only be used for short journeys in an emergency The tire sealant comprises a filler bottle a filler hose a valve turner a spare valve insert a sticker with the maximum permitted speed a compressor and instructions for use 1N Danger Risk of accident resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or punctures no larger than 0 15 in 4 mm gt Never use the tire sealant if the rim is damaged 294 Minor Repairs 1N Warning The sealant is highly flammable and potentially fatal if inhaled gt Fire naked flame and smoking are prohibited when handling tire sealant gt Avoid contact with skin eyes and clothing due to caustic chemical properties of the tire Sealant gt Keep tire sealant away from children gt Do not inhale vapours due to the consequent harm to personal health resulting in serious personal injury or death In the event of contact with sealant gt lf sealant gets on your skin or into your eyes thoroughly rinse the affected part of your body immediately with plenty of water Change soiled clothing
93. luggage compartment Note on operation Plug sockets in the storage tray of the large The sockets and thus the connected electrical center console in the rear of the vehicle accessories function even if the ignition is Two additional plug sockets are located in the switched off or the ignition key is removed storage tray of the large center console in the rear of the vehicle if the relevant vehicle equipment Is lf the engine is not running and the accessories are switched on the vehicle battery will be discharged The power supply is interrupted after 30 minutes to protect the vehicle battery The ignition must then be switched on once in order to switch the load back on again fitted Minor Repairs 297 Changing fuses In order to prevent damage to the electrical system due to short circuits and overloads the individual circuits are protected by fuses One fuse box is located in the luggage compartment Two additional fuse boxes are located in the outer ends of the dashboard 1 Switch off the load with the defective fuse 2 Open the fuse box cover 3 Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot using the plastic gripper D in order to check tt A blown fuse can be identified by the melted metal strip 4 Replace only with fuses of the same rating We recommend that you use genuine Porsche fuses for replacement Note gt lf a fuse blows repeatedly Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recomme
94. multi function display on the instrument panel For information on air conditioning settings on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter SETTING AIR CONDITIONING on page 146 Air flow nk Three air flow settings low medium and high are available in automatic mode Soft Recommended for passengers sensitive to drafts with a preference for gentle air conditioning Normal Default setting Strong Stronger ventilation in the passenger compartment The air flow is clearly noticeable Cooler central vents The temperature of the air blown from the two central vents is reduced if the passenger compartment temperature control is not adjusted This setting is recommended for passengers with a preference for a fresh air flow to the head upper body area Air Conditioning 83 Extended ventilation panel For information on the extended ventilation panel gt Please see the chapter EXTENDED VENTILATION PANEL on page 81 Automatic air recirculation For information on automatic air recirculation mode gt Please see the chapter AIR RECIRCULATION MODE on page 74 84 Air Conditioning Switching off gt Press button Qu The indicator light on the button goes out Note On vehicles with heat absorbing glass optical distortion may occur due to the flat position of the rear window This distortion is increased when the heated rear w
95. oils Single grade oils can not be used in your engine The viscosity of the engine oil for your Porsche has to be chosen according to the ambient temperature given in the engine oil recommendation table Checking Coolant Level and Adding Coolant The coolant provides year round protection from corrosion and freezing down to 31 F 35 C 40 F 40 C in Nordic countries Observe the following points gt Use only antifreeze authorised by Porsche gt Check the coolant level regularly Coolant level When the engine is cold and the vehicle is level the red display must be under the arrow between the minus and plus markings gt Add coolant if necessary The maximum fill level is reached when the red display is under the plus marking gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 gt Please see the chapter EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE on page 252 Checking when engine is cold l Open cap on the reservoir carefully and allow any overpressure to escape Then unscrew cap completely 2 Read off the engine coolant level a Top up with coolant if necessary Do not top up over the plus marking Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water in equal parts Antifreeze in coolant 50 provides antifreeze protection down to 31 F 35 C Screw the cap on the reservoir closed until it locks securely Checking the coola
96. relevant direction Adjustment stops when the button is released f the button is moved completely to the second setting the slide tilt roof is opened or closed automatically one touch operation Actuate the switch again in any direction to stop the slide tilt roof in the desired position Reduced noise position when opening The slide tilt roof slides open both in manual mode and one touch operation mode until it reaches the best position from the point of view of wind noise Opening slide tilt roof fully Actuate the button lt gt again in opening direction to open the slide tilt roof completely When completely opened the slide tilt roof may generate wind noise depending on the speed of the vehicle Emergency operation of slide tilt roof 1N Warning Risk of serious personal injury and damage to the slide tilt roof when closing the slide tilt roof gt Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured when the slide tilt roof is operated Emergency closing after repeated intervention from the force limiter gt Remove the obstruction gt Repeatedly press or press and hold the sliding roof button lt in closing direction until the roof closes and stops in closed position Emergency operation if the slide tilt roof drive fails If the slide tilt roof is defective it can be closed or opened manually using the hexagon key from the tool kit gt Before using emergency operation check that
97. relia E A teen 147 Settings Adjusting on multi function display 138 Storing vehicle settings ccccssceeeeeeeees eee 40 Shifting gears Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK sisii 193 Side lights Installing headlights cccccccccccsessseceeeeeesseeeeeees QOQ Removing headlights eee eer eros Cc EE eeene aaa Papelera enue kere eatin ee eee 92 oide marker NSA ae E E A 313 Side marker light changing bulb for side marker el re 13 dem olkup Dind baleen as nak ance teenie unneege Sn ieee 65 Side TUT Sioral WWE aaa css ewstedveraecbrevene ener ole Ski bag Loading and Semina Sede E E E E OL ONIE e dese unneeevereaecon meres eer Al Slide Tilt roof Tool for emergency operation 00 Pere ere 279 Slide tilt roof Emergency unlocking ccccccccsesssseeeeesssssseeeeeee 89 Functional C SCrIPtION cccceececeeeesesaeeeeeeeeeeeeens 88 A VaN POG HGS A E E E E E 89 Snow chains General information cccccccsesecsessesssssatsateeeeess 200 NOW teo m eet cece ene cee aa ata Haas 287 Changing tires 4s iioinsrtcomannnsdddinerss vara wrssedanniwsve Ai SOK a P ON PEE 296 Speed code letter ON are ee eee e e DOO Speed control cruise control Accelerating eese eae Readies Tees 177 Decelerating ccccsssscsccccceceeseeeeesssssssssseaeeaees 177 Functional description vencccnccctaunsacomremrsiccormattaeeen 176 Intemuptng operation aeee eee a l toine peed e E E auctusesasiacant 17
98. reserve is approx 3 96 US gallons 15 liters for each 6 Operate the pump nozzle and refuel the vehicle Do not add further fuel once the correctly operated automatic pump nozzle has switched off Fuel could spray back or could flow over when heated 7 Replace the tank cap immediately after refuelling and close it until you hear and feel it locking 8 Close the filler flap and press on the rear of the filler flap until it engages securely If you lose the tank filler cap you must replace it only with an original part 4 Caution Risk of damage Decorative foils may fade if they come into contact with fuel gt Wipe off any spilled fuel immediately Fuel Can 4 Danger Risk of fire or explosion if the fuel can is damaged in an accident and fuel escapes Escaping vapors can be harmful to health gt Do not carry a fuel can on journeys gt Observe the relevant laws Emergency unlocking of the filler flap lf the electrical unlocking mechanism is faulty the filler flap can be opened as follows Pull the emergency release mechanism behind the right luggage compartment trim panel in direction of arrow The filler flap pops open Maintenance and Car Care 267 Fuel Recommendations Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic converters and must use UNLEADED FUEL ONLY Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of
99. restraint system cccccccccsseeeceeeceeeeeeeseees 56 Prescribed installation direction g PEAN on LNE OO E E E ners TS E E E E E E E 191 Care aaiae PE EEE ere ears ees 304 Changing in car cee eM MAT hiner manner tres 6 Charee state a a a a O05 E E a E a eerren re fee eee 307 General information 303 J umplead starting cee eee a SOO LOCAtION O a 303 Procedure after connection Dye aii aed desk betaine ct 305 PRG DIAC ING oe ener acess wanes umenni cers caseiesseramearieat 305 Vehicle electrical system pees indication E R 0A oE E I E a a A 4 Belt tensioner Functional descrnipion a e meee e a te 332 Index Ee e mi Aa E ce E E ir en en E E nem an Adjusting belt height EO on Teen tee T ee 47 Belt tensioner functional n reer te ma d5 Care INStrUCtiONnS cccccecscseeseesssteteeteeeteeeereeees 2 0 PAS UCN mE a receere toe eee ere reais aae 46 COINS ea a a Herctaaas asda teens a E E 46 Warning light on the tachometer 00c0000eeee 45 Bi Xenon headlight Changing bulb for auxiliary high beam headlight 311 Installing headlights ccccccccssscceeecssssseeeeeeeees 309 Removing dace Be certs en E 309 Brake booster E A meen tment Oy Brake fluid Caem E E teeer ree E ieee rer Pel ener eae 259 Warning light on speedometer 209 Brake pads Breaking in new brake PadsS ccccccccccceeeseesesseeees 6 Warning meee ES E E rcs 174 ME a A a E Ta 7 Brake wear Warning message cececccees
100. restraints Hy AEAEE EE N NS Headlight levelling automatic Functional description E R E 94 Headlights E E Pearl Care instructions REEE E EE EAEE AS 274 Changing bulb for auxiliary highbeam headlight soll JAS TAINS yetenetsn coe E 309 Operating washer SYSt M cccesseeeeeesssstteeees LO3 kemon eamenener ae eee Wreaeni nee eeshmn mannan emai 0 5 Heated rear window Switching on off RE Rr EE an Teer 84 Heated seats ccccccccccccsccecccccssesssssstrstsetteeseesessecsssssse Ao SUID MUN OTN eee ete ewer oe eee eee SAMIR MINE Ol acy eee E E teeters 43 Height adjustment CLC ch ee eoneee nee ee ener T 0 0 Warning message on the multi function display ae 210 High beam headlight CUI E E E E temo et High beam headlight a LACE Oe ee ne Tm 6 Changing bulb auxiliary high beam headlight eee a Installing headlights a cecetseee cectceteceeccteeeneeseeceeaee 309 Removing headlights serere 309 High pressure cleaning equipment ISIPUCTIONS TOF USE me e a AO Hillholder Drive off Assistant F nctional descriptione aeea 206 HOLD function Functional description eenen 200 Home mode Enty UNC io nneiveaen ermareuecreiree ener 95 Welcome Home function ccccccescreseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee OD HomeLink garage door opener Deleting programmed Signals c cccccccseeesseeeees 244 Functional description oe PRON an 243 Oeni Sere ence nt Pee Mes reer nee eet W245
101. retaining lugs A as outlined in the operating manual for the child seat 2 Pull the child seat to check that both fastening points are engaged correctly 3 lf the child restraint seat or seats require the use of a tether strap feed the tether strap B through the head restraint 4 Attach the tether strap to the anchor point behind the backrest and pull it tight Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 57 mo L J a P u amp oem i n De 91 012 Exterior mirror selection driver s side Exterior mirror selection passenger s side Adjusting exterior mirrors Folding in exterior mirrors J ovd Exterior Mirrors The convex mirror on the passenger s side and the aspherical mirror on the driver s side provide a larger field of view 58 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 1N Warning Risk of accidents Vehicles or objects appear smaller in convex mirrors and further away than they are in reality gt Bear this distortion in mind when estimating the distance of vehicles behind you and when reversing into a parking space gt Also make use of the interior mirror for judging distance Risk of damage to the exterior mirrors when washing the vehicle in a car wash gt Fold in exterior mirrors before using the car wash Adjusting exterior mirrors The electrical exterior mirror adjuster is ready for operation With ignition switched on After the ignition is switche
102. side Press button 2 up warmer or down colder Right vehicle side Press button 8 up warmer or down colder Left vehicle side Press button 3 up more or down less Right vehicle side Press button 9 up more or down less Air to windshield for left or right side Press button 4 or 10 Air to central and side vents for left or right side Press button 5 or 11 Air to footwell for left or right side Press button 6 or 12 Press button H Brief Overview Rear Control Panel 4 Zone Air Conditioning This brief overview does not replace the information provided under AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Warnings in particular are not replaced by this brief overview What do I want to do Switch on climate control Set temperature Set air quantity manually Set air distribution manually 4 ij a we oe wh What do I have to do Press the button 1 for the left side or the button 7 for the right side For left side Press button 2 up warmer or down colder For right side Press button 8 up warmer or down colder For left side Press button 3 up more or down less For right side Press button 9 up more or down less Air to door vents and central vents for left or right side Press button 4 or 10 Air to door vents central vents and to footwell for left or right side Press button 5 or 11 Air to door vents and footwell for left or right side Press button 6 or
103. side marker light 2 Press in securing spring until it engages securely gt Check operation of bulb 314 Minor Repairs Changing Light Emitting Diodes and Long Life Bulbs Daytime driving lights front side lights front turn signal lights gas discharge bulbs in Bi Xenon headlights as well as additional brake lights and interior lights have light emitting diodes and long life bulbs The LEDs cannot be replaced individually Replacement of the long life bulbs involves a greater amount of installation work gt Have defective LEDs and bulbs replaced in a qualified specialist workshop Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Headlight Adjustment gt Check tire pressure and adjust if necessary gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE FOR COLD TIRES 68 F 20 C on page 326 gt Please see the chapter REPLACING BULBS on page 308 Adjustment The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to drive and the fuel tank completely filled The driver s seat must be loaded by a person or a 165 Ibs 75 kg weight and the tire pressures must meet the prescribed values After being loaded the car must be rolled a few meters so that the suspension can settle For checking the headlight adjustment the vertical position of the cutoff of the lo
104. stopwatch displays in the vehicle 591 318 R Lap time stored Z Intermediate time not stored Stopping lap Starting new lap The current stopwatch time can be stored as a lap time while the stopwatch is still running 1 Select gt Chrono 2 Round and confirm The lap counter value C increases by one The time of the fastest completed lap is stored temporarily as a reference value B The stopwatch time A and the circle display D turn a different color to indicate whether the current lap time is quicker than slower than or identical to the current fastest lap Green Current lap time is faster Yellow Current lap time is identical Red Current lap time is slower Note lf a reference time has not been stored yet the reference time position B remains blank The segment display is not colored A maximum of 63 laps can be stored during each session Storing intermediate time You can store an intermediate time while the stopwatch is still running 1 Select gt Chrono 2 Select Int and confirm The intermediate time is displayed temporarily on the multi function display Timing continues in the background Stopping timing You can stop the stopwatch at any time 1 Select gt Chrono 2 Stop and confirm The stopwatch time A stops Continuing timing You can resume timing again after stopping the stopwatch 1 Select gt Ch
105. the decorative film when using high pressure cleaning equipment gt When cleaning components the water must not be hotter than 140 F 60 C and the pressure no greater than 580 psi 40 bar Always observe a minimum distance of 20 in 50 cm Care of door lock gt To prevent the door lock from freezing during the cold season cover the lock barrel with suitable adhesive tape while washing the vehicle lf the lock still freezes use an ordinary de icer In many cases a well warmed key can help Never use excessive force Car washing The best protection for the vehicle from the damaging effects of the environment is frequent washing and preservation The longer road salt road dust industrial dust insect remains bird excrement and tree sap resin pollen etc are allowed to remain on the bodywork the more harmful their effect Observe the following points in order to ensure that the vehicle is washed thoroughly without damaging the paintwork gt The underside of the vehicle should also be thoroughly washed at the end of the winter season at the latest gt Wash your vehicle only at sites provided for this purpose to prevent soot grease oil and heavy metals from entering the environment gt Dark colors are slightly more susceptible to scratching and require particularly careful paint care Dark paints make even the smallest surface blemishes scratches more conspicuous than lighter colors g
106. the compressor Minor Repairs 295 Electrical System In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or electronic systems electrical accessories should be installed at a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have the trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools for this type of work gt Use only accessories approved by Porsche 296 Minor Repairs 1N Warning Risk of short circuit and fire resulting in serious personal injury or death Replacing fuses or relays with the engine running or the ignition on could cause electrical shock gt Disconnect the negative terminal on the battery during all work on the electrical system gt Please see the chapter BATTERY on page 303 Relays Relays should be checked or changed only at an authorised workshop Plug socket in glove compartment Sockets Electrical accessories can be connected to the 12 V sockets You will find sockets in the glove box in the front and rear center consoles and in the luggage compartment depending on vehicle equipment Plug socket in the storage tray between the front seats Note The maximum electrical load of a socket is 20 A but only if no other loads are switched on Do not exceed 10 A per socket if several loads are operating simultaneously Plug socket in the storage tray between the rear seats Plug socket in the
107. tire sidewall T upto 118 mph 190 km h H upto 131 mph 210 km h V upto 150 mph 240 km h W upto 167 mph 270 km h Y upto 186 mph 300 km h Y upto 186 mph 300 km h as for Y tires Speeds of more than 185 mph 300 km h are also possible at a maximum tire load capacity of 85 confirmation from tire manufacturer required for speeds of more than 185 mph 300 km h Tip on driving Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be mounted only if they bear an M S identification on the tire sidewall gt Please note that in addition to snow tires all season tires are also subject to speed limits and bear this identification Rim width in inches Rim flange contour code letter Symbol for drop center rim Rim diameter in inches Double hump Rim offset in mm mAC TIO Inscription on alloy wheels The information is inscribed on the back of the spokes near the tire valve Minor Repairs 289 Jacking point for lifting platform and jack at the front Raising the vehicle with a lifting platform trolley jack or standard jack gt Before driving the vehicle onto a lifting platform make sure that there is sufficient space between the lifting platform and the vehicle 290 Minor Repairs Jacking point for lifting platform and jack at the rear 1N Caution Serious personal injury or death and or serious damage to the engine or ve
108. warning light lights up on the instrument panel while the engine is running the ABS has switched off because of a fault The warning message ABS failure appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 In this case the brake system will operate without lock prevention as on vehicles without ABS gt Adapt your driving style to the changed braking behavior The ABS must be checked by your authorized Porsche dealer in order to prevent the occurrence of further faults with unpredictable consequences Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools The ABS control unit is adjusted for the approved tire dimensions The use of tires with non approved dimensions can lead to different wheel speeds causing ABS to switch off Driving and Driving Safety 207 Porsche Active Suspension Management PASM The PASM system actively adjusts the shock absorbers The adjustable damper system selects the appropriate damping level for each wheel according to the driving situation and driving conditions Driving safety agility and comfort are optimised Three different chassis setups can be selected at the push of a button PA
109. 0 043 206 89 gt Observe the instructions and mixture ratios stated on the container It is important that the service intervals particularly the oil change intervals are observed in accordance with the specifications in the Maintenance booklet Maintenance and Car Care 265 Refuelling 1 Danger The RF energy from a cellphone can cause a sparking on bare metal much like aluminum foil in a microwave oven The spark could ignite gasoline fumes present while refuling Static discharge from your body can ignite gasoline fumes present when you get back out of the vehicle and touch the fuel nozzle In either case resulting fire can cause serious damage to the vehicle serious injury or death to persons in immediate vicinity gt Do not use a cellphone while pumping gas gt Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping gas 266 Maintenance and Car Care Rh e Stop the engine and switch off the ignition Open the filler flap by pressing on the rear part of the filler flap arrow The vehicle must be unlocked Slowly open and remove the tank cap Put the tank cap into the holder arrow Add the fuel additive recommended by Porsche if necessary Insert the pump nozzle fully into the filler neck The handle of the pump nozzle must point downwards Total capacity Panamera S approx 21 14 US gallons 80 liters Panamera 4S Panamera Turbo approx 26 42 US gallons 100 liters The
110. 1 Rain sensor operation Front windshield wipers Move wiper stalk upwards to the first click 2 Front windshield wipers slow Move wiper stalk upwards to the second click 3 Front windshield wipers fast Move wiper stalk upwards to the third click 4 Front windshield wipers one touch operation Move wiper stalk downwards The front windshield wipers carry out one wiping cycle 5 Front windshield wiper and washer system Pull wiper stalk towards the steering wheel The washer system wipes and sprays while the stalk is pulled towards the steering wheel When the wiper stalk is released a few drying wipes are performed After every 10 wipes on the windshield the headlights are cleaned automatically Maintenance notes gt f heavily soiled repeat wash gt Persistent dirt e g insect remains should be removed regularly For information on car care gt Please see the chapter CAR CARE INSTRUCTIONS on page 269 The front windshield washer nozzles are heated when the ignition is on as a precaution against freezing However this does not replace the use of antifreeze Rain sensor operation front windshield wipers In rain sensor mode the amount of rain on the windshield is measured Wiper speed is automatically adjusted accordingly At a speed of less than approx 2 mph 4 km h rain sensor operation is automatically activated if the windshield wiper is switched on If you exceed a speed of
111. 10 C Before connecting jumper cables a frozen battery must be thawed out Positive terminal for jump lead starting Ground point for jump lead starting External power supply jump lead starting Always observe the sequence below 1 Open the cap on the positive terminal for jump lead starting 2 Attach the positive lead first to the positive terminal for jump lead starting then to the positive terminal of the donor battery 3 Connect the negative lead first to the negative terminal of the donor battery then to the ground point for jump ead starting 4 Leave the engine of the donor vehicle running at a higher engine speed 5 Start the engine An attempted start using jump leads should not last more than 15 seconds Then wait for at least one minute 6 Disconnect the negative lead from the ground point for jump lead starting first then from the negative terminal of the donor battery 7 Disconnect the positive lead from the positive terminal of the donor battery first then from the positive terminal for jump lead starting 8 Close the cap on the positive terminal for jump lead starting Charging the battery Automotive batteries loose their efficiency when notin use The charge available in your battery can be measured with a battery hydrometer We recommend that the battery voltage be tested by your Porsche dealer who has the appropriate equipment lf the car is no
112. 12 Air Conditioning 69 Front air conditioning control panel Overview of Air Conditioning The following air conditioning system types may be installed depending on your vehicle equipment Automatically controlled 2 zone air conditioning The air conditioning system controls the preselected interior temperature completely automatically The temperature air quantity and air distribution can be set individually for the left and right air conditioned areas 70 Air Conditioning Rear air conditioning control panel 4 zone air conditioning Automatically controlled 4 zone air conditioning The air conditioning system controls the preset interior temperature completely automatically Temperature air quantity and air distribution can be set individually for the front left front right rear left and rear right air conditioned areas Vehicles with 4 zone air conditioning have an additional control panel on the rear center console G im ite o on Interior temperature sensor Sensors To avoid impairing the performance of the air conditioning system gt Do not cover or tape over the interior temperature sensor for the air conditioning system General Functions Note on operation Additional settings relating to the climate type and extended ventilation panel can be adjusted in the multifunction display on the instrument panel gt Please see the chapter AIR CONDITIONING SETTINGS ON THE MULTI
113. 12 Contents 7 Check Engine Emission Control 00088 114 ACOUSTIC Signals aseeni 114 Operating the Multi Function Display in the Instrument Panel ccccccccsseeeessseeeeeeeteeeees 115 Vehicle Settings on the Multi Function BS E E ene nat ET A EA A E 138 Overview of Warning Messages 152 Driving and Driving Safety 163 Ignition Lock Steering LOCK eeen 164 Starting and Stopping the Engine 167 Auto Start Stop Function scssi 169 Electric Parking Brake 171 Brak S E EE E E E E 172 Cr ise CONGO sirens ni 176 Adaptive Cruise Control 178 Car Audio Operation TIps sccecccceceeeeeeees 189 Porsche Communication ai di i PCM iinan nean E a l iPod USB and AUX 192 Voice Control esseeri raran 192 Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK 006 193 Selector Lever Positions acc 195 Porsche Traction Management PTM 202 Porsche Stability Management PSM 202 ABS Brake System Anti Lock Brake S E E EAE E E E 207 Porsche Active Suspension Management E Sl E EE E A A an 208 Porsche Active Suspension Management PASM with Air Suspension and Level Conio enn Mee Benen eae 209 Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control PDCC 211 Sport and Sport Plus Mode n se 212 8 Contents Sports Exhaust System s e 214 Retractable Rear Spoiler ccnn 214 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 217 NON AG E E eee
114. 2 13 Warning messages The warning message Sport mode error appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel in the event of a fault For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Note After the ignition is switched off Sport mode is automatically reset to Normal mode gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE ACTIVE SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT PASM on page 208 gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE DYNAMIC CHASSIS CONTROL PDCC on page 211 2 14 Driving and Driving Safety Sports Exhaust System Switching on and off The sports exhaust system can be switched to a sound optimised mode when the ignition is Switched on gt Press button 42 When the sports exhaust system is switched on the indicator light on the button lights up Retractable Rear Spoiler The rear spoiler improves driving stability at high speeds and reduces fuel consumption at low speeds Vehicles with a turbo engine have an enhanced rear spoiler with a larger aerodynamically effective spoiler surface thanks to additional flaps Automatic mode Automatic extension and retraction of the rear spoiler depends on various conditions Sport Plus mode deactivated The rear spoiler extends automatically to position A at approx 55 mph 90 km h to position B at approx 130 mph 205 km h The rear spoile
115. 30 miles 50 km If towing distances are greater the vehicle must be transported with a car transporter or on a trailer Panamera S Towing a vehicle with PDK transmission on one axle gt The vehicle must not be towed if the PDK transmission is in emergency operation mode yellow or red Gearbox emergency operation warning message The vehicle must be transported with a car transporter or on a trailer gt lf a selector lever emergency release was performed the vehicle must not be towed The vehicle must be transported with a car transporter or on a trailer gt Move PDK selector lever to position N To properly engage selector lever position N on the display and at the selector lever the engine must be started once before towing the vehicle The vehicle can be towed as soon as the selector lever is in position N and selector lever position N appears on the display gt Switch ignition off The ignition key must remain in the ignition lock so that the steering wheel lock does not engage The control unit must be removed from the ignition lock and the key inserted in vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Please see the chapter REMOVING THE CONTROL UNIT FROM THE IGNITION LOCK on page 165 gt Make sure that the vehicle is adequately illuminated gt Do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph 50 km h Maximum towing distance 30 miles 50 km If towing distances are greater the vehicle mu
116. 6 Switching Off ieee ee Ree 178 Switching E A PEASE 176 Speed mE 288 Pee domete e a a a E 110 O O E etn ences PPMP are carrier ne hprrenhed 135 Sport mode Porsche Doppelkupplung ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeneneees 195 SWIECHINE ON ONT E 2 Stainless steel tailpipes Care motu cions o a a ey a7 4 Standstill management Functional description E E 206 Stat StOM TUNG UON e denenesmunincet EE 169 Starting Enen ee OT Starting engine automatically Auto Start Stop UES E a E E a E A se 169 Steam jet cleaners instructions for use re 270 Steering column Locking with Porsche Entry amp Drive 165 Locking without Porsche Entry amp Driv 00 165 Steering column lock With Porsche Entry amp Drive cccccsccsseeeeessees 200 Without Porsche Entry amp E cesccsssssccccsssssseeseese 250 Steering wheel Adjustment ae e ee ganas nee are eee 62 Airbag unit ame eee enter ene NN NN A ere ey OL Changing button assignment on i multifunction steering WIEN eres cart cee tsatieedammbennieenauness 151 Multi function steering wheel with telephone NATON steer tet etter cage eee 63 Multi function presen wheel functional descriptione a a a a Penn epee O Operating the horn Dane eee E 61 POK Sit MEOH Se e 61 IEE O cere a ertaepere meet eee gt Switching Easy Entry function on off eters Retr Switching heating on off ccesseceeceesessteeeeeeees
117. 61 Stopping Ename eee ne een eee cree mere ante emer eet Ko Stopping engine automatically Auto Start Stop function meee PEET ET 169 O tact ene etiacioenstivunuavatuncieols ins 135 Storage CEI comme nee Sante nine Mana mR ean A REE ll Opening storage compartment i in i front armrest 219 Opening storage PAE E in rear armrest 220 Storage Options cc cccccececeeeees E S Storage compartment Glove DOX man a R TETE eee 218 In front armrest opening eeen eere eaa 219 In luggage compartment eee eee e a a 221 In rear armrest opening ee ee 220 ONGC S teaacin evs tadavitar E E crea utpibeneeade 218 Summer tires Cee E E a O SOE A E T E oreces suns 286 SUN VISOP aaee E E A eet eee 64 Index 339 Switching automatic anti dazzle function on and off 60 Switching child protection on off Disabling rear control panel and power windows 80 Switching MONO mode on off Air conditioning system c cccsscccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 74 Switching on air recirculation mode Air conditioning Daal ORD e Sen NT ee SWITCHING ON parkine lieht c ctescanscsasisaccsantsessnsaaunonioran FO T Tachometer Brel es E E E T 110 Tailgate Eie ene E E Rete nema 4 Closing automatically Peer ea emer 28 Clore iii e a E eerne renee ne 25 Opening automatically o e O Tailpipes Stainless steel care instructions c ccecesees 274 Tank vVennlatnion System a eee eeeeeeeeeeeesepeeeeeessen ee 2 OF Technical
118. 7 gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Note on operation To prevent excessive temperatures the cooling air ducts must not be obstructed by covering them e g with film stone guards etc Coolant level warning The temperature gauge warning light flashes if the coolant level is too low The warning message Check coolant level also appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel gt Switch off engine and allow to cool gt Add coolant lf the coolant level is too low warning indicators may light up if the vehicle tilts at an extreme angle e g steep slopes or generates high lateral acceleration while travelling round long bends e g driving in circles If the warnings do not disappear once the vehicle has assumed normal operating state check the coolant level gt Please see the chapter CHECKING COOLANT LEVEL AND ADDING COOLANT on page 257 gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 1N Caution Risk of engine damage gt Do not continue driving if the warning persists even when the engine coolant level is correct gt Have the fault corrected F Engine Oil Pressure Gauge The oil pressure is controlled according to requirements and should be at least 29 psi 2 0 bar at an engine speed of 3 000 rpm and at least 44 psi 3 0 bar at an engine speed of 5 000 rpm The engine oil pre
119. 70 Washing the vehicle instructions 0s008 2 0 wheel Dols a ace oerreenentsceoees 293 VANGON E E es onmved reen amet 272 Car key remote control Emergency operation of key in ignition lock 166 Locking vehicle dOOr cienie iaeiae ea aane 24 Unlocking vehicle dOOl cc cccccccssesssseeeeeeeeseees 23 Car elephone a a atte meen eee te tr menser erent he Care instructions PIA Srcaae eters ee sinter ee eee 2 0 PIC GIA E E E E T cate 276 Alloy wheels 0ssssssssseeees E E 274 C E a E S Carpet EE E 275 Cleaning the engine compartment PERE ee ae 212 FAD MCMMIN a E E E A 216 Headlights plastic components adhesive foils 274 Laying up your Porsche civesssvcesecmnese cons er TLS Eeer E A 275 Mats eseaneas eae E ra eee ee nae PANE AAEE E E E A EE A E seen 0L Radar SCNSOF esseccsseccsssecsssccsssecessecessecessecessecese era Reversing camera sicccsesstscrevenisamnimieentvens man 274 S maa E Sc mie nC ern ey n219 Seat belts o n 276 Ultrasound sensors ParkAssist pny eet ttre a 274 Under c oathe a 2713 Use of high pressure cleaning equipment 270 UN fers 8 0 6 le saeaees Aeneas ne cree ee ean nn id Cen 293 ON E E E erdiian cea 272 Carpet eare instructions e e e a a 2T Catalytic converter ssssserererrrrrrrrerrrrrerrrrrerrrrrrrn 209 Emission control Check Engine E E ann 114 Center armrest Opening rear storage ay a E Cenmalockine a a eee eee Emergency operation i in th
120. A Upper status area B Title area with menu indicator C Information area D Lower status area Areas on the multi function display Upper status area Lower status area The upper A and lower status area D permanently display basic information such as the current radio station time and temperature or the remaining range The display contents of the upper and lower status area can be individually adapted For information on adapting the multi function display gt Please see the chapter ADAPTING APPEARANCE OF MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY on page 139 Title area with menu indicator The menu item currently selected is displayed in the title area The menu indicator on the right shows the position of the current menu item in the overall menu and displays the number of other menu items on this menu level The wider the menu indicator the fewer menu items the current menu contains Information area The information area C displays the menu items currently available for selection or after a menu item is selected information relating to this menu item or other selection options Overview of menus in the multi function display The following main menu areas are available depending on the vehicle equipment Vehicle Retrieve vehicle information check oil level adjust settings adapt speed limits see page 119 Audio Display select radio station or track see page 123 Navigation R
121. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL IS SWITCHED ON on page 182 180 Driving and Driving Safety Switch adaptive cruise control on off Set increase desired speed Reduce desired speed Interrupt OFF Operational readiness on return to set speed RESUME WD DW Using adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control is operated using the control stalk at the bottom left of the steering wheel Note on operation You can intervene manually at any time by pressing the brake or accelerator 593 804 onmo OVD Am 82 F Status display and desired speed Current speed Progress bar showing speed control range 0 100 mph 0 160 km h Vehicle detected in front Desired distance from vehicle in front Current distance from vehicle in front Current speed of vehicle travelling in front Adaptive cruise control display All important information messages and warnings are displayed on the multi function display in the instrument panel ACC main menu The adaptive cruise control display on the multi function display can be selected permanently using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel or the control stalk at the bottom right of the steering wheel For information on using the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OPERATING THE MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY IN THE INSTRUMENT PANEL on page 115 1 Select gt ACC in the main menu Status display When
122. Action required instrument display panel Fault Acoustic warning and distance signals for ParkAssist are not ParkAssist sound available Please remember this when parking Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Limit 1 or 2 exceeded Preset speed limit 1 or 2 has been exceeded Warning light on Check Engine Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop the coolant temperature gauge flashes Example Service reminder A EA Full maintenance in XXX miles km Bring the vehicle in for service no later than after the distance time shown has elapsed The maintence intervals can be found in the Maintenance booklet We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have the trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools for this type of work 162 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Driving and Driving Safety Ignition Lock Steering LOCK 164 Starting and Stopping the Engine 167 Auto Start Stop FUNCTtION cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 Electric Parking Brake ccr val SPAM Sse seeas tase tieae Sees sass te iaie eee een tae 172 Cruise Conbol orere aen sect seee 176 Adaptive Cruise Control annen 178 Car Audio Operation TIpS c ccccsssssseeeeeeeens 189 Porsche Communication Management PEND a aa eearseie se seme aceeaueateaneneaseate 191 iPod USB and AUX ccseseesesesseseescseeseseee 192 VOICE COntrOl cccc
123. Blades ccceccsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 261 Emission Control SyStem cccccccccceeeeeeees 262 How Emission Control Works nsec 263 Fel COMO oeer e NA 264 Operating Your Porsche in other Countries 264 FUE pares gee eerie eee see 265 Fae Cai aen e E ceauatereareees 267 Fuel Recommendations 268 Fuel Evaporation Control ccccccceeesseee eens 269 Car Care StuctiOnSitaseseanee nema 269 Maintenance and Car Care 251 Exercise Extreme Caution when Working on your vehicle 4 Danger Ignoring the following instructions may cause serious personal injury or death gt The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a potentially hazardous area If you are not fully familiar with proper repair procedures do not attempt the adjustments described on the following pages Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well ventilated area Ensure that there are no open flames in the area of your vehicle at any time when fuel fumes might be present Be especially cautious of devices such as hot water heaters which ignite a flame intermittently Before working on any part in the engine compartment turn the engine off and let it cool down sufficiently Hot engine compartment components can burn skin on contact Be alert and cautious around the engine at all times while it is running If you have to work on the engine while it is running always put the parking brake on and put the PDK selector lever in position
124. DO LATCH restraint system DO Child seat Installing with LATCH system ccccssccsssereeeeeees 56 LATCH restraint SYSt M ccccesseececeeseessseeeeeeees T56 Prescribed installation direction depending on weight of child ee re E E T 53 Child seat bracket cc cccccccessssees ieee eres S 56 CI e E E 135 Cleaning the engine Compartment cc ccccccccseseeeee 2 2 Closing Closing Slid tilt OOF a 88 Closing tailgate automatically 000 TS 28 Locking vehicle door from inside s 3L Persons animals remaining in the vehicle eee declan ern Pee Reroe E T 26 Vehicle door with car key remote control 5 24 Vehicle door with Porsche Entry amp Drive keyless 24 Cockpit E 121 10 g esa edie oe seen ma Menta E tava ete 95 Cooling system temperature gauge ae 110 Engine oil temperature Sauce cosdinnendanunt demas ace ele FUG 2 WW a irene coop secinieeverevereanaeauner sau eal Ll Olea sire el E ee ene ere re ee 112 Speedometer aaa a corner E 110 EEO EE E E O Warning and indicator lights overview L07 Comtor memo Bid odie Bicusrenectidionndads 40 Comfort pressure SEAE mmene corres ieee irene he Baked ena wenn 131 Speed BARS E a tie aloe om eet 505111 0 i 0 gee ae Re tee ener Mey eee OME en nie 219 Control systems Overview PTM PSM PASM PDCC 0 ccee 201 Coolant AUUIKCEZE causa nelanieansatinan 2 Checking level
125. Drive with extreme care gt Slow down if necessary 188 Driving and Driving Safety Car Audio Operation Tips For radio operation see your radio manual which is included with your on board literature FM reception A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio Because the vehicle moves reception conditions are constantly changing Buildings terrain signal distance and noise from other vehicles are all working against good reception Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be problems when they are not The following characteristics are completely normal for a given reception area and they do not indicate any problem with the radio itself Note Electronic accessories should only be installed by your authorized Porsche dealer Equipment which has not been tested and approved by Porsche may impair radio reception Fading and drifting FM range is limited to about 25 miles 40 km except for some high power stations If a vehicle is moving away from the desired station s transmitter the signal will tend to fade and or drift This condition is more prevalent with FM than AM and is often accompanied by distortion Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain degree by careful attention to fine tuning or selection of a stronger signal Static and fluttering When the line of sight link between a transmitter and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or mountains the radio sound may be accompan
126. EE e tert a a A 169 Nechme aldatan E ahAninie ste 324 Engine drag torque control MSR Functional Ge SCriptiOn ccsccccccecesssssseeeseeeees L04 EVO ci ve a sachet annee qatiextaiees af Pat uaehmeeiucdie 254 CIA OG e a a acum be eestar anes 200 CHAN OIE ene eee ee eee CONS UMMP UO teeter ince core nuneranen 324 Engine Oil pressure nccc eee Pee 152 Filler Opening secs tehesdecnncamesetvarcnsdvocesmetbueerael OO General INFOPMALION oc ccccccssscccccssssssecccsssesseeeesess 254 Oi level warning on the multifunction display 255 Performance class mee e 256 Temperature 2auge m e a O Topping Up mee e a 2 NISCOSIUy cage E E E 250 Entry amp Drive Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry amp Drive 24 Switching off interior surveillance with Porsche Entry amp Drive eerren 248 Unlocking vehicle door with Porsche Enty amp Drive cr e a eee seee ea cceceesty 23 Enty ameiona a teeeas een ae en ceeenaenieas pte Error messages Overview of warning M SSAQES cesccccceeeeeeeees 152 BE TA 2 ans spe ans cner nec senee apenas tecnaet anger 8 Exterior mirror heating SILC HIME a 84 External audio source interface 192 F Fabric linings care inStructionS cccccccsssseseeseeeeeens 2 6 Fastening points in luggage compartment 0 002 22 Faults Emergency operation of ignition key in en ole ater cen eeen na E ey Neniere etanerel ioe Emergency operation of powerlift tailgate T Emergency op
127. From Outside Depending on your vehicle equipment you can unlock and lock the vehicle either with the car key or without a key by means of Porsche Entry amp Drive With the key Use the buttons on the key to unlock and lock the vehicle 22 Opening and Locking Note on operation The factory settings of the vehicle are described in this section In the multi function display in the instrument panel you can change the settings and store them on the respective key for vehicles with comfort memory For information on modifying the opening and locking settings gt Please see the chapter LOCKING SETTINGS on page 145 With Porsche Entry amp Drive On vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive you can unlock lock and start the vehicle without using the key You simply have to carry the key with you e g in your trouser pocket gt Do not expose the car key to a high level of electromagnetic radiation This could adversely affect Porsche Entry amp Drive Unlocking and opening doors Unlocking with the key 1 Press button gf The emergency flasher flashes once The driver s door is unlocked 2 Pull the door handle Unlocking with Porsche Entry amp Drive keyless Either door can be unlocked if you position yourself on the side of the vehicle driver s side passenger s side that you wish to open together with the key 1 Grip the door handle fully The emergency flasher flashes once
128. M OFF warning light on the instrument panel go out The message PSM switched on appears on the multifunction display in the instrument panel Sport Plus mode A sportier setup is obtained when Sport Plus mode is switched on PSM interventions occur later than in Normal mode The vehicle can be maneuvered with greater agility at its performance limits without having to dispense with the assistance of PSM in emergency situations This helps to achieve optimal lap times particularly on race circuits and on a dry road surface PSM warning light The PSM warning light on the instrument panel lights up for a lamp check when the ignition is Switched on The light indicates a control operation even when PSM is switched off e g brake control in the event of one sided wheel spin The light in conjunction with the multi function display indicates a fault The warning message PSM failure appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 gt Adapt your driving style according to the changed conditions gt Contact a qualified specialist workshop in order to correct the fault We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have the trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools for thi
129. MENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL on page 121 1 Warning Engine oil is hazardous to your health and may be fatal if swallowed gt Keep engine oil out of children s reach Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals gt Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water Top up quantity The difference between the minimum and maximum marks on the segment display Is approx 1 06 US quearts 1 liter One segment of the display corresponds to a top up quantity of approx 0 26 US quarts 0 25 liters gt Never add more engine oil than required to reach the maximum mark ca Oil level warning lf the oil level is too low this is indicated by the oil warning light on the multifunction display gt Correct the oil level as soon as possible gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Note on operation If the engine compartment lid is opened and no oil is added the warning message appears again after at least 6 miles 10 km Y Warning Risk of injury The radiator fans can start running when a certain temperature is reached even with the engine switched off Risk of burns from hot parts in the engine compartment gt Exercise extreme caution when working in the engine compartment Topping Up Engine Qil Porsche recommends Mobil H Complies with approval Porsche A40 Viscosity class SAE OW 40
130. P or N In particular be very careful to ensure that items of clothing ties shirt sleeves etc jewelry long hair hand or fingers cannot get 252 Maintenance and Car Care caught in the fan belts or other moving parts The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of the car The fans can start or continue running as a function of temperature even with the engine switched off Carry out work in these areas only with the engine off and exercise extreme caution Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ignition system When the ignition is on high voltage is present in all wires connected with the ignition system therefore exercise extreme caution when working on any part of the engine while the ignition is on or the engine is running Always support your car with safety stands if it is necessary to work under the car The jack supplied with the car is not adequate for this purpose Switch off level control of air suspension and height adjustment Please see the chapter RAISING THE VEHICLE WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM TROLLEY JACK OR STANDARD JACK on page 290 When working under the car without safety stands but with the wheels on the ground make sure the car is on level ground the wheels are blocked and that the engine cannot be started Withdraw ignition keys switch ignition off in vehicles that have Porsche Entry amp Drive Do not smoke or allow an open flame around the battery or fuel Keep a
131. Press the securing spring on the turn signal 1 Insert front turn signal light light in through the opening in the fender with your finger and remove the turn signal light 2 Press in securing spring until it engages securely Turn the bulb socket counter clockwise and gt Check operation of bulb remove It 2 Remove defective bulb and replace it gt Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will go Licence Plate Lights Changing bulb C5W 1 Open the tailgate 2 Position the blade of a screwdriver at the left on the light cover and lever off the light cover 3 Remove bulb and replace it 4 Clip in the light cover 5 Close the tailgate and check operation of bulb Side Marker Light Changing bulb W5W 1 Remove the cap in the wheel housing liner with a screwdriver 2 Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the wheel housing liner parallel to the side marker light housing in direction of travel By pressing with the screwdriver disengage the securing spring of the side marker light housing Press the cable retaining clip and detach the cable from the bulb holder Turn the bulb socket counter clockwise and remove it 3 Remove defective bulb and replace it 4 Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will go Push the cable onto the bulb holder until it audibly engages Minor Repairs 313 593 225 ary Insert front
132. SM Comfort PASM Sport PASM Sport Plus Comfort mode ensures comfortable chassis tuning The PASM Sport chassis setup offers very sporty shock absorber tuning PASM Sport Plus mode offers particularly sporty shock absorber tuning e g for driving on the race circuit In addition to manual mode selection PASM also adjusts shock absorber tuning for either sporty or comfort driving depending on the driving situation 208 Driving and Driving Safety Selecting the PASM mode l 2 Switch on ignition Press button repeatedly On the button In addition the selected chassis setup is shown on No indicator light comes on when you select PASM Comfort default setting One indicator light comes on when you select PASM Sport Two indicator lights come on when you select PASM Sport Plus the multi function display in the instrument panel for approx 4 seconds Note on operation The last selected chassis setup is stored in the memory after the ignition is switched off Warning message The system automatically detects PASM faults and displays them on the multi function display in the instrument panel For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 gt Adapt your driving style according to the changed conditions gt Contact a qualified specialist worksho
133. Swivel the sun visor down to prevent dazzle from the front gt lf you are dazzled from the side unclip the sun visor from the inner bracket and swivel it round so that it is in front of the door window 64 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Vanity Mirror The vanity mirror on the rear of the sun visor is closed with a sliding cover 1N Caution Risk of injury gt Keep the sliding cover closed while driving The vanity mirror lighting is switched on automatically when the sliding cover is opened arrow Roll Up Sunblinds Rear Side Windows Note on operation The roll up sunblinds on the rear side windows can be raised or lowered only when the rear side windows are closed lf child protection is activated the roll up sunblinds on the rear side windows can only be operated using the roll up sunblind button in the front center console or the power window buttons in the driver s door For information on child protection gt Please see the chapter DISABLING THE CONTROLS IN THE REAR on page 88 For information on the roll up sunblind button gt Please see the chapter RAISING LOWERING ROLL UP SUNBLIND ON REAR WINDOW on page 66 Raising roll up sunblind on rear side windows gt Pull up the corresponding power window button on the inside of the rear door or the driver s door or lf the rear roll up blind is lowered press and hold the roll up sunblind button on the front or rear cen
134. The current settings are stored on the vehicle key All settings that are modified when the OFF function Is active are not stored on the vehicle key Activating automatic storage gt Press button OFF briefly or Press and hold the button OFF until the settings last stored on the car key are retrieved The indicator light on the button goes out Automatic storage is activated Storing settings on person buttons 1 and 2 Storing seat steering wheel and mirror settings while driving is not possible Storing settings 1 Make the required adjustments to the mirror steering wheel person buttons on the driver s side only and seat settings 2 Press memory button SET The indicator light on the button lights up 3 Press one of the person buttons fl or 2 within 10 seconds The indicator light on the memory button OFF goes out and an acknowledgement signal sounds The settings are now stored on the desired person button Retrieving settings using the car key or on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Open the driver s door The seat positions that were last set are restored automatically Cancelling settings Automatic settings can be cancelled by pressing the button OFF or the button gf on the car key Retrieving settings with person buttons 1 and 2 Driver s side 1 Open the door 2 Press person button 44 or 2 or once the door is closed or the ignition key is inserted and the ignition is swi
135. These instructions can be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer Function of the air bag system Air bags are a supplemental safety system Your primary protection comes from your safety belts The front air bags are triggered during a frontal collision of sufficient force and direction In the event of a side impact of corresponding force the side air bag on the impact side is triggered The inflation process generates the amount of gas required to fill the air bags at the necessary pressure in fractions of a second Air bags help to protect the head and body while simultaneously damping the motion of the driver and passenger in the impact direction in the event of a frontal impact or side impact In order to help provide protection in severe collisions which can cause death and serious injury air bags must inflate extremely rapidly Such high speed inflation has a negative but unavoidable side effect which is that it can and does cause injuries including facial and arm abrasions bruising and broken bones You can help minimize such injuries by always wearing your safety belts There are many types of accidents in which air bags are not expected to deploy These include accidents where the air bags would provide no benefit such as a rear impact against your vehicle Other accidents where the air bags are designed not to deploy are those where the risk of injury from the air bag deployment could exceed any protect
136. Time gt Date Time gt Time gt Time and confirm 2 Format 2 Select Hour Minute and confirm 3 Set desired time 3 Select desired setting and confirm and confirm Available setting options Setting time zone 12h The time zone and vehicle time can be adjusted individually 24h 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Date Time gt Time 2 Select Zone and confirm 3 Set desired time zone and confirm Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 147 Setting the date The date and date format can be changed in the Date menu 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Date Time gt Date and confirm Setting the date format The date format can be adjusted 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Date Time gt Date 2 Format and confirm 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY YYYY MM DD 148 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Setting the current date The day month and year can be set individually 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Date Time gt Date and confirm 2 Select Date 3 Set the desired date and confirm the setting Setting summer time The vehicle clock can be configured to change to summer time 1 Select gt Vehi
137. adaptive cruise control is switched on the Status display A appears at the bottom left of the multi function display 571 319 The status display A turns orange when adaptive cruise control is active The status display A is grey when adaptive cruise control is inactive Examples lf adaptive cruise control is switched on and no desired speed is stored the cruise control symbol appears but the desired speed field remains blank lf a desired speed is stored and no vehicle was detected in front the cruise control symbol and the desired speed are displayed lf a desired speed is stored and a vehicle was detected in front a vehicle symbol and the desired speed are displayed lf the distance from the vehicle in front is less than a safety distance which is dependent on the set desired distance a yellow warning triangle appears when adaptive cruise control is not active Driving and Driving Safety 181 Switching adaptive cruise control on and off Switching adaptive cruise control on gt Press button R on the control stalk The grey status display appears on the multi function display Adaptive cruise control is ready Switching adaptive cruise control off gt Press button R on the control stalk ACC off appears on the multi function display The desired speed that was stored is deleted The desired distance Is set to the default value Operating states when adaptive cruise control is switched o
138. ake pressure gt Do not hold the pedal down too long or too often This could cause the brakes to overheat and not function properly Driving and Driving Safety 173 Brake booster The brake booster assists braking only when the engine is running When the car is moving while the engine is not running or if the brake booster is defective more pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring the car to a stop Moisture road salt or grit on brakes affects braking Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake applications 1N Warning Risk of an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death Driving through water may reduce the traction Moisture on brakes from road water car wash or a coating of road salt or grit may affect braking efficiency gt Cautiously apply brakes to test brakes after exposure to road water etc 174 Driving and Driving Safety Brake wear Your car has excellent brakes but they are still subject to wear The rate at which they wear depends on how the brakes are used gt Have the brake system inspected at the intervals recommended in your Maintenance Booklet Brake system warning light You can check the functionality of the brake system warning light by switching the ignition to the On position position 1 and verifying that the warning light illuminates Brake wear warning message A warning message will be displayed on the multi function display of
139. ake ight right i B bs Raised brake light EAL EEN PASM LF compressor Sind Gateway control unit Flectric steering column lock 6 Heated rear window LHD Left hand drive vehicles Rear wiper PASM control unit RHD Righthand drive vehicles Heated rear window 8 Gateway control unit 5 No Fuse carrier A No FusecarrierB A Tail light right Reversing light right Daytime driving lights right b closing mechanism 3 Interior surveillance inclination 9 Electric parking brake Note Differential lock gt Use the plastic gripper D when replacing the fuses This can be found in the fuse box cover Engine control unit PDCC oe unit aneda hbonrd Safety cutb lights front doors Interior light reading light front gt Spare fuses can be found in both fuse box Interior light rear covers on the dashboard left 7 5 and 10 A Orientation light right 20 and 25 A Licence plate light Engine speed hall senders 1 3 Interior light Daytime driving lights left Tail light left Reversing light left Rear fog light right Brake light left Safety curb lights rear doors Exhaust flap control Filler flap closed Extend retract spoiler 302 Minor Repairs Battery 4 Danger Risk of short circuit and fire resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Observe all warning notes on the battery gt Disconnect the negative terminal on the battery during all work on the electrical system gt Do not l
140. al Locking System USA KR55WK50138 Canada 7812D 5WK50138 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interfe rence and this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi cations to this equipment Such modification could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Warning Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Porsche could void the user s autho rity to operate this equipment Your vehicle is equipped with a central locking system The following are unlocked or locked together Doors Rear lid Filler flap The central locking system is always activated when the vehicle is unlocked and locked On the multi function display of the instrument panel you can set different variants for locking and unlocking the doors and rear lid You can open all doors irrespective of the setting made The vehicle cannot be locked if the driver s door Is not completely closed lf one of the following components is not comple tely closed when you try to lock the vehicle the door lid is not locked vehicle doors rear lid engine compartment lid The in
141. al has been programmed successfully Several attempts with different distances between the vehicle and the original remote control may be necessary The turn signal lights will flash once when the 5 minutes teaching time are up Repeat steps 1 to 2 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to assign signals to the other buttons Operating the garage door opener gt Press the corresponding button on the overhead operating console keypad The indicator light A lights up during signal transmission Parking 245 Alarm System and Theft Protection Alarm System and Passenger Compartment Monitoring ccecce 247 iG DINZEW nawenieerertucioeaiiea avian eent 250 Locking the Steering Column ccce 250 Then PROTECTION esen ees ees esteeeetecet cee 250 246 Alarm System and Theft Protection Alarm System and Passenger Compartment Monitoring USA KR55WK50138 Canada 7812D 5WK50138 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions lt may not cause harmful interference and jit must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment Such modification could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 1 Warning Any changes or modifications not
142. al injury or death Note to owners In Canada this manual is also available in French To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to Note aux proprietaires Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de ce Manuel en francais aupr s du concessionaire ou du Porsche Cars Canada Ltd Automobiles Porsche Canada LTEE 5925 Airport Road Suite 420 Mississauga Ontario Canada L4V 1W1 Telephone number for customer assistance 1 800 PORSCHE Option 3 Setting and operating vehicle compon ents when driving 1 Warning There is a danger of accident if you set or operate the on board computer radio navigation system telephone or other equip ment when driving This could distract you from the traffic and cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Operate the components while driving only if the traffic situation allows you to do so safely gt Carry out any complicated operating or setting procedures only with the vehicle stationary Engine Exhaust 1N Danger Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled Engine exhaust fumes have many compo nents which you can smell They also contain carbon monoxide CQ which is a colorless and odorless gas Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious ness and even death if inhaled gt Never start or let the engine run in an en closed unventilated area It is not recommended to sit in your car for prolonged periods w
143. and hold until the desired brightness has been reached Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 95 1N Warning Risk of accident when adjusting brightness while driving You may lose control of the vehicle gt Do not reach through the steering wheel spokes when driving 96 Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers Turn Signal High Beam Headlight Flasher Stalk Turn signals low beam and high beam are ready for operation when the ignition is on 1 Turn signal light left 2 Turn signal light right Push the stalk to the upper or lower pressure point turn signal lights flash three times 3 High beam headlight 4 Headlight flasher Stalk in center position low beam When the high beam Is switched on or the headlight flasher is operated the blue indicator light on the speedometer lights up Parking light The parking light can only be switched on when the ignition is switched off gt Move the stalk up or down to switch on the right or left parking light lf the parking light is switched on the message Parking light on will appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel after the ignition is switched off For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Automatic activation of hazard warning lights in the event of an accident The emergency flasher is activated automatically
144. anual contains a host of useful information Please take the time to read this manual before you drive your new Porsche Become familiar with the operation of your Porsche car for maximum safety and operating pleasure The better you know your Porsche the more pleasure you will experience driving your new Car Always keep your Owner s Manual in the car and give it to the new owner if you ever sell your Porsche A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition by having it serviced regularly A separate Warranty and Customer Informa tion Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Porsche For U S only If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which could cause a crash injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Porsche Cars North America Inc Porsche Cars N A If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety problem exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you and your dealer or Porsche Cars N A To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washingt
145. apacity coefficient e g 105 and code letter e g V for permitted top speed are minimum requirements When fitting new tires or changing tires Please see the chapter TIRES AND WHEELS on page 280 gt Snow chain clearance can only be guaranteed for the tires marked 1 Snow chains can only be fitted on the rear wheels Maximum speed 30 mph 50 km h Only use fine link cross type or edge chains approved by Porsche Panamera S Panamera 45 18 inch wheel front axle rear axle 8Jx 18 Rim offset 59 mm 9J x 18 Rim offset 53 mm T Summer tires front axle rear axle 245 50 ZR 18 100Y 275 45 ZR 18 103Y Oa Snow tires front axle rear axle 245 50 R 18 100V 275 45 R 18 103V F 9J x 19 Rim offset 60 mm 9J x 19 Rim offset 60 mm Ee ae mOnt AXE TEAN AXE 10J x 19 Rim offset 61 mm 10J x 19 Rim offset 61 mm Summer tires front axle rear axle 255 45 ZR 19 100Y 285 40 ZR 19 103Y 255 45 ZR 19 100Y 285 40 ZR 19 103Y Snow tires front axle rear axle 255 45 R 19 100V 285 40 R 19 103V 2 255 45 R 19 100V 285 40 R 19 103V 2 F 9 5J x 20 Rim offset 65 mm 9 5J x 20 Rim offset 65 mm SU CI WE cu TONE AKEE AL ANIE 11J x 20 Rim offset 68 mm 11J x 20 Rim offset 68 mm Summer tires front axle rear axle 255 40 ZR 20 101Y XL 295 35 ZR 20 105Y XL 255 40 ZR 20 101Y XL 295 35 ZR 20 105Y XL F 9 5J x 20 Rim offset 65 mm 9 5J x 20 Rim offset 65 mm AONE Me CL Ub AXE rEAARIE 10 5J x 20 Rim offset 65mm 10 5J x 20 Rim offset 65 mm Snow t
146. approx 5 mph 8 km h the system changes to the preselected wiper speed The rain sensor remains switched off if the wiper Stalk is already in position 1 when the ignition is Switched on To switch the rain sensor on again gt Move wiper stalk to position O and then to position 1 Switch on is confirmed by one wipe of the windshield or Operate windshield washer system 5 Switch on is confirmed by three wipes of the windshield or Change the sensitivity of the rain sensor using switch A Note on operation In the multifunction display on the instrument panel you can configure the rain sensor to activate automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wiper stalk is set to position 1 For information on adjusting rain sensor activation when the ignition is switched on gt Please see the chapter SETTING RAIN SENSOR ACTIVATION on page 143 Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity gt Move switch A upwards high sensitivity The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the windshield gt Move switch A downwards low sensitivity Headlight washer system The washer sprays only while low beam or high beam is activated gt Press button B under the wiper stalk After every 10 wipes on the windshield the headlights are cleaned automatically as well The wipe count starts from zero again when the low beam is switched off Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 103 Rear window wiper
147. ar WINGOW WIPING ccccccecessssceeeeeeessssseeeeees 104 Switching on intermittent operation of rear window a LOG Switching ON rain SENSOM cceeeeessseeeeeeessseeeeees 102 Windshield wiping plus washer system c0066 102 Windshield fast wiping Serie Semen mere meee 6 Windshield slow Wiping c ccccceeessseeeeeesssereee LOZ Wiping windshield once one touch operation 102 Windshield wipers BET OVENVICW a a a A O Care INStrUCTIONS secere QI Rain sensor adjustment seeen ae LOS Rear window Wiping ea e cavdanteamonesnens 104 Se E E E E my 102 Switching on intermittent operata of rear window WADED sessesesseseen see eaten ae Rater ene L04 Switching ON rain SCNSOS ccccceceeeeessesssteeeeenees 102 Windshield wiping plus washer system POEA 102 Windshield fast WIPING m a a LOZ Windshield slow Wiping c cccseseesseeseseessereee LOZ Wiping windshield once one touch operation ree 102 MUTE CGI a eee teeta cence nye ree yee OE Winter tires General information Rae ret erred ee 287 SOTA a renuvetta tices sure A A taint 286 Wiper blades Care imstrUctions reenn e a 273 Wrench socket for aod wheel bolt O01 gt eee eee TS Using See E er eae eee eae re 293 X Xenon headlights Changing bulb for a NEIE beam aE NE oul Installing headlights e rne nn GUO Removing headlights cccccccsscccccsecssssseeeeeees 309 index 341
148. ar window rear side windows See page 66 12 Sports exhaust system See page 214 13 Retractable rear spoiler See page 214 123 4 5 4 6 Overhead Operating Console 1 Rear interior lighting See page 98 2 Dimming ambient lighting See page 100 3 ParkAssist off button See page 241 4 Passenger compartment monitoring See page 247 5 Slide tilt roof See page 88 6 Garage door opener HomeLink See page 243 7 Hands free microphone 4 i I iv 4 8 Reading light on driver s side a If A We See page 98 9 Front interior lighting See page 98 10 Orientation lighting See page 99 11 Interior door opening lighting See page 99 12 Reading light on passenger s side See page 98 ws Fx 9 10 11 12 Overview Illustrations 15 16 Overview Illustrations 591 060 Rear 1 Interior light reading light See page 98 2 Door opener See page 32 3 Air vents See page 82 4 Seat adjustment See page 42 5 Central locking See page 31 6 Air conditioning See page 70 7 Drinks holder cupholder See page 223 8 Ashtray See page 224 9 Power window roll up sunblind on rear side windows See page 86 Opening and Locking Never invite car theft rer 18 Notes on the Key and Central Locking OY SIC a aneneenansdeeuiasoveeessiansreeeteasanieeed Na 19 Central Locking SySteEM cccccssssesssseeeeeees 20 Brief Overview Opening and Locking PROM OU IUE e ern 21 Opening and Locki
149. are vital for a clear view gt Have the wiper blades replaced twice per year before and after the cold season or if wiper performance deteriorates or the blades are damaged gt Please see the chapter CAR CARE INSTRUCTIONS on page 269 1N Caution Risk of damage if the wiper arm accidentally falls back onto the windshield gt Always hold the wiper arm securely when replacing the wiper blade Risk of damage if wiper blades that are frozen in place are loosened improperly gt Thaw the wiper blades before loosening them gt Clean the wiper blades with window cleaner at regular intervals especially after washing the vehicle in a car wash We recommend Porsche window cleaner If the wiper blades are very dirty e g soiled with insect remains they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth lf the wiper blades rub or squeak this may be due to the following lf the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash wax residues may adhere to the windshield These wax residues can be removed only by using window cleaner concentrate The wiper blades may be damaged or worn gt Have damaged wiper blades replaced immediately gt Please see the chapter WASHER FLUID on page 259 Contact your authorized Porsche dealer for more information Replacing wiper blades gt Please read the separate instructions provided by the wiper blade manufacturer gt We recommend that you have your authori
150. ary to work under the car The jack supplied with the car is not adequate for this purpose Switch off level control of air suspension and height adjustment Please see the chapter RAISING THE VEHICLE WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM TROLLEY JACK OR STANDARD JACK on page 290 When working under the car without safety stands but with the wheels on the ground make sure the car is on level ground the wheels are blocked and that the engine cannot be started Withdraw ignition keys switch ignition off in vehicles that have Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Do not smoke or allow an open flame around the battery or fuel Keep a fire extinguisher close at hand gt Incomplete or improper servicing may cause problems in the operation of the car If in doubt about any servicing have it done by your authorized Porsche dealer Improper maintenance during the warranty period may affect your Porsche warranty coverage gt Supplies of fluids e g engine oil washer fluid brake fluid or coolant are hazardous to your health Keep these fluids out of children s reach and dispose of them in accordance with the appropriate regulations gt Some countries require additional tools and special spare parts to be carried in your vehicle Please make enquiries before driving abroad Note The tools required for changing a wheel e g jack wheel bolt wrench assembly aids are not Supplied as standard with the vehicle Your authorized Pors
151. asher flashes twice and an acoustic signal will sound twice The doors can be opened from inside by pulling once on the front door opener or by pulling twice on the rear door opener 3 Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that the alarm system will be triggered if the door is opened Note on operation for locking the doors with the key The vehicle cannot be locked if the driver s door is not completely closed The emergency flasher indicates that the vehicle has been locked successfully only when all the doors the engine compartment lid and the tailgate are closed 24 Opening and Locking Locking with Porsche Entry amp Drive keyless You must carry the key with you 1 Close the door 2 Briefly press the Porsche Entry amp Drive locking button A on the door handle The emergency flasher flashes twice and an acoustic signal will sound twice The doors cannot be opened from outside or lf persons or animals are remaining in the vehicle press the Porsche Entry amp Drive locking button A on the door handle twice The emergency flasher flashes twice and an acoustic signal will sound twice The doors can be opened from inside by pulling once on the front door opener or by pulling twice on the rear door opener 3 Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that the alarm system will be triggered if the door is opened Note on operation for locking the doors with Porsche Entry amp Drive keyless
152. assenger compartment to a temperature lower than the outside temperature AC mode must be activated gt Press button AC The indicator light on the button lights up The air conditioning compressor Is Switched on or Press button AUTO Switching off AC mode AC mode can be switched off manually to save fuel for example gt Press button AC The indicator light on the button goes out The air conditioning compressor Is switched off The cooling function is deactivated 12 Air Conditioning AC MAX mode In AC MAX mode the interior of the passenger compartment is cooled at maximum power The interior temperature is not adjusted automatically Switching AC MAX mode on gt Press button AC max The indicator light on the button lights up Switching AC MAX mode off gt Press button AC max The indicator light on the button goes out or Press button AUTO Increased cooling output in AC MAX mode on 4 zone air conditioning system On the automatic 4 zone air conditioning system AC MAX mode provides additional cooling output for the front air conditioned areas The air conditioned areas in the rear are deactivated automatically to achieve this increase in cooling output OFF appears in the displays on the operating unit for the rear air conditioned areas Note on 2 zone air conditioning The windshield is defrosted with maximum efficiency when the air vents in the rear are closed For information on ai
153. at a qualified specialist workshop The lateral inclination of the vehicle is significantly greater when cornering Drive carefully at an appropriate speed to the nearest qualified specialist workshop Vehicle handling may be affected Adapt your speed to the changed conditions Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Tire Pressure Monitoring detects a pressure loss of more than 7 psi 0 5 bar below 100 mph 160 km h and more than 6 psi 0 4 bar above 100 mph 160 km h Stop in a suitable place and check the tires indicated for damage If necessary fill in tire sealant and set the correct tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring detects a pressure loss of more than 4 psi 0 3 bar Correct the tire pressure at the next opportunity Fault on one or both wheel transmitters Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Tire Pressure Monitoring requires a certain amount of time to learn the wheels During this time the current tire pressures are not available on the on board computer Fault in Tire Pressure Monitoring system Tire pressure is not monitored Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 159 Light in instrument panel Z0 flashes ZOD lights up Warning message on multi function System not active Temporary
154. ated box gt Press the button arrow on the refrigerated box lid and fold down the lid Folding Rear Seats Forward and Returning to Upright Position The rear seats are divided and can be folded forward individually to make the luggage compartment bigger The pass through facility between the rear seats can also be folded forward depending on the vehicle equipment 226 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System Folding rear seats forward On vehicles with automatically controlled four zone air conditioning gt Press the safety button in the driver s door armrest before folding the rear seats forward The indicator light on the button lights up The control panel on the rear center console and the power window buttons on the rear doors will not function Pressing the buttons unintentionally will not change any settings 1 Move front seats forward 2 Press the release handle A on the seat backrest and fold the backrest forward Adjusting rear seats to vertical position gt Make sure that the seat belts are not trapped Fold up the backrest until it locks with an audible click The red control stud B must be lowered completely 1 Warning Risk of injury The rear seat back rest must be kept locked when driving When you brake or in the event of an accident objects can slide into the passenger compartment and endanger the occupants gt Always lock rear seat backrests securely Lu
155. ated earlier Downshifts occur for small decelerations even at higher revs Switching Sport Plus mode on and off gt Press button ok When Sport Plus mode is switched on the indicator light on the button lights up The words SPORT PLUS appear on the digital speedometer In Sport Plus mode the PDK transmission changes to a shift program designed for driving on race circuits 7th gear is not selected The gear changing performance is enhanced significantly again compared with Sport mode The turbo overboost function brief torque increase at full throttle is activated on vehicles with the Sport Chrono Turbo package Sport Sport Plus and PASM Sport PASM Sport Plus mode Switching Sport or Sport Plus mode on and off simultaneously activates and deactivates the corresponding PASM mode PASM Sport or PASM Sport Plus The PASM mode can be switched manually if you want to use the characteristics of Sport or Sport Plus mode but prefer a more comfortable chassis setup gt Press button repeatedly The indicator light for the selected chassis setup on the button lights up In addition the selected chassis setup is shown on the multi function display in the instrument panel for approx 4 seconds For information on PASM gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE ACTIVE SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT PASM on page 208 Driving and Driving Safety
156. ation mode gt Press button The indicator light on the button lights up The outside air supply is interrupted and only the inside air is recirculated Switching air recirculation mode off gt Press button The indicator light on the button goes out Note lf the air conditioning compressor is switched off manually or automatically air recirculation mode ends after approx 3 minutes Setting automatic air recirculation mode In automatic air recirculation mode the fresh air Supply is adjusted depending on the air quality Automatic air recirculation mode can be switched on and off on the multifunction display At outside temperatures below approx 50 F 10 C air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically to prevent the windows from misting For information on adjusting automatic air recirculation mode on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter SETTING AIR CONDITIONING on page 146 Note The recommended operating mode is automatic air recirculation mode default setting Information on the air conditioning compressor The air conditioning compressor Can switch off briefly to ensure sufficient engine cooling if the engine is operating under extreme load Automatically switches off at temperatures below 38 F 3 C and cannot be switched on even manually Operates most effectively with the windows closed lf the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
157. ation relating to the relevant vehicle equipment operate the audio source radio CD iPod etc check the oil level check the tire pressure use the stopwatch or operate the navigation system You can also modify different vehicle settings in the Vehicle menu It is not possible to describe all details of the functions in this Owner s Manual The examples clearly demonstrate the functional principle and clarify the menu structure 1 Warning There is a risk of accident if you set or operate the multi function display radio navigation system telephone or other equipment while driving Operating these devices while driving could distract you from traffic and cause you to lose control of the vehicle gt Operate the equipment while driving only if the traffic situation allows you to do so safely gt Carry out any complicated operating or setting procedures only when the vehicle is stationary 393 044 Multi function display Note on operation The multi function display is only active when the ignition is on Certain menus are only available when the vehicle has stopped e g the adjustment menu for tire pressure monitoring Operating principle on vehicles with multi function steering wheel The multi function display is operated using the rotary knob A the Back button B and the MFS button C which can be assigned as required Selecting menu function setting option gt Turn rotary knob A upwards
158. ay 200 Driving and Driving Safety Open the ashtray 2 Remove the ashtray insert Swivel the spring for locking the ashtray approx 20 to the left pa uh m E D h V Close the ashtray lid approx 45 and hold it at that position Insert a screwdriver for example in through the opening which is now visible at the right next to the spring and press the release button for the selector support down Press the selector lever release button and move the selector lever out of position P The vehicle can now be moved To secure the vehicle move the selector lever to position P Transmission and Chassis Control Systems Your Porsche features a complex integrated system made up of all control systems acting in power transmission and in the chassis All control systems are networked with the aim of combining the best possible driving performance with maximum safety The following systems are involved depending on equipment System designation PTM Porsche Traction Management PSM Porsche Stability Management Air suspension with level control and height adjustment PASM Porsche Active Suspension Management PDCC Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control Scope Active all wheel drive with electronically regulated map controlled multiple disc clutch Driving stability control Anti lock brake system ABS Brake system prefilling Brake booster Hydraulic Brake Assist Automatic brake diffe
159. ay tools or other metal objects on the battery as they could cause a short circuit across the battery terminal Hydrogen gas generated by the battery could cause an explosion resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Charge battery in a well vetilated area gt Never charge a frozen battery It may explode because of gas trapped in the ice Allow a frozen battery to thaw out first gt Do not expose the battery to an open flame electrical spark or a lit cigarette Risk of explosion as a result of static charge resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Do not wipe the battery with a dry cloth gt Before touching the battery discharge any Static electricity by touching the vehicle Risk of serious personal injury or death and damage to the fabric metal or paint gt Wear eye protection gt Do not allow battery acid to come in contact with your skin eyes fabric or painted surfaces gt lf you get electrolyte which is an acid in your eyes or on your skin immediately rinse with cold water for several minutes and call a doctor gt Spilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once with a solution of baking soda and water to neutralize the acid Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm gt Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water The
160. be acknowledged when the ignition is switched on The tire pressure warning light on the instrument panel goes out when the tire pressure has been corrected Tire pressure TEE Red warning Tire pressure Red warning Tire pressure At speeds below 100 mph 160 km h The pressure in the tire has dropped by more than 7 psi 0 5 bar This significant pressure loss is a danger to road safety At speeds above 100 mph 160 km h The pressure in the tire has dropped by more than 6 psi 0 4 bar This significant pressure loss is a danger to road safety gt When the tire pressure warning appears stop immediately at a suitable location Check the indicated tire for signs of damage Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 133 lf necessary fill in tire sealant and set the correct tire pressure This tire pressure warning also appears when driving and can be acknowledged The tire pressure warning light on the instrument panel goes out only when the tire pressure has been corrected System learning Tire Pressure Monitoring begins to learn the wheels after a wheel change wheel transmitter replacement or update of the tire settings During this process Tire Pressure Monitoring recognizes the wheels and their locations The following message appears on the multi function display example No monitoring system Is learning The wheel learning process takes place exclusively when the
161. be towed on all four axles only provided the following conditions are strictly met Failure to meet these conditions will result in serious and expensive damage to the PDK transmission lf the vehicle s transmission or shifter is already damaged serious damage will result if the vehicle is not towed with all four wheels off the ground Porsche cannot be held responsible for damage incurred in cases where a vehicle has been transported on one or both of its axles gt The vehicle must not be towed if the PDK transmission Is in emergency operation mode yellow or red Gearbox emergency operation warning message The vehicle must be transported with a car transporter or on a trailer gt lf a selector lever emergency release was performed the vehicle must not be towed The vehicle must be transported with a car transporter or on a trailer gt Move PDK selector lever to position N To properly engage selector lever position N on the display and at the selector lever the engine must be started once before towing the vehicle The vehicle can be towed as soon as the selector lever is in position N and selector lever position N appears on the display gt The vehicle must always roll on all four wheels when towed The ignition must be switched on so that the brake lights and turn signal lights operate and the steering lock cannot engage gt Do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph 50 km h Maximum towing distance
162. be unlocked again only with the second key Interrupting the opening closing operation in the event of danger The opening or closing operation is interrupted immediately after gt Pressing button lt on the key or Releasing button lt in the driver s door or Briefly pressing button A or B in the trim panel on the tailgate or Briefly pressing the release button on the tailgate Automatic operation can be continued again at any time To do this press the corresponding button Caution Risk of damage to the tailgate caused by striking garage roofs or roof transport systems If the luggage compartment cover is not attached to the tailgate the tailgate continues to move slowly upwards beyond the automatic stop gt Only use the powerlift tailgate with the luggage compartment cover attached Detection of obstacles during opening The tailgate will stop moving if opening is blocked by an obstacle A warning signal then sounds The opening operation can continue once the obstacle is removed and after gt Pressing button lt on the key or Pressing button lt in the driver s door or Pressing the release button on the tailgate Opening and Locking 29 Detection of obstacles during closing 1 Warning Danger of crushing gt Despite the presence of this detection system you are still responsible for keeping yourself and others entirely out of the way of the door as it is clos
163. ble cargo i and luggage Load limit load capacity 1 400 Ib T ie F 1 070 ib 640 kg N 485 kg 150 Ib 150 Ib 300 30 Ib 70 kg 7Okg 140kg 15 kg eer y amp Luggage Available cargo Fi rp and luggage Load limit K AN d load capacity 1 400 Ib _ a gt 680 lb 640 kg O A 300 kg 150 ib x4 600 ib 70 kg x 4 280 kg Example for determining the combined weight of occupants and cargo Vehicle Load Capacity gt The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed the weight shown on the tire plate in the vehicle Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE PLATE on page 323 gt Never exceed the number of passengers shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle 30 lbx4 170b 15 kg x 4 60 kg Determining the combined weight of occupants and cargo gt Add the weight of all occupants and then add the total luggage weight figure Steps for determining correct load limit 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weigh
164. capacity as original equipment tires and should be mounted on all four wheels 4 Danger Risk of serious personal injury or death Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases increases risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control Furthermore low tire pressure increases rate of wear of the affected tires and cause damage Tires with badly worn treads and studs are very dangerous and could cause accidents resulting in serious personal injuries or death gt Make sure they are replaced immediately gt Do not exceed the snow tire speed rating Snow tires do not have the same degree of traction on dry wet or snowfree roads as normal tires Furthermore snow tires wear rapidly under these conditions Maintenance note We recommend fitting winter tires on the vehicle at temperatures below 45 F 7 C since the driving performance of summer tires is reduced at low temperatures Summer tires may be permanently damaged at extremely low temperatures Winter tires do not fulfill their purpose if the tread depth Is less than 5 32 in 4 mm Comply with all state and local laws governing snow tire and tread depth requirements 1 Danger Risk of accident and serious personal injury or death due to excessive speed gt Always check the maximum speed rating on the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle gt Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tires Wheel change gt When wheels
165. cccccssssseeeeeesssssseee 1D ACC Adaptive cruise control maine ees ewe eer 178 Adaptive cruise control esee eeens 178 Display principle Tt ree ere omer eee Fo Exceptions ereere L86 Functional description cccccceceseessessseteeneeetes 178 Interrupting resuMINg control 0cceeeeseeeeeeees 185 Operating principle e ee e tees 180 Operating states LOZ Radar SCNSO fcccesicteessser ete caaes Tercera echt 178 Setting the desired distance cceeeeeeeeee 183 Setting changing desired peed a E te and ta e2 Sitemin om a prema nme er Reta nee een erence 182 Warning Messages i esicessvscereucereeaceeasccneman 185 Adaptive light system driving light assistant 92 Adhesive foils Care inStrUCtiONnS cccccsccssseeeeeeeseee O04 Adjusting the opening height of the powerlift tailgate 30 Aftermarket WANING sc26 catccie carootsaasietaraunisedscsvacarlens 190 Air bag Air bag warning light in the instrument panel eee 0l Automatic deactivation of the passenger air bag 50 Care iNStructioOnS sevicrsecdentevivesdsteessnneioseennaivens 276 Dipo A E E ee eee ear ans 48 E E E E te Mento ere eet E 49 Functional description ee er ee i lis tallat m NOG ation eea sane eccecs ha 47 Passenger air bag warning light EA 51 Air cleaner maintenance instructions cccccceceeeeee 261 Air suspension T a E a AS Warning message o on the multifunction display E 210 Air vents Openness co Shee a 82 Air conditioni
166. cceeessseeeeeeeeeees 254 Checking the coolant level and ME coolant 257 Notes On maintenance eee n252 Topping UP engine oil assecc LDD Malfunctions Emergency operation of ignition key in emma ae Cem rea enter tee ae rae Seema aun eee 66 Emergency operation of slide ilt OOF cceeccosssseeseece 89 Emergency operation of tailgate eae nas 35 Emergency unlocking of the filler flap 000 267 Overview of warning m aE E Oe PaA e T 2218 Power WINdOWS wccccsscccssssecssseccssscessssesesssesesssesessee 88 Powerit ialgi estan eee oer 30 When opening and O E tae Naa St T9 MEDO A E E a a E tin anes 40 Retrieving seat settings N E AT 41 Retrieving vehicle seus E E E nT ere nec 41 one SOat eing a etpeteceneeecneeseeeees cee mA Storing vehicle settings a E E E AE EE Memon BUTTONS a a E 41 Minor repairs In the event of a flat tire c ec ceeeeeeeeeeees ee 293 Storage location of warning triangle 279 Mirrors Adjusting exterior MiIrOVS cccccceeeeessesseeeeeeeeees 58 Adjusting exterior mirrors as parking aid 60 Folding in exterior mirrors meee eeen DO Folding out exterior a E E E Storing exterior mirror settings memory E 59 Switching automatic anti dazzle function on EO saat E E E ee eratiorsenmiees Ol K O E inne meter one te trmsnente On aoi MONO button Air conditioning System ssesseennnnnnnrinneeesenseerena 74 Motion sensor interior surveillance Switching off
167. cceleration upshifts on bends are not made until the engine speed limit is reached When you brake and depending on the amount of deceleration the PDK transmission changes down earlier For subsequent cornering the right gear is engaged when pressure is applied to the brakes before the bend The bend is taken in the right gear and when you accelerate out of the bend you do not have to change down With a sporty driving style downshifts are already initiated when the brake pedal is touched lightly This further enhances a dynamic driving style The PDK transmission temporarily changes to the sportiest gear changing map i e to the highest possible gear changing points if the accelerator pedal is pressed quickly The transmission accordingly shifts down immediately by one or two gears temporary change down The transmission no longer selects 7th gear at high driving speeds Sport and Sport Plus Mode Sport mode activated The PDK transmission switches to a sporty gear changing map and shortens the shifting times A sporty driving style is recognized more quickly and the gear changing speeds are adapted to driving performance Deceleration downshifts are initiated earlier Downshifts occur for small decelerations even at higher revs Sport Plus mode activated In Sport Plus mode the PDK transmission changes to a shift program designed for driving on race circuits 7th gear is not sel
168. chapter Manually locking the steering column on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive on page 165 Steering column lock Vehicles without Porsche Entry amp Drive The steering column is locked automatically when the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock and unlocked automatically when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition lock Vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive The steering column is locked automatically when the driver s door is opened when the ignition is switched off Manually locking the steering column on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Once the ignition is switched off turn the control unit to ignition lock position 3 again and hold it there for 2 seconds The steering column is locked when you hear a clicking noise The steering column can be unlocked automatically by turning the control unit to ignition lock position 1 Emergency operation with Porsche Entry amp Drive Interference in radio transmission between the vehicle and ignition lock or a discharged ignition lock battery can disable the Porsche Entry amp Drive comfort function If this happens the control unit can be removed from the ignition lock and the vehicle can be Started using the standard ignition key Removing the control unit from the ignition lock 1 Turn the control unit to ignition lock position 3 and hold it there for about 10 seconds Once you hear the clicking sound you can remove
169. che notify the purchaser that the vehicle is equipped with air bags and refer them to the chapter Air bag systems in the owner s manual safety and disposal rules Further information on the air bag system can be found on stickers attached to the sun visors as well as on all air bag components For special recommendations on the use of child restraints gt Please see the chapter CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS on page 52 52 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Child Restraint Systems Porsche recommends that all infants and children be restrained in child restraint systems at all times while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with applicable laws When possible use only child restraint systems recommended by Porsche These systems have been tested and adjusted to the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate child age groups These child restraint systems are also designed to be secured in vehicle seats by the lap belt portion of the lap shoulder belt Other systems have not been tested and could entail an increased risk of injury The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 US states and the Canadian provinces The child restraint system should be one that complies with U S Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be secured by a lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or for child seats equipped with the LATCH sytem Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children also known
170. che dealer will be pleased to advise you Warning triangle first aid kit The warning triangle together with the first aid kit is located in the storage compartment under the load sill in the luggage compartment 1 Turn both twistlocks A 90 2 Remove cover B 3 Remove combination pack C containing the first aid kit and or warning triangle Note Replace any items you remove from the first aid kit and any out of date items immediately Tool kit The tool kit is stored at the left side under the luggage compartment floor The tool kit contains the following Wrench socket for security wheel bolt Tire sealant Tool box Towing lug Compressor mmo O W gt Hexagon wrench for emergency operation of slide tilt roof under the compressor Minor Repairs 279 Tires and Wheels The original equipment tires and wheel rims on your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards For your safety remember the following Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit your Porsche If you intend to use other than original equipment wheels be sure that they conform to Porsche specifications for your model Only tires with the same make and with the same specification code e g NO N1 can be mounted The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do not meet specifications of the original factory installed equipment will affect the safe operation of your vehicle and affect
171. cked Alarm system is activated The indicator lights flash quickly while you are locking the vehicle then flash normally Alarm system is activated interior surveillance and inclination sensor are switched off The indicator lights flash quickly while you are locking the vehicle go out for 10 seconds and then flash normally Faults in the central locking system and alarm system The indicator lights come on for 10 seconds flash at double speed for 20 seconds and then flash normally Avoiding false alarms gt f people or animals are remaining in the locked vehicle or the vehicle is being transported on a train or ship for example the interior surveillance system and inclination sensor must be switched off temporarily gt Always close the slide tilt roof and all door windows Alarm System and Theft Protection 249 Immobilizer There is a transponder an electronic component containing a stored code in each key Before the ignition is switched on the ignition lock checks the code The immobiliser can be deactivated and the engine started only using an authorised ignition key 250 Alarm System and Theft Protection Locking the Steering Column Vehicles without Porsche Entry amp Drive Unlocking the steering column automatically gt Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock Locking the steering column automatically gt Remove the ignition key Vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Dr
172. cle gt Settings gt Date Time 2 Select Summer time 3 Confirm selection Summer time is activated af Summer time is deactivated Displaying time in stopwatch on dashboard You can configure the stopwatch on the dashboard to display the time 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Date Time 2 Select Time Chrono 3 Confirm selection Time is displayed iol Time is not displayed Setting units You can select the units of measurement for vehicle displays such as the speed on the digital speedometer in the instrument panel the temperature gauge in the air conditioning displays and the tire pressure display on the multi function display 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Units and confirm Setting speedometer units The units of the speed and distance information on the speedometer can be adjusted 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Units 2 Select Speedometer 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options r km km h Miles mph Setting unit for temperature gauges The measurement unit for temperature gauges can be changed 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Units 2 Temperature 3 Select desired setting and confirm Available setting options eG or Setting unit for Tire Pressure Monitoring display
173. cle properly who uses driving skills wisely and always drives within her his own capabilities and the level of familiarity with the vehicle You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to perform most of the checks listed on the following pages If in doubt have these checks performed by your authorized Porsche dealer Before driving off Check the following items first gt Turn the engine off before you attempt any checks or repairs on the vehicle Be sure the tires are inflated correctly Check tires for damage and tire wear See that wheel bolts are properly tightened and not loose or missing Check engine oil level add if necessary Make it a habit to have engine oil checked with every refueling Check all fluid levels such as windshield washer and brake fluid levels Be sure the vehicle battery is well charged and cranks the engine properly Check all doors and lids for proper operation and latch them properly Check and if necessary replace worn or cracked wiper blades See that all windows are clear and unobst ructed Check air intake slots and area between engine compartment lid and windshield Ensure that these areas are free of snow and ice so the heater and the windshield wipers work properly gt Ifa child will be riding in the vehicle check child seat child seat restraint system to ensure that restraints are properly adjusted gt Check all exterior and interior lights fo
174. ctrical system 1 Warning Risk of short circuit damage and explosion resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Use only jumper cables of adequate diameter cross section and fitted with completely insulated alligator clips gt Follow all warnings and instructions of the jumper cable manufacturer gt When connecting jumper cables make sure that they cannot get caught in any moving parts in the engine compartment The jumper cables must be long enough so that neither vehicles nor cables touch another gt The vehicles must not be in contact otherwise current might flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected gt The cable clamps must not be allowed to contact each other when one end of the jumper cables are connected to a battery 306 Minor Repairs gt Carefully ensure that tools or conductive jewelery rings chains watch straps do not come into contact with the positive jumper cable or the positive battery post gt Improper hook up of jumper cables can ruin the alternator Danger of caustic burns gt Do not lean over the battery Danger of gas explosion gt Improper use of booster battery to start a vehicle may cause an explosion resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Keep sources of ignition away from the battery e g open flame burning cigarettes or sparking due to cable contact or welding work gt A discharged battery can freeze even at 14 F
175. cupant 38 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel gt Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any of the seat adjustment buttons gt Donotleave children in the vehicle unattended since they may depress the comfort setting button and crush themselves or another occupant 1N Caution Risk of damage to windshield sun visor windstop etc when the seat is adjusted or folded back or forward gt Adjust the seat so that the seat backrest is not in contact with any other object The driver front and back passenger seats provide integrated head restraints in the backrests The head restraints are not adjustable 1N Warning All occupants including the driver should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints and backrests respectively are placed in their proper positions so that the risk of neck injuries is minimized in the event of a crash For a proper positioning of the head restraint the seatback s inclination should be adjusted such that the head restraint is in an upright position Driver and passengers should be seated upright and in the center of their seats Seat position An ergonomically correct sitting position is important for safe and fatigue free driving We recommend the following procedure for adjusting the driver s seat to suit individual requirements 1 Adjust the seat until with your left foot on the footrest your left leg remains at a slight angle 2
176. d lf the roll up sunblind is raised when reverse gear is engaged the roll up blind is lowered automatically The roll up sunblind is raised when the vehicle drives forward again Preconditions The ignition must be switched on The function must be activated on the multi function display For information on setting the automatic lowering function gt Please see the chapter ADJUSTING REVERSING OPTIONS on page 144 Air Conditioning Brief Overview Front Control Panel 68 Brief Overview Rear Control Panel 4 Zone Air Conditioning ccccccccceeeeeeeeeees 69 Overview of Air Conditioning seeeeee 70 General Functions cccccceseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseaaeees 71 Automatically Controlled Air Conditioning 76 Air VONtS ccccccceecccceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeueuaeeeeaes 82 Heated Rear Window Exterior Mirror Poar ee er nner Co en er er oe 84 Air Conditioning 67 Brief Overview Front Control Panel This brief overview does not replace the information provided under AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Warnings in particular are not replaced by this brief overview What do I want to do Switch on climate control Set temperature Set air quantity manually Set air distribution manually Defrost windshield 68 Air Conditioning What do I have to do Press the button 1 for the left side or the button 7 for the right side Left vehicle
177. d Locking 33 1 Open the driver s door 2 Pull the release lever arrow The engine compartment lid is now unlocked 34 Opening and Locking 3 Pull the unlocking handle arrow 4 Open the engine compartment fully Closing 1 Lower lid and let it fall into the lock If necessary push the lid closed with the palm of your hand in the area of the lock 2 Check that the lid is engaged correctly in the lock and that the release lever is back in its initial position When the vehicle is in motion a message will appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel if the lid is not closed properly Malfunctions When Opening and Closing Emergency operation of tailgate lf the tailgate cannot be opened with the radio remote control e g if the battery of the remote control is dead the emergency operation must be performed 1 Unlock and open the driver s door with the car key 2 Switch on the ignition within 10 seconds to prevent the alarm system from triggering 3 Press the central locking button on the front or rear center console The tailgate is now unlocked and can be opened with the unlocking handle Only one door is unlocked On the multifunction display in the instrument panel you can set different variants for locking and unlocking the doors and tailgate You can open all doors irrespective of the setting made gt Press button gf on the key twice within 2 seconds The vehic
178. d local ordinances prohibit towing with a chain rope or even a tow bar In addition damage to your vehicle may result from improper precedures Consult your authorized Porsche dealer for details Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing to be used on Porsche vehicles Tips on driving gt Always observe the laws governing towing and tow starting gt Exercise extreme care when your vehicle is being towed lf a turn signal is operated when the ignition and emergency flasher is switched on only the turn signal on the corresponding side of the vehicle lights up The emergency flasher is switched back on again when the turn signal is switched off 1 Warning Risk of accidents No power assistance is available on the towed vehicle when its engine is not running Greater force is therefore required when braking and steering gt Exercise extreme care when your vehicle is being towed When the engine is not running adequate lubrication of the transmission is not guaranteed Observe the following points to avoid damage to the transmission Panamera S Towing a vehicle with PDK transmission on all four wheels Caution We urge that wherever possible a car transporter or trailer be used to transport a Panamera vehicle that cannot move under its own power This is the safest way to transport a down vehicle For those instances where a car transporter or trailer is not available the vehicle may
179. d manually The message Please start engine manually will appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Exceptions for the Auto Start Stop function The Auto Start Stop function is not available in the following situations for example When Sport mode is activated When PSM is off In Maneuvering mode When AC MAX mode is activated When the Windshield defrost function is active While adjusting the chassis level When the rear fog light is on The Auto Start Stop function is available with limited functionality in the following situations for example lf the air conditioning or passenger compartment heating is operated at a high Setting or if the defrost function is run for long time periods lf the battery charging condition is low On upward or downward slopes During internal vehicle test procedures e g automatic engine checks Note If one of these situations arises after the engine has stopped automatically the engine can be restarted automatically Driving and Driving Safety 169 a Switching Auto Start Stop function on and off Switching Auto Start Stop function off gt Press button a The indicator light on the button lights up The engine s Auto Stop function is disabled Switching Auto Start Stop function on gt Press button a
180. d off and before the gt driver s or passenger s door is first opened but for a maximum of 10 minutes Press selection button A for the driver s side and selection button B for the passenger s side The indicator light on the pressed button lights up Move the exterior mirrors to the correct position by pressing the adjustment button C If the electrical adjustment facility fails gt Adjust the mirror by pressing on the mirror face Folding in exterior mirrors gt Press button D Both exterior mirrors fold in automatically If the electrical adjustment facility fails gt Fold in mirrors manually Folding out exterior mirrors gt Press button D Both exterior mirrors unfold automatically Folding exterior mirrors in and out automatically The exterior mirrors can be folded in automatically after the vehicle is locked Folding exterior mirrors in automatically gt Press and hold the button amp on the car key for at least 1 second or On vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive press and hold the locking button in the handle on the driver s door for at least 1 second The exterior mirrors fold in Folding exterior mirrors out automatically gt Switch on ignition The exterior mirrors fold out Note The exterior mirrors do not fold out automatically after the ignition is switched on if they were folded in manually using the button D If the electrical adjustment facility fai
181. desired distance are retained Resuming cruise control and distance control RESUME gt Push the control stalk on the steering wheel up position 4 RESUME The vehicle accelerates to the desired speed that was stored unless a vehicle travelling in front is detected as driving slower than the desired speed and the distance from this vehicle is less than the desired distance that was Set The status display A changes from grey to orange or Press the control stalk on the steering wheel up and keep it pressed position 4 RESUME The vehicle accelerates in a more sporty driving style to the desired speed that was stored Note on operation If speed and distance control was interrupted using the control stalk 3 OFF it can only be resumed again when the vehicle is moving and no stationary objects are detected in front Warning messages Distance warning when adaptive cruise control is inactive ACC passive lf adaptive cruise control is not active the control system still monitors the distance from the vehicle in front lf the distance from the vehicle in front is less than the desired distance that was set last a yellow warning triangle appears on the multi function display 1N Warning Risk of accidents Danger of collision with the vehicle in front gt Drive with extreme care gt Slow down if necessary 593 814 SWR3 10 39 AM B F aja Overtake request when adaptive cruise contr
182. dication by the emergency flasher and by the acoustic signal will be provided after all doors and lids are closed Brief Overview Opening and Locking From Outside The Porsche Entry amp Drive option can be recognized by the buttons A in the door handles This brief overview does not replace the information provided under OPENING AND LOCKING FROM OUTSIDE Warnings in particular are not replaced by this brief overview What do I want to do Unlocking Closing Lock if persons animals are remaining in vehicle Switch off the alarm system s interior surveillance Switching off alarm Key What do I have to do Using the key Press the button gf on the key once Press the button gf on the key twice With Porsche Entry amp Drive Grip the door handle fully Using the key Press the button 5 on the key With Porsche Entry amp Drive Press the button A on the door handle Please see the chapter SWITCHING OFF INTERIOR SURVEILLANCE AND INCLINATION SENSOR on page 247 Press the button gf on the key 591 195 Porsche Entry amp Drive What happens The emergency flasher flashes once The driver s door can be opened All vehicle doors and the rear lid can be opened The doors and the rear lid can be opened The emergency flasher flashes twice and an acoustic signal will sound twice The doors are locked Opening and Locking 21 591 196 Opening and Locking
183. different When adaptive cruise control is operating normally or when the HOLD function is active the brake pedal may feel different and you may hear hydraulic noises This behavior is normal for the system It is not a fault Driving off again The vehicle can be driven off again after being stopped and speed and distance control will be resumed depending on the operating state of the adaptive cruise control system For information on the operating states of the adaptive cruise control system gt Please see the chapter OPERATING STATES WHEN ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL IS SWITCHED ON on page 182 Adaptive cruise control active 1 Press the control stalk on the steering wheel up position 4 RESUME 2 Briefly press the accelerator pedal Your vehicle drives on automatically Note Your vehicle will not drive off if the vehicle detected in front is stationary Adaptive cruise control is ready Automatic speed and distance control can only be resumed when your vehicle is moving 1 Drive off normally 2 Press the control stalk on the steering wheel up position 4 RESUME or Set or change the desired speed Interrupting and resuming cruise control and distance control Interrupting cruise control and distance control OFF gt Press the brake pedal or Press the control stalk on the steering wheel down position 3 OFF Adaptive cruise control is inactive The desired speed that was stored and the
184. driving at that speed Switching cruise control readiness off gt Press button A on the control stalk The memory is cleared and the readiness symbol disappears The stored desired speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off when the vehicle is parked Tip on driving On upward or downward slopes the set speed cannot always be maintained by cruise control gt To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better rev range you therefore have to change down to a lower gear 178 Driving and Driving Safety Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control maintains any selected speed between approx 20 100 mph 30 160 km h when driving on open roads without you having to use the accelerator If a vehicle travelling ahead of you inthe same lane is detected as driving slower than the selected speed adaptive cruise control will automatically maintain a set distance from the vehicle in front Adaptive cruise control slows your vehicle down if the distance to the vehicle ahead becomes too short and accelerates your vehicle if the distance increases 1N Warning Risk of accidents in heavy traffic in city traffic on twisting roads or in unfavorable road conditions e g wintry or wet conditions or varying road surfaces etc gt Do not use adaptive cruise control under these conditions Adaptive cruise control will not detect stationary or slowly moving vehicles pedestrians objects on the road oncoming ve
185. e Data 324 Wheels Tir S ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 325 Tire Pressure for Cold Tires 68 F 20 C 326 WEISS sonsaina AR S 328 Filling Capacities cn 329 Driving Performance sseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 329 PIENE E pt penne eee ose et ere E AE 330 Index sccecensecssiseesarsecscacedisceseersececarsss L Contents 9 Overview Illustrations Drivers Cockpit cccceecccsseeceeeeeeseeeeeeseueuees 11 Steering Wheel and Instrument Panel 12 Po aoard a torre me ies a oe nee Rn ie ee ea et 13 Front Center Console ccccccsseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeees 14 Overhead Operating Console ccccccceeeeees 15 Ee EEE E N E A A E eeyeyeee ee ese eeeees 16 10 Overview Illustrations 93 101 1 2 Driver s Cockpit 1 Door opener See page 32 2 Vehicle setting memory buttons See page 40 3 Electric parking brake See page 171 4 Steering wheel adjustment See page 62 5 Overhead operating console See page 15 6 Power windows See page 86 7 Exterior mirror setting See page 58 8 Engine compartment lid release See page 33 9 Diagnostic socket OBD 10 Light switch See page 92 11 lgnition lock steering lock See page 164 12 Dimming of instrument lighting See page 95 13 Seat adjustment See page 39 Overview Illustrations 1 1 sin 10 11 12 Overview Illustrations 13 Steering Wheel and Instrument Panel 1 Turn signal lights See page 96 2
186. e dealer for more information The wiper blades may be damaged or worn gt Have damaged wiper blades replaced immediately Undercoating The underside of your car is durably protected against chemical and mechanical influences As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage to this protective coating in day to day driving it is advisable to have the underside of the car inspected at certain intervals preferably before the start of winter and again in spring and the undercoating restored as necessary Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the bodyseal treatment procedures and has the necessary equipment for applying factory approved materials We recommend that you entrust them with such work and inspections Unlike conventional spray oils undercoating and rust proofing compounds based on bitumen or wax do not attack the sound proofing materials applied at the factory 1N Warning Danger of fire resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Do not apply additional undercoating or rust proofing on or near the exhaust manifold exhaust pipes catalytic converters or heat shields During driving the substance used for undercoating could overheat and ignite gt Before applying fresh underseal carefully remove deposits or dirt and grease Once it has dried the new undercoating compound forms a tough protective coating which provides efficient rust proofing of the floor panels and compon
187. e event of 3 a fault eee 35 Locking vehicle door with car key remote Control aea e a LA Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry amp Drive 24 Opening and locking vehicle door from inside 31 Unlocking vehicle door with car key remote CONTUON ase cccctaccsmesan neve ssonuncanneseeverctieecans 23 Unlocking vehicle door with Porsche Entry 8 Drive 23 Central locking system Functional description vecctiscecessceveseresnssseiateneeeseseae 20 When disconnecting battery cccesseeeeeeees 304 Changing bulb for licence plate light cccceee 313 Changing the remote control battery cc cccccccseerees 307 Chassis control systems Overview PTM PSM PASM Ps RR PE 201 Chassis number pastion t e e eea a a a a2 Chassis setup Functional description cccccccccceeesessseseeeeeeees 208 Selec ane een ne Meee ee or ease taste see cine 208 Check Engine emission control FUNC OMe Ge SCMPUON e a a ence teat Warming Me ne racaeeteretaeteeayeenece e PETA 114 Warning light on the tachometer 114 Child lock Enabling disabling opening rear doors from TEE E E E E E E A E en ae 32 Enabling Disabling power windows switches in the rear doors ccesccceeecesssseeeeesesssteseeeeesssssssess OO Switching rear control panel on off Gee ere tee oe Child restraint anchorages 000008 Saat eee weer a 57 Child restraint system Installing with LATCH system sccscessesseeeeeee
188. e mirrors automatically change to anti dazzle position or revert to their normal state depending on the light intensity Note on operation The incidental light within the detection area of the light sensor C must not be restricted e g by stickers on the rear window or items of luggage in the luggage compartment Switching off automatic anti dazzle function gt Press button B The indicator light A goes out Note on operation The anti dazzle function switches off automatically if Reverse gear is engaged or Interior lighting is switched on Switching on automatic anti dazzle function gt Press button B Indicator light A lights up Warning Risk of injury Electrolyte fluid may escape from broken mirror glass This fluid irritates the skin and eyes gt lf the electrolyte fluid should come into contact with the skin or eyes rinse it off immediately with clean water Seek medical attention if necessary Risk of damage to paintwork leather plastic parts and clothing Electrolyte fluid can be removed only while it is still wet gt Clean the affected parts with water Steering Wheel PDK shift buttons Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK is a seven speed transmission with an automatic and a manual selection mode You can change temporarily to manual mode or shift gear in manual mode with the shift buttons A on the steering wheel For more information on shifting with the P
189. e off and let it cool down sufficiently Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 97 A Button for front interior light B Button for rear interior lights C D Button for front reading lights Interior Lighting Interior lights Switching front interior light on and off gt Press button A Switching rear interior light on and off gt Press button B in the front overhead operating console or button E above the relevant door 98 Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers Fa j b j E l a En d pi BEAL ER TEL mT my aj a Oe A Te aA EL Dimming brightness adjustment gt Press button A for the front interior light or button E for the relevant rear interior light and hold for at least 1 second until the desired level of brightness is reached Reading lights Switching front reading lights on and off gt Press button C or D Switching rear reading lights on and off gt Press button E above the relevant door E Button for rear reading and interior lights Dimming brightness adjustment gt Press button C or D for the front reading light or button E for the relevant rear reading light and hold for at least 1 second until the desired level of brightness is reached switched off when the door is closed after a delay of approx 120 seconds The off delay time can be preset on the multi function display The interior lighting goes out as soon
190. e rolling movements of the vehicle are reduced further depending on the selected mode Please see the chapter PORSCHE DYNAMIC CHASSIS CONTROL PDCC on page 211 The PDK transmission switches to a sporty gear changing map and shortens the gear shifting times when Sport mode is activated Gear changes take place faster 2 12 Driving and Driving Safety Please see the chapter SPORT AND SPORT PLUS MODE on page 195 The electronic accelerator pedal reacts sooner and the engine is more responsive to throttle inputs When Sport mode is switched on and the vehicle is travelling at a speed of less than 25 mph 40 km h this function is activated only after the driver has floored the accelerator pedal or released it briefly The rpm limiter characteristic is harder In other words the engine is immediately throttled when the performance limits are reached only in manual selection mode on vehicles with PDK The turbo overboost briefly increases the engine boost pressure in the engine speed range from 2 500 rpm to approx 4 000 rpm As a result torque in this speed range is increased by 70 Nm 52 ftlb This considerably improves acceleration and flexibility particularly in the medium engine speed range This does not affect the maximum power Quickly flooring the accelerator pedal activates turbo overboost in the engine control system Overboost has an effective operating time of approx 10 seconds
191. e the fault corrected immediately Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Gearbox emergency operation warning in red Effect Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a stop Action required gt Itis not possible to continue driving Stop the vehicle immediately in a suitable place Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop gt Please see the chapter TOWING on page 316 Warning Gearbox temperature too high Effects Warning jerks can be felt when driving off and the engine power may be restricted Action required Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on a hill for example Hold the vehicle with the brake Reduce engine load Stop the vehicle in a suitable place if possible Allow the engine to run in selector lever position P or N until the warning disappears Driving and Driving Safety 199 PDK selector lever emergency release In the event of an electronics failure the PDK selector lever can only be moved from selector lever position P if an emergency release operation has already been performed Note lf a selector lever emergency release was performed the vehicle must not be towed gt Please see the chapter TOWING on page 316 gt Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling aw
192. e treater aeee anaes 102 Wiping windshield once one touch operation 102 Fuel e olan eeemerercrenet eee E rerrreren creer 264 Evaporation control ma ee a 269 E T kuelealze A Sacre cea nee memes ea al Fuel reserve Warning eccere 112 Fuels containing ethanol Gia eres 268 Octane rating erer aee e SP E E 265 Portable fuel containers 3 COUN AE E a E a a A S Recommendation n 208 Recommendations eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesessseeseees 268 Refuelling 6 eee eee E aes 265 Van CADACILY cnunawwesatsumt areca eo LU ors Pea eee aren nce er ace OR ents a Yaar mere erie 4 cs Fuel containers DOMADICs iiscstsesiseseatcisinriartarstsaaanaranisoasans 3 Fuel SAUCE a tiki nonccensavernabivavnamblibectis 111 Fuel level indicator Mee E E E A S E E a a On Mat te ann 266 Fuse changing electric fuses ccccccessseceeesesssseeeeees 298 G Garage door opener Deleting programmed signals cccccceeeeeeee 244 Functional description ecrane 243 OP E E E E A 245 Programming signal changeable code system 244 Programming signal fixed code SYSt M eseeeecsesee 244 Gear selector Emergency unlocking c 00 c0cccdssescercieaeseeeectvewess 200 Glove box ols eae eee ene eee S Cooling EAA A ET 83 OP E E E 219 Ground clearance a oe ce cca eer etc neceee en eee eee 3 H Handbrake electric parking brake OP e E reais varrest certareeices 171 PEE E E A E rte Ree 171 Head
193. eceescseesecceeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK 05 193 Selector Lever Positions s e 195 Porsche Traction Management PTM 202 Porsche Stability Management PSM 202 ABS Brake System Anti Lock Brake S C1 0 ee FETTE EE TE TETE 207 Porsche Active Suspension Management PASM ccccccecscesssssseseesseesseesueeeeueuuueeuueuuuss 208 Porsche Active Suspension Management PASM with Air Suspension and Level Contoh eee a e R 209 Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control PDCC 211 Sport and Sport Plus Mode acc 212 Sports Exhaust System cnc 214 Retractable Rear Spoiler o ae 214 Driving and Driving Safety 163 371 030 ignition Lock Steering Lock The ignition key is inserted into the ignition lock underneath the light switch at the left of the steering wheel On vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive you no longer have to insert the key into the ignition lock but merely keep it with you The ignition key is replaced by a control unit in the ignition lock which always remains in the ignition lock unless the vehicle is being towed The ignition lock has three key positions The steering column can be actively locked in a fourth key position on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive 164 Driving and Driving Safety tg Pe a Key positions 0 Initial position 1 Ignition on 2 Start engine Note on operation The vehicle battery discha
194. ected The gear changing performance is enhanced Significantly again compared with Sport mode gt Please see the chapter SPORT AND SPORT PLUS MODE on page 212 Driving and Driving Safety 195 Driving off with Launch Control Launch Control allows you to achieve maximum acceleration from standstill 1N Warning There is a risk of endangering other road users if you use this Control in an improper location or in a situation where other persons might need to take evasive action due to the rapid acceleration that this technology permits Launch Control is designed to be used in a controlled environment on closed circuit driving courses where no vehicle cross traffic or pedestrian traffic is present gt Use Launch Control only if conditions permit it to be applied in a safe manner gt Do not use Launch Control if there is a possibility it could endanger other persons Such a possibility exists if you cannot see that you have a clear road with no possibility of cross traffic in your intended direction of driving 196 Driving and Driving Safety 1N Caution Stress on components increases dramatically when starting with maximum acceleration in comparison with normal driving off Use of Launch Control will inevitably reduce the life of the engaged engine and transmission components Preconditions Launch Control should only be used when the engine has reached operating temperatu
195. ed TPM malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPM from functioning properly gt Always check the TPM malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPM to continue to function properly The warning light in the instrument panel lights up When a loss in pressure has been detected Inthe event of a defect in Tire Pressure Monitoring or a temporary fault When learning new fitted wheels wheel transmitters as long as the vehicle s own wheels have not yet been recognized The tire pressure warning light on the instrument panel goes out only when the cause of the fault has been rectified Functional description of Tire Pressure Monitoring Tire Pressure Monitoring offers the following functions Display of the actual tire pressure while the vehicle is in motion Fill info display Display of the deviation from the required pressure refilling pressure at standstill Tire info display Display of current settings when the vehicle is Stationary Tire pressure warnings in two stages yellow and red warning Selecting the Tire pressure function on the multi function display 1 Select gt Tire pressure and confirm 593 810 SWR3 Tire pressure
196. eeeeesssstseeeeeeeses LAZ Switching off passenger compartment MONON SV SUCUW asnaiervmies covncxnieaaeapeienenmnveroers 248 SWIG NIN E 247 When disconnecting battery ccc0eesesseeeeees 304 Index Alcantara Care instructions cc cccccceesssssseeeeeesssssee 2 70 Alloy wheels Care AIN SUCTION S meane a 274 mo sts eememen som E tothe nee 289 All wheel drive Functional description 202 Aluminum rims Care instrUcHonS aerea a2 14 ight 10 od e a S 4 cc Antifreeze In coolant Err eee are Reni ern Sree ton 257 In washer fIUIC cccecseseeseeeeeeeseeseeeecsersesssesaee 200 Anti lock brake system ABS PURCTONAlIGASCMIPUON E E E E a Anti slip control ASR Functional description Reece eee ees 204 Armrest Opening front storage tray cccsesssceceeessseeees elo Opening rear Storage tray cccecssssscceeeeessseeeees 220 Ashtray E E Front opening eerren eee aa e a AAA Rear emptying esseseneseenenrrnrerneensrererrrerrrern 224 Rear ODCiING e asec caumbataaee re 224 ASR Anti slip control Funcionaldescription e aee e aaae 20A Assistance when driving uphill Functional description seesinane enesenn eenean 206 Audio a E meen A R NE Audio interface installation position A E E E T 192 AUTO UIGHESWIKCN cexteehaeeecctzencusts eee ene 92 Driving light assistant cccessesseceeeeesstteeeee es AUTO button Air conditioning SYStCM Hscav
197. eering WhEEl c ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 61 Heated steering wheel cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 61 Steering Wheel Adjustment cccceseeeeeees 02 Multi Function Steering Wheel 63 SHG VSO A AE E A E T 64 NIO aivasvauaenevatiaront miata tegen rereesenn 64 Roll Up Sunblinds Rear Side Windows 65 Roll Up Sunblind Rear Window secc 66 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 37 Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints 4 Danger The seat may move unexpectedly if you attempt to adjust while driving This could cause sudden loss of control resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in mo tion The backrest locks must be engaged at all times while the vehicle is in motion Safety belts only offer protection when the backrest is upright and the belts are properly positioned on the body Improperly positioned safety belts or safety belts worn by passengers in an excessively reclined position can cause serious personal injury or death in an accident gt Do not operate the car with the driver or passenger backrests excessively reclined gt Please see the chapter SEAT POSITION on page 38 Danger of injury if persons or animals are in the movement range of the seat during seat adjustment gt Adjust the seat so that no one is put at risk gt Do not activate the comfort memory button if there is any risk of the seat crushing the oc
198. ees 120 Door De icing door lOCK cc ccccceessssteeeeeessssteeeeeees 2 0 Locking if persons animals are remaining in ve MEIE a isan ye aen 24 Locking with car key remote control 24 Locking with Porsche Entry amp Drive keyless ree 24 Malfunctions when opening and closing 0 35 Switching child lock for rear doors on off 32 Unlocking with car key remote control 23 Unlocking with Porsche Entry amp Drive poles eee m3 Door locking UIROMMANC pet ecperraveask T 25 Door mirror AOE arn E E E E se 58 Adjusting as parking aid ae me toca rei anes 60 POU G E eee oo PONG OUI E a eueetennnencn re crete 59 Storing a emery ae ee nee reece 59 Dooropenine r Drinks holder EE E acess AE 222 RE E E ene E E eppUn nen Ter ir 223 Dive OmMAssistant a e eee one eee ne aa 20 Driver memory eee a a 0 Driving a A E E a A E 199 Index 333 Driving light assistant Adaptive light SyStem ccsccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees ee 92 Automatic headlight Pa functional description essssnnnneseennniineseninrreererrrriseserrrrrneeee D4 Daytime driving lights E E E E 94 Dynamic cornering ce eas TAE A eo 94 Dah 15 017211 eee teen ae aie mnie here a et ee eae Static cornering E ee 94 Switching on ene rane rey reer E 92 Driving off launch Controla ee hee eee see etee ede eee eee 190 Driving performance Technical data ee eee DVD Installation locat
199. eesseeeeeeseees 324 Person Buttons EMONY Jassceverssiussnnaetencnesiveosnisaincavaran Sed Petrol PRE eC AN rete a a A T 267 Fuel gauge cece cece E a 111 Fuel reserve Warning ccecce 112 OE E O Portable fuel containers TE eee eee pane 3 QUAI IDY a iderceuaredoicaral E E ace eoavenne nite 265 Pee a 2 OO Tank CADACIY N E A 329 Plastic components care instructions ey ee ema 274 Porsche Active Suspension Management PASM Air suspension and level control cc0000eeees 209 Functional description s c 208 Ovenie w e pe a ene een rioerc nia tener ae 201 Warning message on the multi function display 208 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake PCCB General information cccccccccesessssssssteteeeteeeeeseeeee D Porsche Communication Management PCM 5 191 Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK 06 Peer Meee 193 Bi ine 1 EE E eee eee eee bo e E E E A Kickdown is cccvnanenhniinessadusansneesuissinesateinrsacsullacssean L97 ENE EIE A E E T 196 Reduced driving program Se re 199 Selector lever position r e eea 193 Shifting gears on the steering Wheel 196 Sport mode soea a dias 195 Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control PDCC Functional description sseserccererreerreereernn LL O rer roe eee hah et E 40 Warning message on the multi function display ee 211 Porsche Entry amp Drive Inclination SENSOM cccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeecesereneteretenees O49 Interior SUIV IIANCE
200. elts at all times while the vehicle is in motion gt Use appropriate child restraint systems for all small children Proper wearing of safety belts gt Safety belts must be positioned on the body as to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding forward Improperly positioned safety belts can Cause serious personal injury in case of an accident gt The shoulder belt should always rest on your upper body The shoulder belt should never be worn behind your back or under your arm gt For maximum effectiveness the lap belt should be worn low across the hips gt Pregnant women should position the belt as low as possible across the pelvis Make sure it is not pressing against the abdomen gt Belts should not be worn twisted gt Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eye glasses pens keys etc as these may cause injury gt Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere with proper positioning of belts gt Belts must not rub against sharp objects or damage may occur to the belt gt Two occupants should never share the same belt at the same time Care and maintenance gt Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that may prevent a secure locking gt Belts that have been subjected to excessive stretch forces in an accident must be inspected or replaced to ensure their continued effectiveness in restraining you The same applies to belt tensioner systems
201. emoved only by using window cleaner concentrate gt Please see the chapter WASHER FLUID on page 259 Contact your authorized Porsche dealer for more information The wiper blades may be damaged or worn gt Replace damaged wiper blades immediately Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Instrument Panel USA Models ccc0c008 107 Instrument Panel Canada Models 0 109 Tachometer ener eee eee 110 Speedometer ccccccccsceccccsseeeeseeeeeeeeeeesenees 110 Multi Function Display seses 110 Engine Oil Temperature Gauge ccccecceee 110 Coolant Temperature Gauge c sseeeee 110 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge c seseeeeeees 111 Fuel Galge ne anon a emer eer ree pee ne tee ee 111 Digital Speedometer 112 Upshift Prompt Indicator irsiirinirinisiisronsa 112 Odometer ooo ceceeececccccceseseeueeeeeeeseneeeeaeeeseess 112 Reset Button for Trip Counter Display Brightness Setting for Instrument Lighting 112 PDK Display for Selector Lever Position Engaged G al cccccccscessssesssssessseeeeeceeeeeeeess 112 Battery Alternator ccc 113 Check Engine Emission Control 0000 114 ACOUSTIC Signals ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee sees 114 Operating the MultiFunction Display in the Mstrument Panel oeer 115 Vehicle Settings on the Multi Function BEY a 138 Overview of Warning Messages 0086 152 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 105 p
202. end position of the slide tilt roof 1 Switch on ignition 2 Press the button lt gt forwards in closing direction and hold in position The process for storing the end position begins after approximately 10 seconds Press and hold the button until the roof has stopped moving completely The process takes a maximum of 20 seconds Start the storing process again if the button is released prematurely Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers Automatic Driving Light Assistant Adaptive Light SYSt Mi ccc cccccececsteccccavsssazecees 92 Instrument liIGHtING ee eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 95 Turn Signal High Beam Headlight Flasher Stalk ierra nanas 96 Emergency Flasher ccce 97 Interior LIQHTING cceeecceeseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 98 Brief Overview Windshield Wipers 101 Windshield Wiper Washer Stalk 00005 102 Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 91 Light Switch Light is switched off The daytime driving lights are switched on when the ignition is switched on provided that they are activated on the multi function display in the instrument panel For information on activating deactivating daytime driving lights gt Please see the chapter ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING AUTOMATIC DAYTIME DRIVING LIGHTS on page 142 AUTO Automatic driving light assistant 92 Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 20 0 Side lights Side marker lights lice
203. ener 32 Opening and Locking Securing rear doors You can prevent passengers from accidentally pulling the door opener and opening the rear doors from inside Activating and deactivating child lock The child locks are fitted in the lock area of the rear doors The doors cannot be opened from inside when the child locks are on gt To engage Turn the child lock in direction of travel using the emergency key gt To disengage Turn the child lock away from the direction of travel using the emergency key For information on the emergency key gt Please see the chapter EMERGENCY KEY on page 20 Opening and Closing the Engine Compartment Lid 4 Danger Risk of loss of control or an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Should you notice at any time while driving that one of the lids is not secured properly please stop immediately in a suitable place and close it The engine compartment lid may fly up impairing vision Opening 1N Caution Risk of damage to engine compartment lid or windshield wipers gt Make sure that the windshield wipers are not pulled out forwards when opening the engine compartment lid gt Always switch off windshield wipers before opening the engine compartment lid wiper switch in position 0 For information on the front wipers gt Please see the chapter FRONT WIPER AND HEADLIGHT WASHER SYSTEM on page 102 Opening an
204. ents gt Always apply a fresh coating of suitable preser vative to unprotect areas after cleaning the underside of the body the transmission the engine or carrying out repairs to under body engine or transmission components Effective rust proofing is particularly important during the cold weather season If your car is driven frequently in areas where salt has been spread on the roads the whole engine compart ment should be cleaned thoroughly after the winter to prevent salt from causing any lasting damage A full under body wash should also be performed at the same time Maintenance and Car Care 213 Cleaning headlights lights interior and exterior plastic components adhesive foils radar sensor for adaptive cruise control and rearview camera Observe the following points gt Use only clean water and a little dishwashing liquid or interior window cleaner to clean headlights lights plastic components and surfaces Use a soft sponge or a soft lint free cloth Note An interior window cleaner can also be used to clean plastic surfaces always read the cleaning instructions on the container We recommend Porsche interior window cleaner gt Gently wipe the surface without applying too much pressure gt Do not clean when dry gt Never use other chemical cleaners or solvents gt Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water 214 Maintenance and Car Care Alloy wheels Metal particles e g brass or
205. equipment The sensors will be damaged if the pressure is too high Signal tones function When reverse gear is selected ParkAssist confirms that it is switched on by issuing a short signal tone lf the vehicle has front ParkAssist no signal tone will be issued when reverse gear is selected Instead the ParkAssist visual display will appear on the central screen of the Porsche communication system A detected obstacle is signalled by an intermittent tone The intervals decrease as the obstacle is approached lf the distance drops to less than approx 14 in 35 cm a continuous tone sounds gt Set the radio volume so that the signal tones are not drowned out 240 Parking The volume of the signal tones can be changed individually For information on changing the signal tone volume gt Please see the chapter ADJUSTING PARKASSIST VOLUME on page 150 1N Warning Risk of accidents Even when using ParkAssist the driver is still responsible for taking due care when parking and when assessing obstacles gt Do not reverse any further once a continuous tone sounds Risk of collision Limits of ultrasonic measurement ParkAssist cannot detect sound absorbing obstacles e g winter driving powder snow sound reflecting obstacles such as glass surfaces and flat painted surfaces and very thin obstacles e g thin posts Other ultrasound sources such as the pneumatic brakes of other
206. er console sockets glove box FON control unit 43 Not used 4a Noted oo 45 Noted Sd Not used 47 Slide tilt roof Windshield wipers Engine control unit eal Not used Notused ooo oo Sl inmens with memory Seat Seat adjustment rear left rear left a pump Rain sensor Not used L od ot used ie ir conditioning system fan 300 Minor Repairs Fuse box in right side of dashboard No Designation JA 1 Tire Pressure Monitoring control unit 5 2 Not used e Seat heating rear 303 KA e socket in glove box 20 Seat adjustment front right 30 29 with memory socket in large rear center console RHD electric parking brake button a Not used Deien O A ki center console socket Rear cigarette lighter Seat adjustment front right without memory LHD rear center console socket LHD handset mobile phone charger ia steering column adjustment Y om Seat Entertainment EN 12 D teephore TS Bosa o os o Li ee Maa E control unit Se a ee air conditioning sun sensor 18 RHD PDK control unit clutch sensor Garage door opener Air bag control unit Advanced air bag occupant sensing 5 Steering column switch Turn signal front left right Footwell lights Ignition lock anti removal lock Right hand drive vehicles only Turn signal rear right Marker light front left Low beam headlight right High beam headlight right Side turn signals front Cornering light front left l
207. eration of slide tilt roof 0008 89 Emergency unlocking of the filler flap 06 267 Overview of warning Me SSa ES ceeeeeeeeeeee 152 ParkASSist 0 ac A anise E E AR 241 Power Window a ean dteecnaseesenaceesasnceneses 88 MOA eee 89 When opening and EOS 35 Filler flap Emergency unlocking ssssnnnesseeniiseeeeinnereeenenn 267 Filling capacities Coo a eeen T ELT E ELERTE ET 329 Engine oil E eee ere eee ii 329 E srcunn ase E E E noe 329 OEIC ota Sone aan entree tere unronvnet as 329 Overview of fluids and eS 329 Wa EU WMC a n iaeessewrecs 329 Filter Air cleaner maintenance instructions 261 Particle filter maintenance instructions 261 Fire extinguisher storage location 321 PU Ua li E ats race coneeee neni ceme bernie yeernereere in 279 Floor mats care instructions igen desk S Fluids and fuels a T eo Engine ol a a a a ee erat van O29 nL 2 Raa eter area EE oda E ER A E eran 329 WaSVC UIC nacmsvamecn ieee eo Footbrake safety a 172 Four wheel drive F nctional description eraser an 202 Front seat Retrieving settings MOMOLY cooceeccccccccssesssseseeeeeee 41 Storing settings PREMON e 41 EIEE A E E E E S e Front windshield wipers Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity 000008 103 SWITCHING ON FAIN sensor ee ee a e LOZ Windshield wiping plus washer system 102 Windshield fast Wiping 102 Windshield SIG WV GING o
208. ering Wheel P g pa a D wh Manual steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering wheel manually 1 Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock 2 Push locking lever downwards 3 Adjust steering wheel to suit the chosen backrest angle and your seat position by moving the steering wheel up or down and longitudinally 4 Swivel locking lever back until you feel it engage lf necessary move the steering wheel slightly in a longitudinal direction if Pi a D r Electric steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering wheel electrically gt Press control switch B under the steering column in the relevant direction until the desired setting is reached The steering wheel setting is stored in the vehicle settings For further information on storing and retrieving the steering wheel setting gt Please see the chapter STORING VEHICLE SETTINGS on page 40 Multi Function Steering Wheel 1 Warning There is a risk of accident if you set or operate the multi function display radio navigation system telephone or other equipment while driving Operating these devices while driving could distract you from traffic and cause you to lose control of the vehicle gt Operate the equipment while driving only if the traffic situation allows you to do so safely gt Carry out any complicated operating or setting procedures only when the vehicle is stationary Depending on the equipment
209. ers are efficient clean up devices built into the exhaust system of the vehicle The catalytic converters burn the undesirable pollutants in the exhaust gas before it is released into the atmosphere The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critically important for the life of the catalytic converters Therefore only unleaded fuel must be used The catalytic converters will be damaged by push or tow starting the vehicle misfiring of the engine turning off the ignition while the vehicle is moving or driving until the fuel tank is completely empty by other unusual operating conditions gt Do not continue to operate your vehicle under these conditions since raw fuel might reach the catalytic converters This could result in overheating of the converters Federal law prohibits use of leaded fuel in this car Maintenance and Car Care 263 Fuel Economy Fuel economy will vary depending on where when and how you drive optional equipment installed and the general condition of your Car A car tuned to specifications and correctly maintained will help you to achieve optimal fuel economy gt Have your vehicle tuned to specifications Air cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper engine breathing Battery should be fully charged Wheels should be properly aligned Tires should be inflated to the correct pressure gt Always monitor your fuel consumption gt Drive smoothly avoid abrupt changes
210. et Lack of proper maintenance as well as improper use of the vehicle will impair the function of the emission control system and could lead to damage gt Do not alter or remove any component of the emission control system gt Do not alter or remove any device such as heat shields switches ignition wires valves etc which are designed to protect your vehicle s emission control system In addition to serious engine damage this can result in a fire if excess raw fuel reaches the exhaust system gt Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you detect engine misfire or other unusual operating conditions Parking 1 Danger Danger of fire resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas where the hot exhaust system may come in contact with dry grass brush fuel spill or other flammable materials gt f your car catches on fire for any reason call the fire department Do not endanger your life by attempting to put out the fire Undercoating 1 Danger Danger of fire resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Do not apply additional undercoating or rust proofing on or near the exhaust manifold exhaust pipes catalytic converters or heat shields During driving the substance used for undercoating could overheat and ignite How Emission Control Works When an automobile engine is running it uses energy generated through the combustion o
211. eter in inches 101 Load capacity coefficient Y Speed code letter XL Extra Load Tire with increased load rating B TIN Tire Identification Number Example DOT xx XX XXXX XXXX DOT The DOT symbol indicates that the tires comply with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation and provides information about first two digit code means manufacture s identification mark second two digit code means tire size third four digit code means tire type code fourth four digit code means date of manufacture lf for example the last four numbers read 1204 the tire was produced in the 12th week of 2004 C Tire ply composition and material The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls and their material composition D Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure to which a tire can be inflated gt Do not exceed the permissible inflation pressure E Maximum Load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can be carried by the tire If you replace tires always use a tire that has the same maximum load rating as the factory installed tire F Radial The identification indicates if the tire has radial structure G Term of tubeless or tube tire Identification for tubeless tires Speed code letters The speed code letter Y indicates the maximum permitted speed for the tire This code letter is shown on the
212. etrieve navigation information enter navigation destination start finish navigation see page 123 Map Show adapt the map display for navigation see page 124 Phone Make telephone calls see page 125 _ Tri p Retrieve reset trip information see page 126 Tire pressure Retrieve tire pressure information modify Tire Pressure Monitoring settings see page 127 Sport Chrono Start stop reset stopwatch see page 135 ACC Retrieve adaptive cruise control information see page 178 Activating functions opening submenus and accessing setting options from the main menu areas Press the rotary knob A or push the right lower lever on the steering wheel forwards position 1 to access menus other functions and setting options regardless of the main menu area 1 Select main menu and confirm 2 Select function submenu or setting option and confirm Browsing through long lists When searching for an entry in long telephone and audio lists on vehicles with PCM you can skip directly to other entries with the same first letter gt Briefly press the rotary knob A or hold the operating lever in position 3 or 4 A letter selection screen appears Select the desired first letters and confirm The marking skips to the first list entry beginning with the letters selected Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 1 1 Info Messages Menu scope Oil level INI Ser
213. evant air conditioned area upwards The preset temperature value is shown on the air conditioning display 78 Air Conditioning Temperature and air quantity on the rear control panel 4 zone air conditioning Reducing temperature gt Press button TEMP for the relevant air conditioned area downwards The preset temperature value is shown on the air conditioning display lf LO or HI appears on the display the system is operating at maximum cooling or heating power Automatic mode is switched off Note on operation If one air conditioned area is set to LO or HI the other air conditioned areas are also set to LO or HI Pressing the button AUTO selects the preset temperature Note The air conditioning system always cools and heats the passenger compartment to the preset temperature at maximum cooling or heating temperature Setting the temperature temporarily to a lower or higher value does not cool or heat the passenger compartment to the desired temperature more quickly Setting air quantity The selected air quantity is shown in a bar display above the button P The more bars that are displayed the more air flows into the passenger compartment Increasing air quantity gt Press button F for the air quantity to the relevant air conditioned area upwards Reducing air quantity gt Press button be for the air quantity to the relevant air conditioned area downwards Press button AUTO for the relevant
214. ever is inadvertently changed from P or N into a gear due to a fault or improper use without pressing the brake this gear will also flash on the display and no power transmission will occur To drive off press the brake and move the selector lever from P or N into the required gear again Selector lever position R or D flashes in the instrument panel Effects No power transmission occurs The selector lever was engaged without pressing the footbrake or only the reduced driving program is available when the message Gearbox emergency operation appears Action required gt Press the footbrake and engage the required selector lever position again from P or N lf reverse gear fails gt Please see the chapter REDUCED DRIVING PROGRAM on page 199 If there is a fault in the transmission The Gearbox emergency operation warning in yellow or red or the warning Gearbox temperature too high appears on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter REDUCED DRIVING PROGRAM on page 199 gt Have the fault corrected immediately Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Selector Lever Positions P Parking lock gt Engage parking lock only when the vehicle is stationary If selector lever position P is flashing in the in
215. evmacenaticeeremnanedaee 77 Auto Start Stop function Display e eae Foren E E rt ee 170 EXCEPtIONS ccceeeeessrceseeeeeeseeseseessersstatseteeeeees LOO Operating principle vcccocimcsrersiisaenernasirrsredernvnnl OF PreCOnditionSs ccccccceeeseees eae ee 169 Starting engine automatically ccccceeeeeeeeeee 169 Stopping engine automatically ccccceeeeees 169 Index 331 Switching Ol and o aa a a amnesia 170 Automatic PDK transmission Rocker switches on the steering wheel 61 Automatic brake differential ABD FUNCtiOnal description meae a 204 Automatic driving light assistant Adaptive light system ccciesscroccecenvssenccsceenseneseroeren 92 Automatic headlight levelling Functional description esssceseeseirrrrereeerrrrrrrrre 94 Automatic speed control ue coe Accelerating eeaeee aa lo Peceleritne a a meee er aera eee BLT Functional description ened rent ee ieee Sk aD ee 176 Interrupting operation eae EEE Tee 177 Storing SOG eerie a Uses one ie 176 Swie MIMS ON a a a LoS NG IN Ol oat ote een a A 176 Automatic transmission veesccscceiesnceverssressversataromesccns 193 AUX interface installation position cceseeeeeeeeeeee 192 Auxiliary high beam headlight Camino O E ule 311 Installing headlights 0c00000 E E R 309 Removing headlights E EMes 60 B Baby seat Installing with LATCH System cc cscsseseeeessteeees 56 LATCH
216. exterior mirror and steering wheel settings are stored automatically on the car key when the vehicle is locked Personal position settings for the driver s seat exterior mirrors and the steering wheel can also be stored in the person buttons 2 and Tin the driver s door and retrieved at any time by pressing the buttons 40 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 1N Warning Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled activation of settings gt Do not activate the comfort memory button if there is any risk of the seat crushing the occupant gt Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any of the seat adjustment buttons gt Donotleave children in the vehicle unattended since they may depress the comfort setting button and crush themselves or another occupant Passenger s door memory buttons comfort memory Comfort memory On vehicles with the comfort memory package different vehicle settings such as the multi function display are stored on the car key and the person buttons I and in the driver s door in addition to the driver memory settings Personal position settings for the passenger seat can be stored on the person buttons fl and 2 in the passenger s door The passenger seat settings are not stored on the car key Preventing automatic storage of settings on car key Deactivating automatic storage gt Press the button OFF before leaving the vehicle The indicator light on the button lights up
217. f a mixture of air and fuel Depending on whether a car is driven fast or slowly or whether the engine is cold or hot some of the fuel hydrocarbons may not be burned completely but may be discharged into the engine crankcase or exhaust system Additonal hydrocarbons may enter the atmosphere through evaporation of fuel from the fuel tank These hydrocarbons HC when released into the air contribute to undesirable pollution In addition carbon monoxide CO and oxides of nitrogen NOx contribute to engine emissions They too are formed during the combustion process and discharged into the exhaust system To reduce these pollutants your Porsche Is equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection system to assure a finely balanced air fuel mixture under all operating conditions Oxygen sensor The oxygen sensor installed in the exhaust pipe continuously senses the oxygen content of the exhaust and signals the information to an electronic control unit The control unit corrects the air fuel ratio so the engine always receives an accurately metered air fuel mixture Crankcase ventilation Through crankcase ventilation undesirable emissions from the engine crankcase are not permitted to reach the outside atmosphere These emissions are recirculated from the crankcase to the air intake system From here the emissions mix with the intake air and are later burned in the engine Catalytic converters The catalytic convert
218. f flat bed Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension tie down straps Carefully feed towing straps through the opening in the front wheels Make sure metal parts of straps do not damage rim Make sure the strap Is flat over the rim bead Make sure brake backing plate is not damaged 5 Secure straps to front of flat bed Release tension on hoist cable but do not disconnect Use hoist cable as safety cable Transporting the vehicle on car trains ferries and car transporters Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels Deactivate interior surveillance and the inclination sensor Please see the chapter ALARM SYSTEM AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING on page 247 Tow starting push starting 4 Caution Do not attempt to push start or tow start the vehicle under any circumstances Vehicles equipped with PDK cannot be started by these means Serious transmission damage will result if the attempt is made to push start or tow start Panamera vehicles equipped with the PDK transmission Fire Extinguisher In cars with a fire extinguisher the extinguisher is located under the passenger seat gt To remove the fire extinguisher in case of an emergency hold the extinguisher with one hand and press the button PRESS on the fire extinguisher holder with the other hand arrow Notes gt Check the final inspection date on the fire extinguisher If the fire extinguisher is used after it
219. f power windows With ignition switched on A maximum of 10 minutes after the ignition is switched off but only until driver s or passenger door is first opened The one touch operation for closing the door windows is available only when the ignition is Switched on A Power window in driver s door B Power window in passenger s door C Left rear power window D Right rear power window Opening closing windows Opening window with the rocker switch gt Press rocker switch A B C or D until the window has reached the desired position Closing window with the rocker switch gt Pull rocker switch A B C or D until the window has reached the desired position Power window switch in the passenger s door Note on operation The rocker switches have a two stage function f the switch in question is moved to the first setting the window is opened or closed manually f the switch is moved completely to the second setting the front window is opened or closed automatically one touch operation Actuate the switch again to stop the window in the desired position Power window switch in the rear door Note on operation If a window is blocked during closing it will stop and open again by several inches If the window is blocked a second time within approximately 10 seconds one touch operation is disabled for this window The window can be closed manually The window then closes
220. ff For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Possible causes Defect in the battery charging system Broken drive belt Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 1 13 Warning Risk of accidents and risk of engine damage A broken drive belt means there is no power assistance to the steering more effort is required to steer and engine cooling fails gt Do not continue driving gt Have the fault corrected gt Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Danger of steering assistance failing during a long journey in water if the drive belt slips gt f steering assistance fails more effort will be required to steer 1 14 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Check Engine Emission Control E Warning light The emission control system detects malfunctions that could cause increased pollutant emissions or consequential damage etc well in advance Faults are indicated by the warning light on the instrument panel which then either lights up continuously or flashes The faults are recorded in the control unit s fault memory The warning light on the instrument panel lights up when the ignition is switched on as a lamp check and
221. firm 2 Select the desired zoom setting and confirm Displaying current location or destination You can view the navigation destination or current vehicle position on an enlarged section of the map 1 Select gt Map 2 Show destination or Show position and confirm Phone In the Phone main menu you can retrieve telephone numbers stored in the phonebook or in lists of most recently dialled or received calls 1 Select gt Phone and confirm Dialling telephone number 1 Select gt Phone 2 Phonebook or Previous calls or Received calls and confirm 3 Select the desired telephone number and confirm Answering calls 1 Select gt Phone 2 Select Answer and confirm Rejecting calls 1 Select gt Phone 2 Reject and confirm Ending a call 1 Select gt Phone 2 End call and confirm Making multiple calls simultaneously During an active telephone conversation you have the option of starting another telephone conversation You can have a separate conversation with the person you have called or alternatively start a conference call together with the other caller Making additional calls During a current call 1 Select gt Phone 2 New call and confirm Switching between callers 1 Select gt Phone 2 Swap and confirm Adding a caller to a co
222. for vehicles with comfort memory For information on modifying the opening and locking settings gt Please see the chapter LOCKING SETTINGS on page 145 Front central locking button d Locking doors gt Press the front or rear central locking button When the ignition is switched on the indicator light in the button lights up All vehicle doors will be locked The doors can be opened from inside by pulling once on the front door opener or by pulling twice on the rear door opener m k B E T YI Rear central locking button Automatic with Auto Lock If this function is activated the vehicle is locked automatically when a speed of approximately 2 mph 5 km h is exceeded For information on modifying the opening and locking settings gt Please see the chapter LOCKING SETTINGS on page 145 Opening and Locking 31 lt Unlocking doors gt Press the front or rear central locking button The indicator light on the button goes out All vehicle doors will be unlocked Automatic with Auto Unlock The vehicle is automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed Note on operation lf the vehicle was locked by remote control or with the key it cannot be unlocked with the central locking button Opening doors Opening unlocked doors gt Pull door opener arrow once Opening locked doors gt Pull once on the front door opener arrow or twice on the rear door op
223. fort tire pressures are included in the technical data or under Fill info in the Tire pressure menu you can compare the pressure differences e g 4 4 psi 0 3 bar with the Comfort pressures For tires that have not yet been learned the new required tire pressures are displayed instead of the actual tire pressures For information on learning the tires gt Please see the chapter SYSTEM LEARNING on page 134 1 Caution Tires are inflated to comfort pressure at the factory which is not suitable for driving at very high speeds 593 813 aa Ne ee 5 a anG SWR3 Tire Pressure too low for speeds greater 100 mph K Comfort pressure speed warning If the maximum speed of the preset comfort pressure is exceeded a warning message appears on the multi function display 1 Warning Risk of accident when exceeding the maximum speed Driving at excessive speeds when the comfort pressure is active will destroy the tires gt Never exceed the speed specified on the warning message gt Always set the standard tire pressure when driving at higher speeds Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 131 Selecting settings in the Tire pressure menu type and size of fitted tire 1 Warning Risk of accident due to excessive speed This could lead to serious personal injury or death gt Always observe the permissible maximum speed of the respective tire gt Exceedi
224. ggage Compartment The maximum permissible load on the loadspace floor in the luggage compartment is 200 kg The weight must be distributed evenly over the entire luggage compartment floor For information on stowing loads and luggage gt Please see the chapter STOWING LOADS on page 228 Opening closing the luggage compartment floor gt Fold the luggage compartment floor up or down using the handle arrow Tie down rings The load can be secured in the luggage compartment to prevent it from slipping by fastening tie down straps to the tie down rings gt Make sure that all rings are equally loaded when securing a load Note on operation The tie down rings are not designed to restrain a heavy load in an accident Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 227 Stowing Loads 1 Danger Danger of injury An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load can slip out of place or endanger the vehicle occupants during braking direction changes or in accidents Never transport objects that are not secured gt Always transport loads in the luggage compartment never in the passenger compartment e g on or in front of the seats gt Support the load against the seat backrests wherever possible Always lock the backrests into place gt Only transport heavy objects with the rear seat backrests upright and engaged gt Place the load behind unoccupied seats whenever possible gt Sto
225. gnition lock Two tone horns PSM Starter relay Emergency flasher switch LED lgnition lock lighting Power steering control valves Right hand drive vehicles only Turn signal rear left Marker light front right Low beam headlight left High beam headlight left Cornering light front right Engine compartment lid light Shutter elements right left Active brake ventilation open closed Heatable washer jets Engine compartment lid Headlight beam adjustment Right hand drive vehicles only Steering column lock Filler flap closed open Windshield washer pump front rear 36 RHD headlight cleaning system 3 37 38 9 IPSM control unit 40 LHD central locking for front rear 10 right door Alarm horn Not used sd 45 Not used ae Notused Sd 47 Ft pum controli 28 Rom motore ams 15 Diagnostic socket Eg RHD central locking for front right door RHD steering column lock 53 Not used Notwsed ooo Saos 55 Not used Not used msa oo Fuse and relay carriers in the luggage compartment No FusecamierA A aous o pido ampifer ASK Sound Bose 25 Audio amplifier ASK Sound Bose 25 E Differential lock Differential lock Subwoofer ose Burmester 30 o Ponente A Minor Repairs 301 Relay carrier C eated rear window H Filler flap open Not used Retract extend rear spoiler ier Tao ae Rear fog light left Sun blind 3 Spoiler flap Turbo 4 Spoiler flap Turbo Br
226. goes out approx 1 second after the engine Starts The warning light on the instrument panel flashes to indicate operating states e g engine misfiring which may cause damage to certain parts of the emission control system gt In this case immediately reduce the engine load by easing off the accelerator pedal In order to avoid consequential damage to the engine or the exhaust gas cleaning system e g catalytic converter gt Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools 1N Caution Risk of damage If the warning light on the instrument panel continues flashing even when you have eased off the accelerator pedal the emission control system may overheat gt Stop as soon as possible in a safe place Make sure that combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves cannot come into contact with the hot exhaust system gt Switch off the engine gt Have the fault corrected Acoustic Signals A speaker in the instrument panel generates acoustic signals If the speaker is faulty a warning will appear and the speaker will no longer make an acoustic signal i e Sound gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Operating the Multi Function Display in the Instrument Panel On the multifunction display you can view inform
227. greater risks with your safety The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be overcome even with PTM or four wheel drive Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed cannot be reduced by PTM or four wheel drive 202 Driving and Driving Safety Advantages of PTM Clearly perceptible improvement in traction driving stability and steering ability of the vehicle Vehicle is more manageable when driven at its performance limits Improved straight ahead tracking and greater Stability More sporty vehicle setup while making full use of all the advantages of four wheel drive ASR and ABD further enhance traction for all wheels For information on ASR and ABD gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE STABILITY MANAGEMENT PSM on page 202 Porsche Stability Management PSM PSM is an active control system for stabilisation of the vehicle during extreme driving maneuvers It operates together with the Porsche Traction Management PTM system provided the vehicle is fitted with the relevant equipment PSM makes use of both the ABD and ASR systems as well as the known functions of the anti lock brake system ABS and engine drag torque control system MSR 1 Warning In spite of the advantages of PSM it is still the driver s responsibility to adapt his driving style and maneuvers in line with road and weather conditions as well as the traffic situation The increased safety that is
228. h could result from loss of control of the vehicle gt Never remove the key from the steering lock while you are driving To protect your vehicle and your possessions from theft you should always proceed as follows when leaving your vehicle gt Close windows gt Close slide tilt roof gt Remove ignition key switch ignition off in vehicles that have Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Engage steering lock gt Remove valuables e g car documents radio control module cell phones house keys from the car gt Lock doors gt Lock the glove compartment gt Close storage trays gt Cover luggage compartment with the luggage compartment cover gt Close rear lid Notes on the Key and Central Locking System Key You are provided with two vehicle keys with integrated emergency key These keys operate all the locks on your vehicle gt Be careful with your vehicle keys do not part with them except under exceptional circumstances gt Remove and take the ignition key with you even if leaving the vehicle only briefly Do not leave the ignition key in the vehicle gt Inform your insurance company of any loss or theft of car keys or if extra or replacement keys have been cut gt Third parties can still operate the mechanical locks with a lost key Note on operation Different vehicle settings are stored on the respec tive key when the vehicle is locked provided the vehicle is fitted wi
229. handling and tire life Only the specified weights may be used for wheel balancing Minor Repairs 285 Self adhesive weights must not come into contact with cleaning agents since they could drop off Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance In this event the vehicle should be checked at an authorized Porsche dealer 4 Danger If during a trip uneven running or vibrations occur that could be caused by damage to tires or the car the speed must be reduced immediately but without braking sharply If you continue your trip without having the cause of the fault remedied you might lose control of your vehicle which could cause serious personal injury or death gt Stop the vehicle and check the tires gt lf no cause for the fault can be found drive carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche dealer 286 Minor Repairs Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM sensors Before changing wheels make sure that the wheels are compatible with your vehicle s TPM gt Check this with your authorized Porsche dealer Removing and storing tires gt After changing adjust tire pressure and torque wheel bolts diagonally Please see the chapter CHANGING A WHEEL on page 291 gt Store tires in a cool and dry place Rotate periodically to avoid flat spots gt Avoid contact with fuel oil and grease Tires must always remain on the same side of the vehicle When wheels are removed the direction of ro
230. have been manufactured according to Porsche specifications and production requirements Tightening torque Tightening torque for wheel bolts 160 Nm 118 ftlb Security wheel bolts The adapter wrench socket for the security wheel bolts is stored in the tool tray under the luggage compartment floor gt If the wheels have to be removed at the workshop do not forget to hand over the socket for the security wheel bolts along with the car key gt To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti theft protection the adapter must be used between the wheel bolt and the wheel bolt wrench gt When positioning the wrench socket ensure that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel bolt 591 178 Flat Tire l Stop the vehicle as far away from the driving lane as possible The vehicle must be parked on a firm and flat surface offering adequate grip Switch emergency flasher on 3 Apply the parking brake Put the vehicle in 1st gear or move the PDK selector lever to position P 5 Straighten the front wheels 6 Remove the ignition key or the control unit on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive in order to lock the steering and prevent the engine from being started 7 Get all passengers to leave the vehicle Set up the warning triangle at a suitable distance Filling in tire sealant The tire sealant and compressor with pressure tester can be found in the tool tray under the
231. he middle Opening the rear cupholder Cupholder between the seats A cupholder is located in the storage tray in the center console between the rear seats gt Slide the lid sideways to the left or right at the handle recess gt Fold up the additional cupholder support to accommodate large cups containers Cupholder in the center console Cupholder in the large center console in the Another cupholder is located under the cover flap rear of the vehicle in the front of the rear center console A cupholder is located at the front of the large gt Press briefly on the cupholder lid The lid opens automatically center console or at the rear if the relevant vehicle equipment is fitted gt Press briefly on the cupholder lid The lid opens automatically Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 223 Emptying The ashtray insert snaps out and can be removed gt After emptying the ashtray replace the insert and push it down until it clicks into place w ih Ba z Da ai a ee _ ee q T lt lt se a Ga a e i e ih ee F p r r p af F Front Ashtray 1N Warning Danger of fire gt Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal as it could pose a fire hazard Opening 1 Press briefly on the ashtray lid The lid opens automatically 224 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 2 Press the front ashtray in
232. he same 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Air conditioning 2 Center cooler 3 Confirm selection Function is activated ioe Function is deactivated Switching automatic air recirculation mode on off You can configure the fresh air supply to adjust automatically to the air quality 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Air conditioning 2 Automatic air circ 3 Confirm selection Automatic air recirculation mode is activated Automatic air recirculation mode is deactivated Setting date and time The date and time displays on the vehicle can be adjusted individually Note On vehicles with Porsche Communication Management PCM the date and time are set automatically by satellite navigation signals GPS Some setting options may be temporarily unavailable depending on satellite signal reception 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Date Time and confirm Setting the time The time time format and time zone can be set in the Time menu 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Date Time gt Time and confirm Setting the time format Setting current time The time can be displayed in 12 hour or 24 hour The hours and minutes can be set individually format 1 Select 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Settings gt Date
233. he vehicle identification number of your car perforations as well as the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rating Tire pressure plate Tire pressure plate The plate is attached to the door sill area on the driver s side Vehicle data bank You will find the vehicle data bank in the Maintenance booklet It contains all important data about your vehicle Note The data bank cannot be re ordered if it is lost or damaged Tire Pressure and Technical Data 323 Engine Data Engine type At engine speed 6500 rpm 6500 rpm 6000 rpm Max torque 518 ftlb 700 Nm as per 80 1269 EEC Sree 370 tb 500 Nm loverboost 570 ftlb 770 Nm 2250 4500 rpm At engine speed 3500 5000 rpm 3500 5000 rpm overboost 2500 4000 rpm up to 1 6 quarts 621 miles up to 1 6 quarts 621 miles up to 1 6 quarts 621 miles anene oN consumption up to 1 5 1 1000 km up to 1 5 1 1000 km up to 1 5 1 1000 km Maximum permitted engine speed 6700 rpm 6700 rpm 6700 rpm Max engine output as per 80 1269 EEC 400 hp 294 kW 400 hp 294 kW 500 hp 368 kW 324 Tire Pressure and Technical Data Wheels Tires gt Approval of tire and wheel sizes is granted based on extensive testing Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you about the current approval status By fitting tires that have been approved by Porsche you can be sure that you have the best possible tires for your Porsche The load c
234. hen the engine starts lf the engine does not start subsequent starter operations will not be ended automatically Driving and Driving Safety 167 gt Do not warm up the engine when stationary Drive off immediately Avoid high revs and full throttle until the engine has reached operating temperature gt lf the vehicle battery power is too weak the engine can be started with jump leads For information on jump lead starting gt Please see the chapter EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY JUMP LEAD STARTING on page 306 Note on operation To ensure a good battery charge condition thereby ensuring that the battery will start the engine all electrical loads that are not required should be switched off when the ignition Is Switched on and when engine revs are low in traffic jams in city traffic or in queues 168 Driving and Driving Safety Stopping gt Only remove the ignition key when the vehicle is stationary gt Only switch the ignition off when the vehicle is Stationary as there is no power steering and brake booster assistance when the engine Is switched off gt When leaving the vehicle always remove the ignition key apply the electric parking brake and engage selector lever position P The control unit always remains in the ignition lock on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive 1N Warning Danger of injury Hot engine compartment components can burn skin on contact gt Before working on an
235. her levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 1N Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure resulting loss of control leading to serious personal injury or death Tire pressures 1 Danger Risk of accident Risk of serious personal injury or death Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control Furthermore low tire pressure increases rate of wear of the affected tires and cause damage gt Always use an accurate tire pressure gage when checking inflation pressures gt Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure listed on the tire sidewall Also refer to Technical data gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE PLATE on page 283 gt Cold tire inflation pressure means all tires must be cold ambient temperature maximum 68 F 20 C when adjusting the inflation pressure Avoid sunlight striking the tires before measuring cold pressures since the pressures would rise from temperature influence Minor Repairs 281 gt Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt and thus from leakage Always screw caps tightly down Replace missing caps immediately gt Use only plastic val
236. hicle may occur if you lift the vehicle improperly gt Never lift the verhicle at any other place than the jacking points gt Never lift the vehicle by the engine transmission or axles gt Do not damage any sensitive components in the vecinity of the jacking points Raising vehicles with a level control system Switch off the automatic level control system before driving onto a lifting platform or before raising the vehicle using a lifting platform trolley jack or standard jack Switching off level control The level control system can only be switched off when the vehicle is stationary To increase ground clearance the vehicle should be set to High Level before switching off level control gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE ACTIVE SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT PASM on page 208 1 Switch on ignition 2 Press and hold button lt gt for approx 10 seconds until the message Control off appears on the multi function display Switching on level control 1 Lower the vehicle 2 Switch on ignition 3 Press and hold button lt for approx 10 seconds until the message Control on appears on the multi function display Note Level control is switched on automatically at speeds of more than 4 mph 7 km h Changing a wheel 1 Danger Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death to you or to bystanders Before changing the wheel gt Ify
237. hicles in the same lane or cross traffic gt You must pay attention to your vehicle s position in relation to other objects and intervene as needed to ensure safe driving gt Always keep the direction of travel in your field of view 591 209 Radar sensor Adaptive cruise control uses a radar sensor located in the middle of the front apron Maintenance note gt Always keep the radar sensor clean and free of ice and snow to ensure that it is fully functional For car care instructions gt Please see the chapter CAR CARE INSTRUCTIONS on page 269 Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 8 in 20 cm between the radiator and your body This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter 1 Warning Risk of accidents Radar sensor vision can be impaired by rain snow ice or heavy spray Vehicles in front will not be detected properly or may not be detected at all gt Do notuse adaptive cruise control under these conditions Warning message Adaptive cruise control can be deactivated automatically if the radar sensor is very dirty or iced up obstructed in unfavorable weather conditions heavy rain or when driving through tunnels The message Fault ACC se
238. id high cornering speeds after the warning lights have come on gt Please see the chapter FUEL ECONOMY on page 264 To avoid permanent damage to the functionality of the catalytic converters and oxygen sensors use unleaded fuel only The engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel consumption if unleaded premium fuel with 98 RON 88 MON is used lf unleaded fuels with octane ratings of less than 98 RON 88 MON are used the engine s knock control automatically adapts the ignition timing Porsche recommends that you use fuel with at least 95 RON 85 MON in your vehicle The emission control system can be damaged in various ways e g fueling incorrectly shortage of fuel tow starting gt Please see the chapter HOW EMISSION CONTROL WORKS on page 263 Note on operation Information on the fuel quality can normally be found on the pump If this is not the case ask a fuel station attendant lf the recommended fuel is not available you can also use unleaded regular fuel 91 RON 82 5 MON in an emergency However this could reduce performance and increase fuel consumption gt Avoiding driving at full throttle In some countries the available fuel quality may not meet requirements and can result in coking around the inlet valve In this case the fuel may be mixed with the additive sold and recommended by Porsche after consulting a authorized Porsche dealer Porsche part number 00
239. ied with static or fluttering because of the characteristic of FM In a similar effect a fluttering noise is sometimes heard when driving along a tree lined road This static and fluttering can be reduced by adjusting the tone control for greater bass response until the disturbance has passed Multipath Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM direct and reflected signals may reach the antenna at the same time multipath and cancel each other out As avehicle moves through these electronic dead spots the listener may hear a momentary flutter or loss of reception Station swapping When two FM stations are close to each other and an electronic dead spot such as static or multipath area interrupts the original signal some times the stronger second signal will be selected automatically until the original one returns This swapping can also occur as you drive away from the selected station and approach another station of a stronger signal Driving and Driving Safety 189 COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO Compact disc player Caution To avoid damage to compact disc player and discs gt Use only compact discs labeled as shown having no dirt damage or warpage gt Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part of the player unit Do not insert any object other than a disc into the slot Remember there are no user serviceable parts inside the compact disc player gt Do not allow the disc to sustain any
240. ight Load Limit is the maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the vehicle This is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle This infor mation can be found on the tire pressure plate The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight The load rating is the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure The maximum load rating is the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of passengers from the load limit gt Never exceed the permissible limits 236 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 4 Danger Risk of personal injury or death Injuries are much more likely in an accident if persons ride in the cargo area gt Persons must ride only on the seats provided for this purpose gt Make sure that everybody fastens their safety belts Risk of loss of control damage to the vehicle and serious personal injury or death gt Never exceed the specified axle loads Overloading can shorten the service life of the tires and car as well as lead to dangerous vehicle reactions and long braking distances Damage due to overloading is not covered by the vehicle warranty GA Occupants Luggage Availa
241. immediately gt See a doctor immediately in the event of an allergic reaction gt lf sealant is swallowed thoroughly rinse out the mouth without delay and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting See a doctor immediately 7AMOOWS Filler bottle Filler hose Filler hose plug Valve turner Valve insert Tire valve Filling in sealant 1 Leave the object that caused the puncture in the tire 2 Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from the luggage compartment 3 Stick the sticker in the driver s field of vision 4 Shake filler bottle A 5 Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle The filler bottle is now open 6 Unscrew valve cap from the tire valve F 7 Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with valve turner D Keep the valve insert in a clean dry place 8 Remove plug C from the filler hose B 9 Push filler hose onto the tire valve 10 Hold the filler bottle higher than the level of the tire valve and squeeze it forcefully until the bottle is completely emptied into the tire 11 Pull filler hose off the tire valve 12 Twist the valve insert firmly into the tire valve using the valve turner 13 Connect the compressor to a vehicle plug socket and inflate the tire to at least 37 psi 2 5 bar lf this tire pressure cannot be reached the tire is too severely damaged You must not continue driving with this tire 14 Screw valve cap onto the tire valve 15 After dri
242. in speed as much as possible gt Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops gt Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower gears Shifting into a higher gear early without lugging the engine will help save fuel gt Prolonged warm up idling wastes gas Start the vehicle just before you are ready to drive Accelerate slowly and smoothly gt Switch off the engine if stationary for longer periods gt Any additional weight carried in the vehicle reduces fuel economy Always keep cargo to a minimum and remove all unnecessary items 264 Maintenance and Car Care gt Organize your trips to take in several errands in one trip gt All electrical accessories contribute to increased fuel consumption gt Only switch on the air conditioning when necessary gt Do not drive with the Roof Transport System mounted unless you need it The EPA estimated miles per gallon mpg is to be used for comparison purposes actual mileage may be different from the estimated mpg depending on your driving speed weather conditions and trip length Your actual highway mileage may be less than the estimated mpg gt Please observe all local and national speed limits Operating Your Porsche in other Countries Government regulations in the United States and Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission regulations and safety standards Therefore cars built for the U S and Canada differ from vehicles sold i
243. indow is switched on Heated Rear Window Exterior Mirror Heating Heated rear window exterior mirror heating is ready for operation when the ignition Is on Switching on gt Press button Qu The indicator light on the button lights up Depending on the outside temperature the heating switches off automatically after approx 5 to 20 minutes The heating can be switched back on by pressing the button again Windows and Slide Tilt Roof Power WINCOWS cccecccecceseaeeceeceeecuceaeeaeees 86 Slice AEG CO ace aceeec tee cceecte sete seeee eect 88 Windows and Slide Tilt Roof 85 Power Windows 1N Warning Risk of injury when closing the windows especially when windows close automatically gt Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured when the windows close gt Always remove ignition key when leaving the vehicle or switch ignition off on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive Always take the ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle Uninformed persons could injure themselves by operating the power windows gt In case of danger immediately release the button on the ignition key or the button in the door handle on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended Risk of an accident gt Do not put anything on or near the windows that may interfere with the driver s vision 86 Windows and Slide Tilt Roof Readiness for operation o
244. ing The closing operation is interrupted if closing of the tailgate is blocked by an obstacle A warning signal sounds and the tailgate opens again When the obstacle has been removed the tailgate can be closed by pressing the button in the tailgate trim panel Automatic stop in the event of unintentional tailgate movement lf the tailgate is moved too abruptly or lowers unaided immediately after opening e g due to the weight of snow an electrical mechanism brakes the tailgate and a series of brief warning signals sounds until the tailgate stops moving gt Bring the tailgate to rest for approx 1 second The braking function is deactivated 30 Opening and Locking Adjusting the opening height of the tailgate The opening height of the tailgate can be individually adjusted so that the tailgate does not collide with the garage ceiling for example On vehicles with level control the vehicle height changes according to the level control setting gt Always adjust the opening height with the vehicle at the highest level setting so that the tailgate cannot accidentally collide with the garage ceiling for example 1N Caution Risk of damage to the tailgate If the luggage compartment cover is not attached to the tailgate the tailgate continues to move slowly upwards beyond the automatic stop gt Only use the powerlift tailgate with the luggage compartment cover attached 1 Stand behind the vehicle and open
245. ing lug 1 Press the lower edge of the appropriate plastic cover into the bumper until the cover disengages 2 Pull cover out of the bumper and let it hang by its thread 3 Screw in towing lug A as far as it will go left hand thread and tighten hand tight Towing lug The towing lug is stored in the tool storage box under the luggage compartment floor 1N Caution Risk of damage to the vehicle gt Use the towing lug only for an emergency to remove the vehicle off the road The towing lug is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto the flat bed tractor or towing aparatus if the vehicle will roll freely Under no circumstances is the vehicle to be secured using the towing lug Removing the towing lug 1 Unscrew the towing lug A 2 Insert plastic cover at the lower edge of the opening 3 Fold the cover up and press on its upper edge to engage it in the bumper Minor Repairs 3 19 593 330 Pulling vehicle onto flat bed 1 Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat bed to reduce the angle of the pull 2 Reelin the hoist cable and check the underside of the vehicle for any interference 320 Minor Repairs Tying down vehicle on flat bed 1 Carefully feed towing straps through the opening in the rear wheels Make sure metal parts of straps do not damage rim Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead Make sure brake backing plate is not damaged Secure straps to rear o
246. ings gt Light Visibility gt Exterior lights and confirm 142 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Activating and deactivating automatic daytime driving lights The daytime driving lights can be switched on and off not available in Canada 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Exterior lights 2 Daytime light 3 Confirm selection Daytime driving lights are deactivated Daytime driving lights are activated Adjusting off delay for Welcome Home and Entry functions The off delay of the Welcome Home and Entry functions can be adapted individually 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Exterior lights 2 Fade out and confirm 3 Set desired off delay and confirm Adjusting interior lights Interior light functions on the vehicle can be adapted individually in the Interior lights menu 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Interior lights and confirm Adjusting brightness of orientation lighting The brightness of the orientation lighting can be adapted individually 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Interior lights 2 Amb light and confirm 3 Adjust to the desired brightness and confirm Setting interior lighting off delay The off
247. int damage gt Have minor paint damage cracks scratches or stone damage repaired immediately before corrosion begins Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools lf traces of corrosion have already formed these must be thoroughly removed An anti corrosion primer must then be applied to these spots followed by top coat paint 212 Maintenance and Car Care Paint data can be found on the vehicle data carrier gt Please see the chapter VEHICLE DATA BANK on page 323 Cleaning the engine compartment 1N Caution Risk of damage e g to the alternator painted surfaces and the valve covers gt Never use high pressure cleaners with a round jet nozzle gt Always observe a minimum distance of 20 in 50 cm gt Always cover the lid of the brake fluid reservoir prior to cleaning with a high pressure cleaner Never point the cleaning jet directly at the lid gt Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of the aforementioned components Note on operation lf the vehicle is driven frequently on salted or gritted roads gt Have the engine compartment cleaned regularly Cleaning windows gt Clean all windows regularly inside and out with window cleaner We recommend Porsche window cleaner gt Do not use the same chamois for painted su
248. ion E EENE EEE 191 D a Se ae eee 191 fa ON an cea dnt use E nissan E ate E 191 Dynamic cornering light eee Tne nae 94 E Electric parking brake Automatic parking brake release on driving Of oes sacs tenes teeta hatter dee aes ed Emergency braking function Sarre cre Ree er ore 171 Operating oec ee ee 171 ROIS ASING a secon Pee ere ae ail Testing on brake test stand eee eae re ae 2 5 5 WANN GML arsaxtecrsevueanecnacs ene ere eee 171 Emergency flasher Switching emergency flasher a PE EE R ST Emergenc ke a T 2 Emergency operation Of ignition key in ignition lOCK cceeesseeeeeeees 166 Emergency unlocking Ot ailer idan eenmenen A eeeneer cena arate omen ne mennne do Of slide tilt roof ceceeeeees ees fees TRR 89 S e ee aero erences arnrarnectnet eer eee 35 Emission control Check Engine Functional description ccecce LIA Warning light on the tachometer 00 0e 114 Emission Control System cc cccccceeees ER R 262 Engine B q s 11 6 0 1 see ene eet Acne ee ern eke eee 6 Checking Oil leVel cccccccseesseceeeessseteees ce 121 Cooling SY SECM cco usattevntisceee eve etnedsineoun sete 110 Oihevel gauge pameneeee oan aee eee crele rier eee RS 121 334 Index E E E E T E 4 Starting automatically Auto Start Stop function 169 Starting manually Auto Start Stop function 169 STOPPING teree erene aaa LOS Stopping automatically Auto Start Stop N
249. ires front axle rear axle 255 40 R 20 101V XL 285 35 R 20 104V XL 255 40 R 20 101V XL 285 35 R 20 104V XL Tire Pressure and Technical Data 325 1 Danger Installation of sizes not authorized by Porsche may have a dangerous effect on the driving stability and could result in serious personal injury or death gt Before mounting new tires check with your Porsche dealer about the current release status Tire Pressure for Cold Tires 68 F 20 C These standard and comfort tire pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche Standard tire pressure for summer winter and all season tires Panamera S Panamera 4S Panamera Turbo Part aH 2 Part load Full load Ee FA RA FA RA ame ae i eee gt 43 psi a a a e a rr 37 psi 37 psi 37 psi 43 psi 40 psi 37 psi 40 psi 40 psi meee 2 5 bar 2 5 bar 2 5 bar 2 9 bar 2 7 bar 2 5 bar 2 7 bar 2 7 bar F 40 psi 37 psi 4 psi 44 psi 43 psi 37 psi 44 psi 44 psi Seas 2 7 bar 2 5 bar 2 8 bar 3 0 bar 2 9 bar 2 5 bar 3 0 bar 3 0 bar gt The load condition of the vehicle must be set on the multi function display The tire pressure must be changed according to the vehicle load Please see the chapter SELECTING CHARGE IN THE TIRE PRESSURE MENU on page 130 FA front axle RA rear axle 326 Tire Pressure and Technical Data Comfort tire pressure for summer snow and all seas
250. is switched off 16 minutes after the engine stops to preserve the vehicle battery In daylight conditions interior lights that were switched on manually are switched off automatically after 1 minute Ambient lighting lf the vehicle is driven at night a discreet light provides subtle illumination for the passenger compartment The ambient lighting is switched off automatically when the vehicle is locked Switching ambient lighting on and off gt Press button B Dimming brightness adjustment gt Press button B for dimming the ambient lighting and hold for at least 1 second until the desired level of brightness is reached 100 Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers Brief Overview Windshield Wipers This brief overview does not replace the information provided under WINDSHIELD WIPER WASHER STALK Warnings in particular are not replaced by this brief overview What do I want to do Wipe automatically at front rain sensor intermittent operation Adjust the rain sensor wipe interval Wipe at front Spray and wipe at front Wipe at rear intermittent wiping Wipe at rear wipe once Switches for wiping interval A and rear wiper B Windshield wiper stalk What do I have to do Press the stalk to detent position 1 Adjust switch A on the right of the stalk upwards wipe more often or downwards wipe less often Slow Press the stalk to detent position 2 Fast Press the stalk
251. isplay contents Time Temperature Date amp temp Hiding and showing upshift prompt indicator You have the option of displaying an upshift prompt indicator in the digital speedometer inside the tachometer to indicate the ideal gear changing points when changing gear manually with the Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK transmission or on vehicles with a manual transmission and encourage a more fuel efficient driving style 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Display 2 Shift request 3 Confirm selection Upshift prompt is displayed a Upshift prompt is hidden Adjusting display brightness The brightness of the multi function display can be adjusted to suit individual requirements 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Display 2 Brightness and confirm 3 Adjust to the desired display brightness and confirm Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 141 Light and visibility settings The exterior lights interior lighting and visual aids for reversing the vehicle can be adapted individually 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility and confirm Adjusting exterior lights You can adapt the exterior light functions on the vehicle e g daytime driving light mode and off delays of the Welcome Home and Entry functions in the Exterior lights menu 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Sett
252. istribution characteristics of the low beam change if the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than approx 80 mph 130 km h in darkness The light beam becomes longer and the field of vision increases Rain function The low beam is switched on automatically after five seconds of continuous wiper operation If the wipers have not been used for approx 4 minutes the low beam is switched off Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 93 Automatic headlight levelling When the ignition and low beam are switched on the level of the headlight beam automatically changes in accordance with the vehicle load The level of the headlight beam is automatically kept constant during acceleration and braking Note on operation Automatic headlight levelling is also available when the light switch is set to the position D low beam driving light 94 Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers Daytime driving lights lf the light switch is in position light switched off the daytime driving lights are switched on automatically when the ignition is switched on If the light switch is in position AUTO the daytime driving lights are switched on automatically during daylight when the ignition is switched on If the light switch is in position O low beam driving light the daytime driving lights are not active You can switch the daytime driving lights on and off on the multifunction display in the instrument panel no
253. it 2 and confirm 3 Select Active 4 Confirm selection Limit is active af Limit is not active Adjusting vehicle settings Various settings can be modified in the Vehicle submenu For information on modifying vehicle settings gt Please see the chapter VEHICLE SETTINGS ON THE MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY on page 138 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings and confirm Selecting radio station or track In the Audio main menu you can select a radio station either from the station list or the list of stored stations depending on the settings or a track from the active audio source e g disc 1 Select gt Audio and confirm 2 Select the desired radio station or track and confirm For information on adjusting audio menu settings gt Please see the chapter ADAPTING DISPLAY CONTENTS OF AUDIO MAIN MENU on page 139 Entering navigation destinations starting route guidance and retrieving navigation information In the Navigation main menu you can enter a navigation destination start route guidance and view the navigation information for an active route 1 Select gt Navigation and confirm Entering navigation destination You can enter a navigation destination in the multi function display Only navigation destinations from the list of previous destinations or from the list of preset POls or stored destinations can be selected
254. ith the engine on and the car not moving California Proposition 65 Warning 1 Warning Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc tive harm Hot Exhaust Pipes 1N Warning Risk of burn injury when standing near or coming into contact with the exhaust pipe The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is turned off gt To prevent injury make a point of noting where your vehicle s exhaust pipe is avoid placing your legs near the exhaust pipe when loading and unloading cargo in the rear and closely supervise children around the vehicle during time when the exhaust pipe could be hot A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns Portable Fuel Containers 1 Danger Portable fuel containers may leak whether they are full or partially empty Fuel leaking from a portable container carried in your vehicle could in case of an accident cause a fire or explosion resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Never carry additional fuel in portable contai ners in your vehicle Ground Clearance
255. ith the engine stopped and ignition switched off gt Please see the chapter EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE on page 252 Maintenance and Car Care 255 1 Unscrew cap on oil filler opening 2 Top up engine oil according to the display on the multi function display One segment of the display corresponds to a top up quantity of approx 0 26 US quarts 0 25 liters 3 Carefully close cap of the oil filler opening After opening the hood the oil level can only be measured after driving for at least 6 miles 10 km 256 Maintenance and Car Care Oil change The engine oil has to be changed regularly at the intervals listed in your Maintenance Schedule gt Please see the chapter FILLING CAPACITIES on page 329 We recommend that you have the engine oil changed at your Porsche dealer who has the required oils and the necessary filling equipment If you suspect an oil leak in the engine have your dealer check it out immediately All current engine oils are compatible with each other i e when making an oil change it is not necessary to flush the engine if you wish to use a different brand or grade of oil Since however each brand of oil has a special composition you should if possible use the same oil brand if it becomes necessary to top up between oil changes Porsche engines have long intervals between oil changes You can make best use of these long oil change intervals
256. ity Maximum number of vehicle occupants including the driver B Vehicle load limit Is the maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the vehicle This is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle Please see the chapter LOADING INFORMATION on page 236 SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL The combined weight of occupants and cargo i never exceed Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais a embed n Genny FRONT AVANT Fn as ARRIERE XXX j8 XXXX MXRMMKAMMAK ARMA AAAS KRANAR ANE ei hoc Pohe AG D C Original tire size Size of tires mounted at the factory D Recommended cold tire inflation pressure These values are for cold tires 68 F 20 C Tire traction Warning When driving on wet or slushy roads a wedge of water may build up between the tires and the road This phenomenon is known as hydroplane and may cause partial or complete loss of traction vehicle control or stopping ability gt Reduce speed on wet surfaces to prevent this Tire life Tire life depends on various factors i e road surfaces traffic and weather conditions driving habits type of tires and tire care gt Inspect your tires for wear and damage before driving off If you notice uneven or substantial wear wheels might need alignment or tires Should be balanced or replaced
257. ive Unlocking the steering column automatically gt Turn the control unit out of ignition lock position O Locking the steering column automatically gt Open the driver s door with the ignition switched off Locking the steering column manually gt Once the ignition is switched off turn the control unit to ignition lock position 3 again and hold it there for 2 seconds The steering column locks with an audible click Theft Protection When leaving the vehicle always gt Close all door windows gt Close the slide tilt roof gt Remove the ignition key or switch ignition off on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Lock the glove box gt Close all storage compartments gt Remove valuables vehicle registration documents telephone and house keys from the vehicle gt Cover the luggage compartment with the retractable luggage compartment cover gt Close the tailgate gt Lock all doors Maintenance and Car Care Exercise Extreme Caution when Working ON your vehicle ea 252 Engine Ol aee ae cnc are enter eran Erne ernens 254 Checking Engine Oil Level ccccccceeeeeees 254 Topping Up Engine Oil eens 255 Checking Coolant Level and Adding Coolant esre ra a 257 eia 21 al U2 AAEE PEE E 258 Washer FIU eor sees 259 Power Steering cccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 260 Changing Air Cleaner cccccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeees 261 Changing Particle Filter 261 Wiper
258. ive benefits such as in low speed accidents or higher speed accidents where the vehicle decelerates over a longer time Since air bag deployment does not occur in all accidents this further emphasizes the need for you and your passengers to always wear Safety belts Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module This module will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and front passenger when the air bags and or belt tentioner are triggered Precondition for activating the restraint systems gt Ignition is switched on Advanced air bag Your vehicle is equipped with occupant sensing for the passenger s seat in accordance with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 Depending on the weight body positioning and shape acting on the passenger s seat the passenger s air bag will automatically be switched on and off Depending on the angle and force of impact the passenger s air bag which is switched on will be triggered during a collision Precondition for switching the passenger s air bag on and off depending on weight body positioning and shape gt Ignition is switched on 4 Danger Risk of serious personal injury or death due to the passenger air bag not triggering Improper handling of occupant sensing can unintentionally impair switching the passenger s air bag off and on If the weight on the passenger s seat is reduced significantly e g by supporting
259. jury gt Donotuse fuel kerosene naphtha nail polish remover or other volatile cleaning fluids They may be toxic flammable or hazardous in other ways Only use spot removing fluids in a well vented area gt Do not clean the underside of chassis fenders wheel covers etc without protecting your hands and arms as you may cut yourself on sharp edged metal parts Maintenance and Car Care 269 High pressure cleaning equipment 1 Warning High pressure cleaning equipment can damage the following components Tires Logos emblems decorative foils Painted surfaces Alternator valve covers ParkAssist sensors Radar sensor for adaptive cruise control Rearview camera gt Always read the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer gt Always cover the lid of the brake fluid reservoir prior to cleaning Never point the cleaning jet directly at the lid gt When cleaning with a flat jet nozzle or a so called dirt blaster maintain a minimum distance of 20 in 50 cm gt Never use high pressure cleaning equipment with a round jet nozzle A high pressure cleaning device fitted with a round nozzle will damage your vehicle The tires are particularly susceptible to damage gt Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of the aforementioned components 2 0 Maintenance and Car Care Decorative film 1N Caution Risk of damage due to separation of
260. k on your vehicle outdoors or in a well ventilated area Ensure that there are no open flames in the area of your vehicle at any time when fuel fumes might be present Be especially cautious of devices such as hot water heaters which ignite a flame intermittently Before working on any part in the engine compartment turn the engine off and let it cool down sufficiently Hot engine compartment components can burn skin on contact Be alert and cautious around the engine at all times while it is running If you have to work on the engine while it is running always put the parking brake on and put the PDK selector lever in position P or N In particular be very careful to ensure that items of clothing ties shirt sleeves etc jewelry long hair hand or fingers cannot get 2 8 Minor Repairs caught in the fan belts or other moving parts The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of the car The fans can start or continue running as a function of temperature even with the engine switched off Carry out work in these areas only with the engine off and exercise extreme caution Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ignition system When the ignition is on high voltage is present in all wires connected with the ignition system therefore exercise extreme caution when working on any part of the engine while the ignition is on or the engine is running Always support your car with safety stands if it is necess
261. ke system function Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disc brakes at the front and rear Both circuits function independently One brake circuit operates the front left and rear right wheel and the other operates the front right and rear left wheel lf one brake circuit has failed the other will still operate However you will notice an increased pedal travel when you apply the brakes Failure of one brake circuit will cause the stopping distance to increase 1N Warning Risk of an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death In the unlikely event of hydraulic failure of one brake circuit gt Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in that position A mechanical linkage activates the second circuit and you will be able to bring the vehicle to a stop gt After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it towed to the nearest authorized Porsche dealer for repair Brake system warning light You can check the functionality of the brake system warning light by switching the ignition to the On position position 1 and verifying that the warning light illuminates BRAKE Brake warning light USA Brake warning light Canada The warning light in the instrument panel lights up A message will be displayed on the multi function display of the instrument panel if the brake fluid level is too low o
262. kickdown function is active in selector lever positions D and M gt For optimum acceleration e g when overtaking press the accelerator pedal beyond the full throttle point kickdown The transmission shifts down depending on the speed of travel and engine speed Upshifts occur at the highest possible engine speeds M Manual selection mode The currently engaged gear Is retained when you change from D to M If you change from M to D the gear changing map Suitable for your current driving style is selected and the appropriate gear is selected The selector lever and the two shift buttons in the upper steering wheel spokes let you select the seven forward gears comfortably and reliably Shifting up gt Press the PDK selector lever or shift button on the steering wheel forward Driving and Driving Safety 197 592 294 Upshift prompt for fuel economy optimised driving The consumption oriented upshift indicator A in the tachometer at the right beside the digital speed display helps you to develop a fuel saving driving style The upshift indicator lights up prompting you to shift up to the next higher gear depending on the selected gear engine speed and accelerator pedal position The upshift indicator is only active when Sport or Sport Plus mode is switched off gt Change to the nexthigher gear when the upshift indicator lights up 198 Driving and Driving Safety Shifting down
263. kshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Manual mode When the ignition is on the rear spoiler can be extended and retracted manually using the button in the center console When the rear spoiler is in manual mode the indicator light on the button lights up The rear spoiler does not retract fully in manual mode Driving and Driving Safety 2 15 Extending the rear spoiler manually gt Press button briefly The rear spoiler extends to position A The indicator light on the button lights up The rear spoiler is in manual mode Retracting a manually extended rear spoiler gt when the vehicle is stationary Press and hold button until the rear spoiler has reached its end position The indicator light on the button goes out The rear spoiler is in automatic mode at speeds of up to approx 55 mph 90 km h Press button The rear spoiler retracts and the indicator light on the button goes out The rear spoiler is in automatic mode at speeds of more than approx 55 mph 90 km h Press button The rear spoiler remains extended and the indicator light on the button goes out The rear spoiler is in automatic mode 2 16 Driving and Driving Safety Sport Plus mode deactivated The rear spoiler extends automatically from position A to position B at approx 130 mph
264. l Note In the event of a fault in the automatic driving light assistant adaptive light system the warning light for the adaptive light system lights up in the instrument panel and a warning message appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel For information on indicator lights and warning lights on the instrument panel gt Please see the chapter INSTRUMENT PANEL USA MODELS on page 107 For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Low beam driving light lf the light switch is set to the position AUTO the low beam is switched on automatically in the following situations Dusk Darkness Driving through tunnels Rain Highway driving daytime driving lights deactivated When the low beam is switched on the indicator light on the speedometer lights up Note on operation Fog is not recognized gt Inthe event of fog the headlights must be switched on manually Highway function in daylight The low beam is switched on automatically at vehicle speeds of more than approx 90 mph 140 km h in daylight conditions and when daytime driving lights are deactivated lf the vehicle is travelling at speeds of less than approx 40 mph 65 km h the low beam switches off after a delay of approx 4 minutes if the external lighting conditions permit Highway function in darkness The d
265. l Z0 flashes Warning message on multi function display Example Fault Headlight control Headlights adapted for LHD RHD Wiper defective Tailgate Door open Also Doors engine compartment lid Launch Control activated Distance Please brake Fault ACC Fault ACC sensor System fault Fault Instrument cluster ParkAssist sound Meaning Action required Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Headlights have been changed for countries with left right hand traffic Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Close the tailgate Close door lid indicated Launch Control is activated Insufficient distance from vehicle in front Adjust your speed and driving style Have the fault on the adaptive Cruise Control corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Adaptive cruise control Sensor in the front of the vehicle may be covered with dirt snow ice or affected by adverse weather conditions One or more electrical systems may have failed Adjust your speed and driving style Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Turn signal tones acoustic warning and distance signals e g for ParkAssist are not available Please note this when parking Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop fa 1 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 16 Light in Warning message on multi function Meaning
266. l panel left air conditioned area A Air conditioning display left side 1 7 OH 0 A WN NU 8 9 10 11 12 AUTO mode left side automatic mode REST mode using engine residual heat Temperature left side Air quantity left side Air to windshield left side Air to center and side vents left side Air to footwell left side ront control panel right air conditioned area Air conditioning display right side AUTO mode right side automatic mode REAR mode adjusting rear air conditioned areas using the front contro panel 4 zone air conditioning Temperature right side Air quantity right side Air to windshield right side Air to central and side vents right side Air to footwell right side Front control panel general functions mogo T 0 AC mode air conditioning compressor on off AC MAX mode maximum cooling output Air recirculation mode MONO mode adopt driver s air conditioning settings for all air conditioned areas Defrosting the windshield Heated rear window door mirror heating Rear control panel 4 zone air conditioning Switching automatic mode on off The front and rear air conditioned areas can be switched to automatic mode independently of one another gt Press button AUTO for the relevant air conditioned area on the front or rear control panel The indicator light on the button and the AUTO indicator on the air conditioning
267. l was deactivated because ABS or PSM intervened as a control mechanism Electric parking brake Adaptive cruise control was deactivated because the electric parking brake was activated Selector position Adaptive cruise control was deactivated because the PDK selector lever is not in position D or manual position M Impossible while parked The required action is not possible because your vehicle is stationary e g when setting a desired speed Speed Adaptive cruise control was deactivated because the rpm limit of the engine was reached in manual position M of the PDK selector lever Gradient too steep The desired distance or the desired speed cannot be set because the gradient on the road is too steep Stationary object The action is not possible because a stationary object was detected ahead PSM off Adaptive cruise control is not available because PSM was switched off For information on Porsche Stability Management PSM gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE STABILITY MANAGEMENT PSM on page 202 General information Sport and Sport Plus mode Adaptive cruise control regulates your driving more dynamically in Sport and Sport Plus mode FET lds Traffic situations in which vehicles are not reliably detected The radar sensor for adaptive cruise control scans a narrow cone shaped area in front of your vehic
268. lated to the inflation pressure recommended by Porsche on the tire inflation pressure label For information on the tire inflation pressure label gt Please see the chapter TIRES AND WHEELS on page 280 As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPM that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale warning light when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability However the tire pressure must still be set manually on the wheel gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE FOR COLD TIRES 68 F 20 C on page 326 4 Danger Risk of serious personal injury or death Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases the risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control Furthermore low tire pressure increases rate of wear of the affected tires Please note that the Tire Pressure Monitoring is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the
269. lays keplicins ae pee es eer cele tne ern Bere er AN EIN 0 6 Remote control cc00 eee Ieee E PEE Changing DALEY ee cera 307 LOCKING vehicle door saree e a 2 Unlocking vehicle dO0r secc 23 Removing installing luggage compartment cover een 229 Replacement KeyS ccccccessssececeessessseeeeeeesssseaeeeeees oe 19 REST button Airconditioning Systemi eere are eaa J L Restraint systems for children Installing with LATCH a ere ees 56 LATCH restraint system scsnssconnccnvencnesavesdentsnsncennne 56 Prescribed installation direction depending on rar K 6 10 11 6 Reet meet ren eran tenn raya eyecare 53 Retractable rear spoiler Extending and retracting cccsssecessseeesssees LLD Operating principle cccceeseessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 214 Roll stabilisation Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control Mann PE ee lek PROUMUD WOMEN sree cect ee eee eee Roll up sunblind For rear window lowered automatically when ee ee 66 Raising lowering for rear ir side windows erate SLS Raising lowering for rear WINdOW esscccceenn 66 Roof load 0006 eee EE E ST 328 Roof transport System x ccieeicceecattseeeeemece cos Teen 232 Fitting basic carrie ossein e aiena anana 233 O E E a E O20 Weights eere etienne e aa 520 Running in NINES S E E E AE E A E E 6 S SAAE E an eee CCR E E 44 Adjusting belt ea ccccccccssssseceeseessssseeee pate ee Belt tensioner functional description eee 45 Bastenin e 46 G E eo sane
270. le gt Check tires for uneven wear and damage before driving off gt Remove imbedded material gt Replace worn or damaged tires immediately gt Keep oil fuel brake fluid etc away from tires gt Replace missing valve stem caps gt Keep tires inflated correctly gt Wash tires when washing the vehicle Also clean inner side of wheels gt Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels V Check wheel rims for corrosion V Remove road salt if driving in winter Tire damage puncture gt Please see the chapter HIGH PRESSURE CLEANING EQUIPMENT on page 270 1N Danger Risk of serious personal injury or death Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control Furthermore low tire pres sure increases rate of wear of the affected tires gt Check tires including sidewalls regularly for foreign bodies nicks cuts cracks and bulges gt Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if possible Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs gt In cases of doubt have the wheel particularly the inner side checked by an authorized Porsche dealer In case of tire damage where it is uncertain whether there Is a break in the ply with all its consequences or tire damage caused by thermal or mechanical overloading due to loss of pressure or any other prior damage we recommend that the tire be replaced for safety reaso
271. le Detection can be limited or unreliable depending on the traffic situation and the size of the vehicle in front The system may brake too late or unexpectedly Stationary vehicles are not detected The system is unable to react to them Tip on driving gt Drive with extreme care gt Slow down if necessary A Vehicles changing lanes cutting in If a vehicle is changing lanes or cutting in ahead of you in the same lane the vehicle will only be detected when it has moved completely into your lane B Vehicles with a small cross section narrow vehicles Narrow or small vehicles will not be detected or will be detected too late C Driving into and out of corners When driving into and out of corners vehicles will not be detected or will be detected too early or adaptive cruise control will react to vehicles in adjacent lanes Driving and Driving Safety 187 D Vehicles with large overhangs E Stationary vehicles H Warning The tail of the vehicle will not be detected A stationary vehicle that appears suddenly in the Risk of accidents Danger of collision with the correctly on vehicles with large overhangs detection field of the radar sensor e g after a stationary vehicle e g lumber trucks vehicle in front changes lanes will not be detected by the ACC gt Drive with extreme care Warning gt Slow down if necessary Risk of accidents Danger of collision with the vehicle in front gt
272. le animals or objects between the driver or passenger and the area into which the air bags inflate Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering wheel as is practical while still maintaining full vehicle control Always hold the steering wheel by the outer rim Never rest your hands on the air bag panel Always fasten seat belts because triggering of the air bag system depends on the force and angle of impact Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of the passenger seat These could impair the function of the air bags the seat belts and occupant sensing Do not hang objects e g jackets coats coat hangers over the backrest 48 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Always keep the lid of the door storage compartment closed Objects must not protrude out of the door storage compartment Do not add any additional coverings or stickers to the steering wheel or in the area of the passenger air bag side air bags knee air bags and head air bags Doing so may adversely affect the functioning of the air bag system or cause harm to the occupants if the air bag system should deploy No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not modify the seat coverings since such changes can block the seat mounted side air bag Do not attach additional cushions protective
273. le cannot be unlocked The remote control of the key may not function correctly due to radio waves also radio contact between remote control and vehicle in the case of Porsche Entry amp Drive fail due to a fault fail due to a flat key battery gt Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key in the door lock lf the vehicle was unlocked using the emergency key in the door lock only the driver s door can be opened In order to prevent the alarm system from being triggered switch the ignition on within 10 seconds of opening the door The vehicle cannot be locked This is recognizable by the fact that the emergency flasher does not flash and there is no locking noise The remote control of the key may not function correctly due to radio waves also radio contact between remote control and vehicle in the case of Porsche Entry amp Drive fail due to a fault fail due to a flat key battery gt Lock the vehicle using the emergency key in the door lock lf the central locking system is defective operating the lock cylinder in the driver s door will lock all functioning locking elements of the central locking system For information on locking the doors by means of the emergency operation gt Please see the chapter NOT ALL VEHICLE DOORS ARE LOCKED on page 36 gt Have faults in the central locking system repaired Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recomme
274. le function on off 60 Intenor SUIVCIIANC Oster aeaucertiin e E 249 Switching off with button in door handle POrschie Enty amp Dover a sens erences ye eens 248 Switching off with Car key cccscccesssstseeeeees 247 iPod interface installation POSITION 192 J Jump lead starting for flat battery ccccccseeesessseees 306 Jump lead starting external power SUDDIY cosseccecceesse roe 306 K Key Changing battery 224 4024 2stactinccaeeee ne Hewes 307 Emergency operation ignition lock 166 Locking vehicle WOOP E 24 Removing emergency key csesssscsseseeeeeeeeees 20 Replacement KeyS ccccccceececeeseessssseeeeeeeeteeseees 19 Unlocking vehicle door mee e a e a ZO KEYS A 19 Kickdown Porsche Doppelkupplung sseeeeeeeeeereeereeeeesennn 197 Index 335 L LAC FT Si SOM eaetee ener a anna a ene 56 POS COMING ics gec coc euensiagdacaccee E eiitiacasieds 56 Installing achild seata eere a a 0 Prescribed installation direction of child Seat E Me Be late G s tise E a tata q ee mm neil egy meen inaryseee 196 Leather care instructions A E ere er retin 275 Level control E E E E E a a 209 Warning message on nthe multi function display D 210 Light ee O Switching on Welcome Home function T 95 Switching on when entering the vehicle 95 Light switch AUO Sillyeltfo s Wemenaee teen terete mnnenemen ane erm naam mn eta nie OVE es eet aiaeentoeureun
275. le luggage compartment cover gt Disengage the retractable luggage compartment cover from the guides on the tailgate and carefully guide it back into the retractor roller Removing retractable luggage compartment cover with fold away rear roller blind gt Fold rear seat backrests forward 1 Press both release buttons A The buttons can be reached from the passenger compartment 2 Slide the movable end cap on the right side of the vehicle inwards 3 Remove the retractable cover holder by moving it towards the passenger compartment Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 229 Installing retractable luggage compartment cover with fold away rear roller blind gt ie Fold rear seat backrests forward Insert the retractable cover holder from the passenger compartment on the left side of the vehicle into the mounting point Slide the movable end cap inwards and insert it into the mounting point at the left The end caps will move out automatically The release buttons A must pop out perceptibly with an audible click Removing retractable luggage compartment cover without fold away rear roller blind Fold rear seat backrests forward Press the release button Slide the end cap inwards wW N e V Remove the retractable cover holder by moving it towards the passenger compartment 230 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System Installing retractable luggage
276. ling set Fordetecuve tires aree ae e 2 2 Tires Breaking in new tires TEE 6 Changing sssoeneeseerrssrennrerrrersrennsrrrrnrerrrnserrreee LIZ Damice a a T A Fixing a flat tire A AE E eee ee 293 General information eeaeee eenean eeen 280 mnscrnptiononradial tire 2 222 2e eee eects OO Replacing pce e ste tect arate decsnresteenaneenteva pieces LOD a E E S 325 S A a A E A A T 293 Setting type and S74 E eNO E ey E SAE E eee 288 ISAs E TA 325 Snow chains general information Presets eects 288 SITAR E eras asaqumwieecceats eee TEO 286 Tire press re plate e eene e a e OLS Tire pressure data psi bar cesssssseeseeeees 326 VANE E E T E 285 Winter tires general NNO a a Rive O E E E amp oe S eh enn E A Pee ane E 279 MORGUE lechnical data aara a E scare 324 Towing Screwing in towing IUG ccseseceeseesstteeeeeeeesees LO Towing lug in tool Kit aa 279 Tow tarine teomene aaeey nates aetna ney reo a E E E 321 GAC E E E E S EEE E E SOU Transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK 00 ccceeee 193 Transmission and chassis control ee Overview PTM PSM PASM PDCC 201 Transport on car trains ferries etc Securing the vehicle ceecee Pe 320 Switching off inclination Sensor ccecce 247 Trip counter BEIEN sare stewie E ieee E 112 Resetting eee tee eee Hague 112 Trip information josscrrepereaardoreacaartentacntdedusernee neces 126 Turn signal changing side turn signal light E ol
277. ll tale For further information on the tire pressure monitoring gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING TPM on page 127 When tires are warm the tire pressure Is increased gt Never let air out of hot tires This could cause the tire pressure to fall below the prescribed value Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to over heat and thus be damaged even invisibly Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subsequently correcting the tire pressure Overloading 1 Danger Risk of damage to vehicle parts loss of control and serious personal injury or death gt Do not overload your vehicle Be careful about the roof load gt Ifyou plan to load the vehicle first correct the tire pressure Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can be found on the tire pressure plate and in the chapter technical data gt Never exceed the specified axle load Overloading can shorten the service life of the tires and car as well as lead to dangerous vehicle reactions and long braking distances Damage due to overloading is not covered by the vehicle warranty Tire damage may also be caused by overloading and this damage is not covered by your tire warranty gt Please see the chapter LOADING INFORMA TION on page 236 593 334 XXX m m XXX vs XXX mph XXX kg Example of a tire pressure plate Tire Pressure plate Information on the tire pressure plate A Seating capac
278. losing the tailgate automatically and locking with Porsche Entry amp Drive Closing tailgate automatically Make sure that the load is not in the area of the tailgate when the tailgate is closed because otherwise the closing operation will be interrupted after contact with the load and the tailgate will open again gt Press the button A in the trim panel on the tailgate The tailgate is closed Close the tailgate automatically and lock with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Press the button B in the trim panel on the tailgate The tailgate is closed and the vehicle is locked In order to close and then lock the tailgate on the vehicle automatically the key must be located inthe rear area and outside the vehicle A warning message appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel if these conditions have not been met For information on warning messages on the multifunction display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 1 Warning Risk of being locked out of vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Do not leave the key in the vehicle lf locking button B is pressed after the tailgate has closed the vehicle is locked automatically lf the key is left in the vehicle the emergency flasher flashes once and a horn signal sounds Within approximately 30 seconds the tailgate can be opened again After 30 seconds have elapsed the vehicle can
279. ls gt Unfold mirrors manually Storing exterior mirror settings On vehicles with driver or comfort memory individual exterior mirror settings can be stored on the person buttons on the driver s side and on the car key For further information on retrieving and storing vehicle settings gt Please see the chapter STORING VEHICLE SETTINGS on page 40 Exterior mirror heating The exterior mirror heating is activated automatically when the heated rear window is Switched on while the engine is running For information on switching on the heated rear window gt Please see the chapter HEATED REAR WINDOW EXTERIOR MIRROR HEATING on page 84 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 59 Automatic anti dazzle exterior mirror The exterior mirrors change to anti dazzle position automatically in synchronisation with the interior mirror For information on the automatic anti dazzle function of the interior mirror gt Please see the chapter AUTOMATIC ANTI DAZZLE INTERIOR MIRROR on page 60 Swivelling down mirror glass as parking aid When reverse gear is engaged the mirror on the passenger s side swivels down slightly to show the curb area gt Please see the chapter SWIVELLING DOWN MIRROR GLASS AS PARKING AID on page 242 60 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Automatic anti dazzle interior mirror Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior mirror measure the incident light Th
280. ls from locking up when the vehicle is overrunning This is also the case for downshifts on a slippery road Switching off PSM Press button 3 for at least 1 second PSM is switched off after a short delay The indicator light on the button and the PSM OFF warning light on the instrument panel light up The warning PSM off appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel When you brake in the ABS control range the vehicle is stabilised even when PSM is switched off One sided spinning of the wheels is prevented even with PSM switched off PSM should always be switched on during normal driving However it may be a good idea to switch off PSM temporarily in exceptional situations Ona loose surface and in deep snow When rocking the vehicle free When using snow chains Tip on driving The vehicle retains its enhanced braking readiness through prefilling of the brake system even when PSM is switched off When PSM is switched off wheelspecific brake interventions and the anti slip control system ASR are also switched off The automatic brake differential ABD remains on Adaptive cruise control is deactivated when PSM is switched off When PSM is switched off the slip monitoring function of Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK is also deactivated Switching PSM back on gt Press button 3 PSM is active immediately The indicator light on the button and the PS
281. m the vehicle in front Driving and Driving Safety 183 Possible distance settings g Suitable for speedy driving in lines of 7 N traffic The time headway is 1 second This corresponds to 36 yd 33 meters at a speed of 75 mph 120 km h Suitable for driving comfortably in lines PN of traffic The time headway is 1 3 seconds This corresponds to 47 yd 43 meters at a speed of 75 mph 120 km h Preset distance EN Corresponds to the general recommendation of the road traffic safety regulation two seconds time headway The time headway is 1 8 seconds This corresponds to 66 yd 60 meters at a speed of 75 mph 120 km h Suitable for driving on country roads EN The time headway is 2 3 seconds This corresponds to 63 yd 58 meters at a speed of 56 mph 90 km h 184 Driving and Driving Safety Automatic braking to a stop If the vehicle in front stops adaptive cruise control will slow your vehicle down to a stop provided this is possible within the control limits of the system The display soo lights up on the instrument panel The vehicle is actively held at a stop For information on the HOLD function gt Please see the chapter HOLD FUNCTION DRIVE OFF ASSISTANT AND STANDSTILL MANAGEMENT on page 206 Note Depending on the traffic flow e g slow moving traffic stopping is initiated by a slow crawling phase which ends in vehicle standstill Caution Brake pedal feels
282. m discharging Start engine manually at the ignition Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop PDK transmission Selector lever may be positioned between two settings Properly engage selector lever PDK transmission Move selector lever to position P before removing key from ignition lock To stop and secure the vehicle move the selector lever to position P PDK transmission Engine can only be started in selector lever position P or N PDK transmission Apply the brake when starting Restricted gearshift comfort reverse gear fails Have the fault corrected immediately at a qualified specialist workshop No selector lever position is displayed on the instrument panel Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a stop It is not possible to continue driving Stop the vehicle immediately in a suitable place Read the instructions in the section Towing Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop Light in instrument panel ABS BRAKE flashes BRAKE Warning message on multi function Fault Transmission Gearbox temperature too high Press clutch Warning Brake fluid level Warning Brake force distribution ABS failure Brake pad worn Release electric parking brake Press brake pedal Fault Electric parking brake Meaning Action required Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist worksh
283. m permitted roof transport system load of 70 kg gt lf you are not using the roof transport system remove it completely from the vehicle in order to save fuel and reduce noise Front carrier long Rear carrier short Cover trims Torque wrench Roof channel protectors Key 7AMOOWS Fitting the roof transport system When fitting the roof transport system for the first time the front and rear carrier must be adjusted according to the width of the vehicle Roof channel protectors can also be secured to the vehicle when fitting the roof transport system for the first time These protectors make it easier to fit the roof transport system and protect the fastening recesses in the roof rails from damage 1 Open the cover flap on the roof rails 2 Unscrew plastic screws from the retaining threads gt Make sure not to lose the plastic screws Note When you have removed the roof transport system the plastic screws can be screwed back into the retaining threads to prevent dirt from getting into the threads 3 Position the long carrier A at the front and the short carrier B at the rear loosely on the fastening recesses gt Fastening screws on the carriers must not protrude underneath as this would damage the vehicle gt Make sure that the carriers are aligned in accordance with the specifications on the stickers on the underside of the carriers Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transpo
284. mount of oil the engine oil measurement may not show any drop in the oil level at all even after 600 miles 1000 km or more This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture making it appear that the oil level has not changed The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is driven at high speeds as on an expressway making it then appear that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds lf the conditions you drive your vehicle in are dusty humid or hot the frequency of the oil change intervals should be greater 254 Maintenance and Car Care lf the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed climatic conditions are warm and the load Is high the oil should be checked more frequently as driving conditions will determine the rate of oil consumption The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to lubricate and cool all of its moving parts Therefore the engine oil should be checked regularly and kept at the required level Make tt a habit to have the engine oil level checked with every refueling The oil pressure warning light is not an oil level indicator The oil pressure warning light indicates serious engine damage may be occuring when lit if engine rpm is above idle speed Checking Engine Oil Level gt Check the oil level on the multi function display at regular intervals before refuelling gt Please see the chapter OIL LEVEL DISPLAY AND MEASURE
285. n gt Press the relevant air distribution button again The indicator light on the button goes out or Press button AUTO for the relevant air conditioned area The indicator light on the button lights up Air quantity and distribution are controlled automatically and variations are compensated 80 Air Conditioning Air distribution in the rear air conditioned areas when MONO or REAR mode is activated 4 zone air conditioning lf the button Sj or Di is pressed on the front control panel air flows from the central and side vents in the rear of the vehicle If the button ZH is pressed on the front control panel air flows into the footwells in the rear of the vehicle For information on MONO mode gt Please see the chapter ACCEPTING SETTINGS FOR DRIVER S SIDE FOR THE ENTIRE VEHICLE on page 74 For information on REAR mode gt Please see the chapter ADJUSTING REAR AIR CONDITIONED AREAS WITH THE FRONT CONTROL PANEL REAR MODE 4 ZONE AIR CONDITIONING on page 81 Disabling control panel for rear air conditioned areas 4 zone air conditioning The power window buttons on the rear doors and the rear control panel on the center console can be deactivated by pressing the safety button in the keypad on the driver s door Switching child protection on off gt Press the safety button to switch child protection on and off The indicator light on the button lights up A lock symbol appea
286. n There are three possible operating states when adaptive cruise control is switched on Adaptive cruise control active Adaptive cruise control automatically regulates the speed and distance from the vehicle in front The status display A turns orange 182 Driving and Driving Safety Adaptive cruise control is ready Cruise control and distance control is inactive after pressing the brakes or interrupting by pressing the control stalk down position 3 OFF The desired speed that was stored and the desired distance that was set are retained The status display A turns grey Adaptive cruise control is active again after you release the accelerator For information on resuming cruise control and distance control gt Please see the chapter RESUMING CRUISE CONTROL AND DISTANCE CONTROL RESUME on page 185 Adaptive cruise control passive Cruise control and distance control is inactive after pressing the accelerator ACC passive appears on the multi function display The desired speed that was stored and the desired distance that was set are retained The status display A turns grey Adaptive cruise control is active again after you release the accelerator Setting and changing the desired speed Preconditions ACC is switched on Vehicle is moving No stationary objects are detected in front Setting the desired speed 1 Press the control stalk on the steering wheel forward position
287. n other countries If you plan to take your Porsche outside the continental limits of the United States or Canada there is the possibility that unleaded fuel may not be available unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating Excessive engine knock and serious damage to both engine and catalytic converters could result service may be inadequate due to lack of proper service facilities tools or diagnostic equipment replacement parts may not be available or very difficult to get Porsche cannot be responsible for the mechanical damage that could result because of inadequate fuel service or parts availability If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to bring it back home be sure to find out about Shipping and forwarding requirements as well as current import and customs regulations Fuel When the ignition is on the fuel level is displayed on the instrument panel gt Please see the chapter FUEL GAUGE on page 111 1N Warning Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to health gt Fire open flame and smoking are prohibited when handling fuel gt Avoid contact with skin or clothing since injury to your skin may occur gt Do not inhale fuel vapors since they may make you ill and possibly cause death if inhalation is prolonged and occurs in a closed space To prevent damage to the emission control system and engine gt Never drive the tank dry gt Avo
288. n the event of danger Make sure there is sufficient clearance behind and above the vehicle e g roof transport systems garage ceiling Acoustic indication during opening closing of the tailgate Opening and closing of the tailgate are indicated by warning tones You can have the warning tones activated deactivated at your authorized Porsche dealer Opening tailgate automatically There are three ways of opening the tailgate Variant 1 gt Use the unlocking handle arrow on the tailgate The vehicle must be unlocked for this Vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive need not be unlocked You simply have to carry the car key with you e g in your trouser pocket Opening and Locking 27 591 198 Variant 2 gt When the ignition is switched off press the button lt on the key for approximately 1 second lf the vehicle is locked either the driver s door or the entire vehicle will be unlocked depending on the settings in the multi function display For information on locking and unlocking settings in the multi function display gt Please see the chapter LOCKING SETTINGS on page 145 28 Opening and Locking Variant 3 gt With the ignition switched on press and hold the button in the driver s door until the tailgate has opened fully Opening Is interrupted if the button is released prematurely A Closing the tailgate automatically without Porsche Entry amp Drive A and B C
289. nce plate light instrument lighting daytime driving lights switched off ZD Low beam driving light Only with ignition on Q Rear fog light Pull the switch in the low beam position Indicator light lights up Note on operation lf the ignition key is removed and the door is opened while the lights are on an audible signal gong warns of possible battery discharge In some countries differences are possible due to legal requirements Automatic Driving Light Assistant Adaptive Light System The automatic driving light assistant is a comfort function Your Porsche s driving light low beam is switched on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness The automatic driving light assistant also controls the daytime driving lights the Automatic Coming Home lights and the dynamic cornering light The automatic driving light assistant is activated when the light switch is set to the position AUTO Despite possible support by the driving light assistant it is the responsibility of the driver to switch on the driving light using the conventional light switch in accordance with the relevant national regulations Activating the headlights using the driving light assistant therefore does not absolve the driver of responsibility for correct operation of the driving light 1N Warning Risk of accidents if you drive your vehicle without lights gt Always carefully monitor the automatic driving light contro
290. nd that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools 298 Minor Repairs A Fuse carrier B Fuse carrier C Relay carrier Opening fuse box and relay box cover in luggage compartment gt Open the luggage compartment floor and remove the tool storage box D Plastic gripper Opening fuse box cover at the left and right of the dashboard 1 Carefully lever off the plastic cover with a screwdriver arrow and remove it The positions of the fuses are shown on the inside of the cover 2 Carefully remove the fuses using the plastic gripper D gt Spare fuses can be found in both fuse box covers left 7 5 and 10 A right 20 and 25 A Fuse box in left side of dashboard No Designation A Steering column switch 7 5 Additional instrument Air conditioning front rear 6 Rearview camera 5 LHD electric parking brake button LHD central locking for rear left door 10 Ignition lock RHD central locking for left doors Two tone horns LHD steering column adjustment 15 PSM ES ES Starter relay LHD PDK control unit Power windows rear left Power windows front left 13 ParkAssist Xenon headlight left 15 Interior mirror LHD diagnostic socket LHD PDK control unit a 5 LHD central locking for front left door RHD mobile phone charger Turn signal rear right Marker light front left Low beam headlight right
291. nd that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Opening and Locking 35 Not all vehicle doors are locked The central locking system has failed The doors must be locked using the emergency operation function 1 Open the passenger s door 2 Unclip cover and remove 36 Opening and Locking 3 Turn the lock outward using the 7 Lock the driver s door with the emergency emergency key key in the door lock For information on the emergency key The doors can be opened from inside by pulling gt Please see the chapter EMERGENCY KEY on the door opener page 20 4 Fit the cover again 5 Repeat procedure at the rear doors 6 Close all doors Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints 38 Adjusting Front Seats sssssssssssssseseees 39 Storing Vehicle Settings ccccccccsccceceeeeeeees 40 Easy Entry Function scc cesteesccecasivenstannteaaedsten 42 Adjusting Rear Seats ssssssssssssssseeesees 42 Adjusting Passenger Seat From Rear 43 Front and Rear Heated Seats ccccccccecees 43 Front and Rear Seat Ventilation cccccee 44 dlen Be kl meena te Rs ee rer pee ete 44 Alr bag SYSTCMIS as ussazeserceveacetoosesvesaseassteseetenss 47 Child Restraint Systems e 52 LATCH Child Seat System c0cccseseeeees 56 Etero MITOS oo 58 St
292. ndows and Slide Tilt Roof 85 Power WINDOWS ci cicct epee enesvenentecbcterssaereeencsi 86 Slide Tit ROOT ccc cadsseattcesesecaescaieawecinaseccosees 88 Contents Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 00 1ss s000 Automatic Driving Light Assistant a OL Adaptive Light SyStem ccc0cccseseeeeeeeeeees 92 nsirument 1S ALIS eeraa 95 Turn Signal High Beam Headlight Frasher Stalk a 96 Emergency Flasher erriren 7 Interior LIERNE arraren rtest rian otamtotamiood 98 Brief Overview Windshield Wipers 101 Windshield Wiper Washer Stalk 0008 102 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 0000000002 105 Instrument Panel USA Models a 107 Instrument Panel Canada Models 109 Fea CHOMICUCD a aneen NEEE EEA 110 Speedometer ccecce LLO Multi Function Display ccccsessesessssssseeeeees 110 Engine Oil Temperature Gauge 00 110 Coolant Temperature Gauge 0000000ee 110 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge sseeeeeees 111 BEEE E A E E E E A Digital Speedometer ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeneeees 112 Upshift Prompt Indicator ecce 112 Glo 0 i ails eke tetera a il Reset Button for Trip Counter Display Brightness Setting for Instrument Lighting PDK Display for Selector Lever Position Engaged Gear ccssscceeesesssseesseteseseeereteeee LL 2 Battery Alternator cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 113 1
293. nference call 1 Select gt Phone 2 Conference and confirm Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 125 593 819 SWR3 Trip since 11 10 2 13 IER AL 220 reset bU mph Ride time Distance Range Speed 10 42 am 62 F Trip information In the Trip main menu you can retrieve and reset driving data 1 Select gt Trip 126 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Displaying driving data There are three driving data displays available Resetting driving data The selected driving data display can be reset 1 Select 1 Select gt Trip gt Trip 2 1 since or 2 Select the relevant driving data display 2 consecutive or and confirm 3 to destination 3 Select Reset and confirm and confirm Available driving data since Driving data since the last vehicle start The driving data is reset automatically once the vehicle has remained stationary for 2 hours with the ignition key removed consecutive Cumulative driving data The driving data is added continuously until a resetis performed The data is retained even if the ignition key is removed to destination Driving data up to navigation destination If route guidance is active the driving data is calculated and displayed up to the navigation destination Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inf
294. nforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Operating principle of adaptive cruise control No vehicle detected in front open road driving Adaptive cruise control operates like a cruise control system The desired speed that was set is maintained constantly Vehicle detected in front driving in traffic lf a vehicle travelling ahead of you in the same lane is detected as driving slower than the selected desired speed adaptive cruise control will automatically maintain a set distance from the vehicle in front lf the vehicle in front stops adaptive cruise control will slow your vehicle down to a stop provided this is possible within the control limits of the system Adaptive cruise control actively keeps your vehicle at a standstill If the vehicle in front drives off automatic speed control and distance control can be resumed Driving and Driving Safety 179 Override The speed of the vehicle can be increased at any time by pressing the accelerator lf the set ACC speed is exceeded the ACC is deactivated The message ACC passive will appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel The desired speed that was stored is retained After releasing the accelerator pedal the ACC accelerates to the desired speed if there is no vehicle in front and controls the distance if a vehicle in front is present For information on the ACC passive status gt Please see the chapter OPERATING STATES WHEN
295. ng Council octane rating or AKI antiknock index octane rating usually displayed on U S fuel pumps is calculated as research octane number plus motor octane number divided by 2 that is written as RON MON or R M 2 2 The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than the RON rating For example 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI Fuels containing ethanol Do not use any fuels containing more than 10 percent ethanol by volume We recommend however to change to a different fuel or station if any of the following problems occur with your vehicle Deterioration of driveability and performance Substantially reduced fuel economy Vapor lock and non start problems especially at high altitude or at high temperature Engine malfunction or stalling Fuel Evaporation Control Fuel tank venting The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister prevent fuel vapors from escaping to the atmosphere at extreme high outside temperatures when driving abruptly around curves and when the car is parked at an incline or in any other nonlevel position Vapor control system and storage When the fuel tank is filled vapors are collected in the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the vapors to the carbon canister where they are stored as long as the engine does not run Purge system When the engine is running the fuel vapors from the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the ambient air of the canister Thi
296. ng From Outside 22 Opening and Locking From Inside 31 Opening and Closing the Engine Compariment Eid eeen 33 Malfunctions When Opening and Closing 35 Opening and Locking 17 Never invite car theft An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock invites car theft A steering wheel lock and a gong alarm are standard equipment in your Porsche The gong alarm will sound if you open the driver s door while the key is still in the ignition lock It is your reminder to pull the key out of the ignition lock and to lock the doors 1N Warning Any uncontrolled movement of the vehicle may result in property damage serious personal injury or death Never leave your vehicle unattended with the key in the ignition lock especially if children and or pets are left unattended in the vehicle They can operate power windows and other controls If the engine is left running they may accidentally engage the shift lever Serious personal injury or death could result from loss of control of the vehicle gt Always remove the ignition key gt Always set the electric parking brake gt Lock the doors with the key or with the remote control 18 Opening and Locking 1 Warning Risk of a serious accident The steering column will lock when you remove the key while you are driving or as the car is rolling to a stop You will not be able to steer the car Serious personal injury or deat
297. ng compressor Information on air conditioning compressor 75 Air conditioning system Automatic load SWitch Off cccccccsssseeeessseeeeees 75 6 1 oll ole anne a NER ancien Memos E Defrosting windshield ee ee eee ae en eee Extended ventilation panel ccce 81 Front control panel EES 76 Functional seal Urea ercee os ae go Information on air conditioning OM le RNR RY 6 Rear control panel ccccceessseeeeees Reema eR Ff Setting air CISHADUNON a a 79 Setting air guantity mesere e e a nee 79 Setting automatic air recirculation mode 75 Setting temperature ee 78 Switching AC MAX mode on off rer nee nee 72 Switching AC mode on off nsen 71 Switching air conditioning compressor oy its eee Switching air recirculation mode on and off 74 Switching automatic mode on off 77 Switching MONO mode on off 00008 ee 74 Switching REST mode on off 7I Temperature sensor e aa a e 70 Using engine residual heat ccccccccceseesseeeeeees 71 Air recirculation button Air conditioning a Alarmi button e E r AS Alarm system Avoiding false alarms ccc citecc2 titscceactseesanesesecccceees 249 Functional AeSCription cccccccssssssseeeeeeesseeees 247 Persons animals remaining i in 1 the locked vehicle 247 Switching Olli ache eee A E 247 SWItCNING Oalah a trae aandensaesenin 247 Switching off interior surveillance and inclination SENSO cccccceescesste
298. ng maximum tire speed could result in a tire burst causing loss of control of the vehicle This could lead to serious personal injury or death Moreover Porsche recommends obeying all traffic laws at all times to maintain the safety of yourself and all vehicle occupants 1 Warning incomplete entries or selection of the wrong tires on the multi function display affect correct indication of warnings and messages gt The settings must be updated in the Tire pressure menu after changing a wheel filling with tire sealant or adding air after previous warning Tire pressure gt Please see the chapter RED WARNING TIRE PRESSURE on page 133 132 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display The new tire type and tire size must be selected even if the settings for the new set of wheels are the same as for the old wheels 1 Select gt Tire pressure 2 Adjust and confirm 3 Select Summer tires or Winter tires or All season and confirm 4 Select the tire size and confirm Available setting options 18 inch 19 inch 20 inch Tire selection has only been successfully completed when the following message appears on the multi function display example Summer tires 19 inch was set No monitoring system Is learning gt Please see the chapter SYSTEM LEARNING on page 134 Notes The message Action cancelled appea
299. ng wheel the underside of the instrument panel front seats roof pillars roof liners and the rear interior trim panels and around the seat backrest gt Have your authorized Porsche dealer to clean these components Cleaning fabric linings gt Fabric linings on pillars roofliner and sun blinds etc must be cleaned only using suitable cleaning agents or a suitable dry foam and a soft brush 2 6 Maintenance and Car Care Alcantara care Do not use leather care products to clean Alcantara For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover with a soft brush Strong abrasion or rubbing when cleaning will produce a lasting change to the surface Cleaning when lightly soiled gt Weta soft cloth with water or a neutral soap solution and wipe off the dirt Cleaning when heavily soiled gt Weta soft cloth with lukewarm water or diluted white spirit and dab the dirt from the outside in Cleaning the seat belts gt Use mild detergent to clean soiled belts gt When drying avoid direct sunlight gt Only use suitable cleaning agents gt Do not tint or bleach the belts The belt fabric could be weakened thus affecting safety Storing your Porsche If you wish to keep your Porsche off the road for a lengthy period we recommend that you contact your authorized Porsche dealer They will be glad to advise you about the necessary measures e g corrosion prevention care maintenance and storage Furthe
300. ning Risk of injury during braking rapid direction changes or in an accident gt Do not transport items of luggage or objects unsecured in the passenger compartment gt Do not transport any heavy objects in open Storage trays gt Always keep the covers of the storage trays closed while driving gt Always protect the passenger compartment with a luggage compartment cover Note on operation An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load can Slip out of place or endanger the vehicle occupants during braking direction changes or in accidents For information on stowing loads and luggage gt Please see the chapter STOWING LOADS on page 228 Storage options There are various storage options available depending on the vehicle equipment Glove box with pen and paper holder In the front and rear armrests In the door panels In the center console front and rear On the back of the front seat backrests Clothes hooks on the rear grab handles Under the luggage compartment floor In the front and rear cupholders 2 18 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 591 096 Glove box Warning Risk of injury by the glove box lid in case of an accident gt Keep the glove box closed while driving The glove box contains a drawer for storing the vehicle folder and a holder for clipping in a pen Opening gt Pull the latch handle and open the lid Closing gt Alwa
301. ning message will appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel if the engine oil temperature is too high gt Reduce engine speed and engine load immediately if the red zone is reached For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 E Coolant Temperature Gauge lf the cooling system is in any way faulty consult a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have the trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools for this type of work Pointer in the lower area engine cold gt Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loading Pointer in the middle normal operating temperature Pointer may move up to the red area when engine is heavily loaded and outside temperature is high Coolant temperature warning The temperature gauge warning light will illuminate if the coolant temperature Is too high The warning message Engine temperature too high will also appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel gt Switch off engine and allow to cool gt Check radiators and air guides in front end of vehicle for obstructions gt Check the coolant level Top up with coolant if necessary gt Have the fault corrected gt Please see the chapter CHECKING COOLANT LEVEL AND ADDING COOLANT on page 25
302. ns If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that the difference in tread depth on one axle must not exceed 30 Handling inconsistencies may result gt Perform a visual inspection if necessary Tire replacements gt Use only tire makes and types tested by Porsche If you do not use a Porsche recommended replacement tire make sure that you purchase your new tires from a reputable tire dealer and that the dealer complies with all manufacturers warnings for those tires Only tires with the same manufacturer and with the same specification code e g NO N1 should be mounted on the vehicle Before mounting new tires check with your Porsche dealer about the current release status Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle at the time Only tires of the same make and type must be used Mixed tires are not permissible and will affect vehicle performance safety and can affect vehicle warranty Porsche dealers can recommend the most current replacement tire options for your vehicle Initially new tires do not have their full traction You should therefore drive at moderate speeds during the first 60 120 miles 100 200 km Tires must always remain on the same side of the vehicle When wheels are removed the direction of rotation and position of each wheel should be marked If new tires are installed only on one axle a noticeable change in handling occurs due to the different
303. nsor will appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Notes This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may Cause undesired operation Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Porsche may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est co
304. nsported on a train or ship for example the interior surveillance system and inclination sensor must be switched off temporarily gt Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that the alarm system will be triggered if the door is opened Alarm System and Theft Protection 247 Using the car key gt Quickly press button 8 on the remote control twice The emergency flasher flashes slowly once The doors are locked but can be opened from the inside by pulling once on the front door opener or by pulling twice on the rear door opener 248 Alarm System and Theft Protection On vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Quickly press button A in the door handle twice The emergency flasher flashes slowly once The doors are locked but can be opened from the inside by pulling once on the front door opener or by pulling twice on the rear door opener Note on operation The interior surveillance system and inclination sensor remain switched off if The interior surveillance system and inclination sensor were switched off when you last locked the vehicle and the vehicle was locked automatically 30 seconds after unlocking because no door was opened P i Oe w Using the rocker switch The rocker switch to switch off the passenger compartment monitoring system is located next to the driver s seat l 2 Apply the electric parking brake Remove ignition key On vehicles with Porsche E
305. nstalled only using the LATCH system in the rear seats Use only child restraint systems with the LATCH system Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children recommended by Porsche These systems have been tested and adjusted to the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate child age groups Other systems have not been tested and could entail an increased risk of injury You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compatible at your authorized Porsche dealer Always observe the separate installation instructions for your child seat Using a LATCH child seat system Both of the rear seats are equipped with the LATCH system lower anchorage and anchor points for tether straps on the back of the backrests Markings on the right and left for the LATCH child seat anchorage can be found on the seat cushions of the rear seats The anchor bars A for the LATCH child seat anchorage can be found directly under the markings between backrest and seat cushion Child Restraint Anchorages gt Please see the chapter AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR on page 55 If your child restraint seat or seats require the use of a tether strap you will want to use the anchor points provided behind each rear seat s backrest To ensure proper installation see your authorized Porsche dealer Installing a LATCH child seat system gt Always observe the separate installation instructions for your child seat 1 Secure the child seat to
306. nt level when a warning message appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel 1N Warning Danger of serious personal injury or death from scalding Coolant is hazardous to your health and may be fatal if swallowed gt Do not open the cap of the expansion tank while the engine is hot gt Allow the engine to cool down before opening the cap and protect your hands arms and face from any possible escape of hot coolant gt Keep coolant out of children s reach gt Also keep coolant away from your pets They can be attracted to it should there be a spill or to used coolant left in an open container Coolant can be deadly to pets if consumed Maintenance and Car Care 257 1 If the engine is hot cover the reservoir cap with a cloth Open cap carefully and allow any overpressure to escape Then unscrew cap completely 2 Read off the engine coolant level Top up with coolant if necessary Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water in equal parts Antifreeze in coolant 50 provides antifreeze protection down to 31 F 35 C Do not top up over the plus marking 3 Screw the cap on the reservoir closed until it locks securely 4 Have the cooling system checked Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools 258 Maintenance and Car Care Mai
307. ntenance notes lf pure water is added in an emergency the mixing ratio will have to be corrected A significant loss of coolant indicates a leak in the cooling system gt The cause must be eliminated without delay Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Radiator fans The radiators and radiator fans are in the front of the vehicle 1N Warning Risk of injury The fans can start running when a certain temperature is reached even with the engine switched off gt Exercise extreme care when working close to the radiator fans and make sure the engine is switched off 591 229 Brake Fluid Regular checking of the brake fluid is part of servicing The fluid level should always be between the MIN and MAX markings A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is normal However if the fluid level falls significantly or goes below the MIN marking the brake system may have developed a leak gt Have the brake system checked immediately Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools 1N Warning Brake fluid is hazardous to your health and may be fatal
308. ntry amp Drive Switch off the ignition 3 Open the driver s door 4 Press the rocker switch The rocker switch symbol lights permanently Lock the vehicle Emergency flasher flashes twice and an acoustic signal will sound twice The vehicle doors the rear lid and the rear window are locked but the doors can be opened from the inside by pulling once on the front door opener or by pulling twice on the rear door opener gt Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that the alarm system will be triggered if the door is opened Note on operation lf the ignition is switched on after pressing the rocker switch the passenger compartment monitoring system Is activated again The symbol on the rocker switch will flash Activating the alarm system and the passenger compartment monitoring system gt Unlock the vehicle and lock it again Fault indication lf the monitoring system could not be deactivated the symbol on the rocker switch will flash e g the rocker switch is pressed with the ignition on For deactivating the passenger compartment monitoring gt Switch off ignition gt Press the rocker switch gt Lock the vehicle B Indicator light for alarm system example driver s door Function indication The locking condition of the vehicle is indicated by the indicator lights B in the front doors flashing at different frequencies The indicator lights go out when the vehicle is unlo
309. ol is active ACC active lf adaptive cruise control detects that braking assistance is required on the part of the driver a warning signal sounds and the warning message Distance Please brake appears on the multi function display 1N Warning Risk of accidents Danger of collision with the vehicle in front gt Brake immediately Driving and Driving Safety 185 Exceptions for adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control is not available in the following situations lf the ignition is switched off When PSM is off lf the driver s door is opened and the driver s seat belt is not fastened When parking or maneuvering in very tight spaces lf the PDK selector lever is at position N R or P On upward or downward slopes of more than 20 When the electric parking brake is activated If one of these exception situations occurs when adaptive cruise control is switched on adaptive cruise control will be switched off A message to this effect will appear on the multi function display 186 Driving and Driving Safety Messages on the multi function display lf adaptive cruise control was deactivated automatically or if an action cannot be performed a message to this effect in blue appears on the multi function display ACC not available Adaptive cruise control is not available e g when maneuvering ABS PSM intervention Adaptive cruise contro
310. ol stalk on the steering wheel towards the steering wheel and keep it pulled position 2 The desired speed is decreased in steps of 5 mph 10 km h The status display A shows the new desired speed The red triangle B under the progress bar for the speed control range shows the speed of your vehicle Setting the desired distance The desired distance from the vehicle in front can be set in four stages Note on operation When you are setting the desired distance the ACC main menu for adaptive cruise control is displayed temporarily on the multi function display Initial actuation of the rocker switch Z displays the ACC main menu without changing the desired distance Note The distance depends on the driving speed The Slower the vehicle is travelling the shorter the distance and the faster the vehicle is travelling the longer the distance Increasing the desired distance gt Press the rocker switch Z up The desired distance is increased There are more orange segments shown in the desired distance display E Reducing the desired distance gt Press the rocker switch Z down The desired distance is reduced There are fewer orange segments shown in the desired distance display E Display showing distance from vehicle in front lf a vehicle is detected in front the vehicle symbol D appears on the multi function display and in the status display A The grey area F shows the current distance fro
311. on DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Your car has thousands of parts and components which have been designed and manufactured in accordance with Porsche s high standards of engineering quality and safety 1N Warning Any alteration or misuse of the vehicle can lead to accidents and serious or fatal personal injuries Any alteration of the vehicle may negate or interfere with those safety features built into the vehicle Modifications may be carried out on your vehicle only if approved by Porsche Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe manner obeying the local laws and in the light of driving conditions faced by you and in accordance with the instructions provided in this Owner s Manual gt Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring those laws and driving conditions or by ignoring the instructions in this manual Regularly check your vehicle for signs of damage Damaged or missing aerodynamic compon ents such as spoilers or underside panels affect the driving behavior and therefore must be replaced immediately Your car may have all or some of the components described in this manual Should you have difficulty understanding any of the explanations of features or equipment installed in your vehicle contact your authorized Porsche dealer They will be glad to assist you Also check with your dealer on other available options or equipment
312. on tires up to 100 mph 160 km h The comfort tire pressure speed threshold permitted for your vehicle depends on the national type standardisation and is displayed under Comfort pressure in the Tire pressure menu on the multi function display on the on board computer a load Full load Part Da Full load T e t e o pe oen o ben 0 ben 20 ben 2 0 ben 0 ben 0 ben 2o ber porem 2b eaten a2 atan cate 2 ben 2 2ben 22 ben Sao ppa aten eaten 22 ban 122 bon 122 bon 23 ben 3 be acter raes zten eaten 22 ban 22 bon 122 bon 123 ben 23 ben 23 ben gt The load condition of the vehicle must be set on the multi function display The tire pressure must be changed according to the vehicle load Please see the chapter SELECTING CHARGE IN THE TIRE PRESSURE MENU on page 130 FA front axle RA rear axle Tire Pressure and Technical Data 327 Weights Curb weight depending on equipment de Senin GOOD 3068 lbs 4497 lbs 4101 lbs 4597 lbs 4343 lbs 4729 lbs 1800 kg 2040 kg 1860 kg 2085 kg 1970 kg 2145 kg i 4143 lbs 4672 lbs 4276 lbs 4772 lbs 4518 lbs 4904 Ibs ReaD OER 1875 kg 2115 kg 1935 kg 2160 kg 2045 kg 2220 kg Maximum axle load front 2568 Ibs 1165 kg 2590 Ibs 1175 kg 2756 lbs 1250 kg Maximum axle load rear 2943 Ibs 1335 kg 2954 Ibs 1340 kg 2888 Ibs 1310 kg Gross vehicle weigh
313. onal injury or death due to the passenger air bag triggering unintentionally When the ignition is on and the up to one year old child is seated in the child restraint system on the passenger seat the indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be on If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up it could indicate a fault in the system and the air bag could inflate in a collision placing the child at risk of death or severe injury from the inflating air bag In this case gt Fasten the child restraint system on one of the rear seats immediately gt Have the fault remedied at your nearest authorized Porsche dealer 6 Warning light Faults are indicated by a warning light in the instrument panel The air bag warning light illuminates when the electronic monitoring of the air bag system detects a malfunction of the sensors safety belt system occupant detection system PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp related wiring air bag modules and control units gt In the following cases you should immediately consult an authorized Porsche dealer in order to assure the air bag system is functioning properly lf the warning light does not light up when the ignition is switched on or lf the warning light does not go out once the engine is running or lf the warning light appears while driving Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 51 Important information If you sell your Pors
314. op Warning jerks can be felt when driving off and the engine power may be restricted Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on a hill for example Hold the vehicle with the brake Reduce engine load Stop the vehicle in a suitable place if possible Allow the engine to run in selector lever position P or N until the warning disappears Manual transmission Depress clutch pedal when starting Stop immediately in a suitable place Do not continue driving Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Stop immediately in a suitable place Do not continue driving Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have brake pads replaced immediately Consult a qualified specialist workshop Pull the electric parking brake switch Press the brake pedal before releasing the electric parking brake Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 155 Light in instrument panel BRAKE flashes iy ee bs OFF Warning light for fuel gauge indicator lights up Warning message on multi function display Emergency brake function PSM failure PSM off PSM on Fault All wheel dr system PSM on All wheel dr system overloaded Fault All wheel dr Sport mode error Sport mode not available Spoiler failure Sunroof not closed full
315. or downwards Confirming selection Enter gt Press rotary knob A Moving back one or several selection levels gt Press button B Back button Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 1 15 Individual assignment of the MFS button Porsche Communication Management PCM functions or multi function display functions can be assigned to the MFS button in the multi function display on the instrument panel Audio source selection is preset by default For information on individual assignment of the MFS button gt Please see the chapter CHANGING BUTTON ASSIGNMENT ON MULTI FUNCTION STEERING WHEEL on page 151 For information on Porsche Communication Management gt Please refer to the separate PCM operating instructions 1 16 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Operating principle on vehicles without multi function steering wheel The multi function display is operated with the lower lever on the right of the steering column Selecting menu function setting option gt Push the lever downwards position 3 or upwards position 4 Confirming selection Enter gt Push the lever forward position 1 Moving back one or several selection levels gt Pull the lever towards the steering wheel position 2 once or several times 593 801 a k n gt a s pe fi fz 4 Nr ty i m Wig i y Aa i fs x a p kai 4 SWARAJ Audio SWR 3 Pop 01 14 2009 10 47 am
316. orage compartment under the luggage compartment floor There is additional storage space under the luggage compartment floor depending on the vehicle equipment Lifting the luggage compartment floor gt Pull the luggage compartment floor at the handle recess and lift it up For information on the luggage compartment gt Please see the chapter STOWING LOADS on page 228 591 180 Drinks Holder Cupholder You can place drinks in the cupholder 1 Warning Risk of scalding and damage due to spilling drinks gt Only use cupholder when safe to do so gt Only use containers that fit gt Never put overfull containers in the cupholder gt Do not use with hot drinks Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 221 Opening the front cupholder Note gt Keep the cupholder above the glove box closed while driving 1 Press the cupholder panel The panel opens 2 Press the symbol for the required cupholder 3 Close the panel in the middle The cupholders can be adjusted to fit larger containers 222 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System Pulling cupholder out 1 Pull out the holder arrow 2 Insert a cup container 3 Carefully slide the holder inwards to adjust it to the size of the cup container Folding cupholder in 1 Push cupholder drawer in 2 Open the panel in the middle 3 Fold the cupholder in and engage it 4 Close the panel in t
317. orized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you The washer fluid reservoir for windshield rear window and headlights is located at the rear left in the engine compartment blue screw cap Maintenance and Car Care 259 Ea Warning light and warning message The warning light on the instrument panel and the warning message on the multi function display alert you to the fact that the washer fluid level is too low gt Add washer fluid at the next opportunity In this case the remaining quantity is only approx 1 litre The maximum filling capacity is approx 5 8 US quarts 5 5 liters Adding washer fluid 1 Open cap on washer fluid reservoir 2 Add washer fluid 3 Close cap carefully 260 Maintenance and Car Care Power Steering Warning Risk of accidents When the engine is stationary e g when on tow or the hydraulic system fails there is no power steering assistance available Therefore substantially more force will have to be exerted to steer the vehicle gt Exercise extreme care when your vehicle is being towed gt Have the fault corrected Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Regular checking of hydraulic fluid is part of servicing The flow noise heard at full steering lock is design related and does not indicate a defec
318. orsche Doppelkupplung PDK gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE DOPPELKUPPLUNG PDK on page 193 Horn gt Press button B to operate the horn Air bag unit The air bag unit C is located behind the padded steering wheel boss In conjunction with the seat belts the air bag is a safety system designed to provide the driver with maximum protection from injury in an accident For information on the air bag system gt Please see the chapter AIR BAG SYSTEMS on page 47 rm o hy i wi Heated steering wheel The steering wheel heating can be switched on and off with the button on the rear of the steering wheel when the ignition is switched on Switching steering wheel heating on off gt Press button The message Steering wheel heating switched on or Steering wheel heating switched off appears on the multi function display for 2 seconds Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 61 Steering Wheel Adjustment The steering wheel can be adjusted manually or electrically in four directions depending on the vehicle equipment 1N Warning Risk of accidents The steering wheel may move further than desired if you attempt to adjust it when driving You may lose control of the vehicle gt Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled activation of memory settings gt Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended 62 Seats Mirrors and Ste
319. orsche dealer Automatic locking retractor The safety belts for the front passenger and the rear seats are equipped with an automatic locking retractor for securing the child restraint system When activated this retractor allows you to securely fasten the child restraint system in place so that inadvertent movements will not occur 4 Danger The use of a child restraint system on the front passenger seat can result in serious personal injury or death to the child from an air bag deployment To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air bag in an accident Porsche strongly recommends gt Under all normal circumstances the child seat must be placed in the rear Do not use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat lf there are emergency reasons for transporting a child in the front passenger seat use the automatic locking retractor function and follow the other safety instructions on the previous pages in this section PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 4 Danger Risk of serious personal injury or death to the child when excessive force is acting on the passenger s seat due to the seat belt and the passenger s air bag is switched on uninten tionally gt After fastening the child restraint system do not adjust the seat in any direction Moving the seat could adjust the safety belt against the child restraint and cause the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp to go off and activate
320. osition manually gt Press the selection button A for the exterior mirror on the driver s side Garage Door Opener The garage door opener of your Porsche replaces up to three original remote controls used to operate various devices e g garage door gate to your property alarm system You have the option of assigning up to 3 different signals to the buttons and on the overhead operating console keypad provided the original remote control is compatible with the HomeLink system Note gt Please read the instructions for the original remote control 1 Warning Risk of accidents when using the garage door opener if persons animals or objects are within the range of movement of the equipment that is being operated gt When using the garage door opener ensure that no persons animals or objects are within the range of movement of the equipment that is being operated gt Observe the safety notes for the original remote control Notes on operation gt When the button is pressed the transmitter unit sends the signal forward in direction of travel Always align the vehicle with the receiver Otherwise range restrictions cannot be ruled out gt Before selling the vehicle delete the programmed signals for the garage door opener on the keypad gt Please read the instructions for the original remote control to find out whether the original remote control has fixed or changeable code
321. ou have a flat tire move a safe distance off the road Turn the emergency flasher on and use other warning devices to alert other motorists gt Do not park your vehicle where it may contact dry grass brush or other flammable materials The hot parts of the exhaust system could set such materials on fire thereby causing both property damage and severe or fatal physical injury gt Passengers must not be in the vehicle when it is jacked up gt Before you change a wheel be sure the ground is level and firm If necessary use a board under the jack to ensure that the jack does not sink into the ground gt Set the electric parking brake and block the wheels opposite the flat tire on the other side of the vehicle While operating the jack gt The jack Is only to be used for changing a wheel Do not use it as a Support to work under the car gt The car must be jacked up only at the illustrated jacking points Lifting at any other place may damage the vehicle or may result in personal injury Never jack the car up by the body or the bumpers gt For safety reasons do not use tire inflating bottles Do not use commercially available sealant bottles Use only the tire inflating bottle located in the luggage compartment Note The tools required for changing a wheel e g jack wheel bolt wrench assembly aids are not Supplied as standard with the vehicle Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you
322. ould not induce you to take greater risks with your safety 1N Caution If the vehicle comes to a stop on a steep uphill gradient without operation of the footbrake by the driver this may result in a certain roll back before the vehicle is held by the HOLD function In this situation the roll back can be reduced by operating the footbrake gt Assist holding of the vehicle by increasing the brake force with the footbrake Brake pedal feels different When adaptive cruise control is operating normally or when the HOLD function is active the brake pedal may feel different and you may hear hydraulic noises This behavior is normal for the system It is not a fault 1 Danger Risk of accidents The limits set by physics of driving cannot be overcome even with HOLD function The responsibility for stopping and driving off on uphill gradients is still the driver s despite the HOLD function Assistance by the HOLD function is not always guaranteed when stopping and driving off on a slippery surface e g on icy or loose surfaces In this case the vehicle can slip gt Always adjust your driving style to the driving conditions and vehicle load Use the footbrake if necessary If the Drive Off Assistant is not functioning the driver cannot be assisted when driving off on hills gt Hold the vehicle with the footbrake ABS Brake System Anti Lock Brake System 1N Warning In spite of the advantages of
323. p in order to correct the fault We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have the trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools for this type of work Porsche Active Suspension Management PASM with Air Suspension and Level Control PASM with air suspension is an active shock absorber adjustment and ride height balancing system The adjustable damper system selects the appropriate damping level for each wheel according to the driving situation and driving conditions The level control system automatically balances load changes and maintains a constant ride height Driving safety agility and comfort are optimised Three different chassis setups can be selected at the push of a button PASM Comfort PASM Sport PASM Sport Plus Comfort mode ensures comfortable chassis tuning The PASM Sport chassis setup offers very sporty shock absorber tuning PASM Sport Plus mode offers particularly sporty shock absorber tuning e g for driving on the race circuit The vehicle is also lowered by approx 1 in 25 mm compared with the normal level and the spring rate is increased In addition to manual mode selection PASM also adjusts shock absorber tuning for either sporty or comfort driving depending on the driving situation Selecting the PASM mode 1 Switch on ignition 2 Start the engine 3 Press button repeatedly On the button
324. panel on off 80 Locking Emergency operation in the event of a fault 35 Locking the tailgate cccsscccsssssssseeseesesssneeees 26 Locking vehicle door from inside 000000 panies Locking vehicle door with car key EE COMIC cece cece ee 24 Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry amp Drive nee Persons animals remaining in the vehicle 24 ei aoe ere wae yee cn ao iy Rene deeeia er Ed 0 Vehicle door with car key remote control eee Vehicle door with Porsche Entry amp Drive keyless 24 Low beam Installing headlights ssccccccssssssssseeeessssees SOO Removing headlights serete eee tee GUS Switching on off aececi OZ Luggage General information on loading c cccccceeeeeees 228 Loading and securing Ski bag 000sseeeereee QOL Position of tie COWN riNGS ccccssccccsseeeesssseeee 227 Retractable luggage compartment cover pulling out retracting cccccsessssssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 229 Luggage compartment CIOSING the raile ate sees a a cence eue eo Opening and closing the E 227 Opening the tailgate ees ere tere 25 OVER VICW E E A E E TE E 227 Position of tie down as 227 Luggage compartment cover Diceneacin e a ee 231 M Maintenance work Adding washer fluid 008 eer ine 259 Changing air cleaner cccceeessesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 261 Changing particle filter eeen 201 Checking engine oil level cccc
325. play T 305 PTM Porsche Traction Management FUNCTIONAL CE SCRIPTION e eee eea A2 Pulling out parking Functional description ParkAssist cccccccceee 239 Sensors for ParkASSISt ecen 299 Pushstarins e naam a R Radar sensor for adaptive cruise control ssec 274 Radiator fan Installation POSINOW merne a 200 Safety notes sesennneeeeeiniieseerenrrirrernnrrnnenrnnn OO Radio ADS E E E E E E E A 189 Radio remote Control ee L 9 Rain sensor Adjusting secere r erie ER eee 103 SWIC HING OM a A 102 Reading lights front SSVI MAINS COL Clic eeu erecta eeeaeg sat ried ne antieencueeemenareacee 98 Switching on off automatically cccccceeeeeeeees 99 Rear fog light SSIs TL a8 perme ee eee er cer nat re Ran ete eee 9 kear rollup Dnd a e tasers ncuautaveceeioentd macneeauess TTE 66 eer lt 1 See te et ea ote renee eee te eet eo Folding FOPWALC coscsscccccssssseccesssseseesssssessesecessssve 226 Rear spoiler operating principle PS er eee een 214 Rear window Optical distortion eee e a 8A Rear window wiper Switching on intermittent operation 00008 104 Window wiping EE E eee we 104 Rear axle Od isccsaceuutuntsadesceuiesseeercsrreedennstacematess L6 Rearview Camera centinncsnatsviatiservimectasavitiveavemasacemnnmten LAL Reduced driving program PDK o oo eee ieee eo Refrigerated box in the rear of the vehicle opening eet 226 RCL 2 101 aa Oar en ree ee ketene Rete ceo ee eaten he Oe nen 267 Re
326. provided should not induce you to take greater risks with your safety The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be overcome even with PSM Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed cannot be reduced by PSM Advantages of PSM Best possible traction and lane holding ability in all driving situations even on road surfaces with varying friction The system compensates for undesired vehicle reactions Ferraria effect when the driver releases the accelerator pedal or brakes on bends This compensation functions up to the maximum lateral acceleration PSM actively stabilises the vehicle if necessary during dynamic driving maneuvers e g rapid steering movements during lane changes or on alternating bends Improved braking stability on bends and on different or varying road surfaces Improved brake function and shorter stopping distance in the event of emergency braking Readiness for operation PSM is switched on automatically every time you start the engine Function Sensors at the wheels brakes steering system and engine continuously measure Speed Direction of travel steering angle Lateral acceleration Axial acceleration Rate of turn about the vertical axis PSM uses these values to determine the direction of travel desired by the driver PSM intervenes and corrects the course If the actual direction of motion deviates from the desired course steering wheel position I
327. pt your speed to the changed conditions Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Stop immediately in a suitable place Do not continue driving Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop PASM level control is active PASM level control was switched off e g before driving onto a lifting platform or raising one wheel Level adjustment is not permitted e g at speeds above approx 20 mph 30 km h or if the door tailgate is open Level adjustment not available e g when the engine is switched off if the vehicle is overloaded or the battery voltage is too low The vehicle ground clearance is insufficient to continue driving The system regulates the vehicle level again automatically This can take several minutes Have any persistent faults checked corrected at a qualified specialist workshop The vehicle ground clearance is too high to continue driving The system regulates the vehicle level again automatically Have any persistent faults checked corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Light in Warning message on multi function instrument display panel Fault PDCC PDCC failure PDCC fault PSM activated Fault Differential lock Tire pressure Inflate Restricted monitoring No monitoring System is learning System not active Meaning Action required Vehicle handling may be affected Adapt your speed to the changed conditions Have the fault corrected
328. quality of your car telephone will change constantly when you are driving Interference caused by buildings landscape and weather is unavoidable It may become particu larly difficult to hear when using the hands free function due to external noise such as engine and wind noise Automatic car wash gt Unscrew external antennas before using an automatic car wash Porsche Communication Management PCM 1N Warning There is danger of accident if you set or operate the on board computer radio navigation system telephone or other equipment when driving This could distract you from traffic and cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Operate the components while driving only if the traffic situation allows you to do so safely gt Carry out any complicated operating or setting procedures only with the vehicle stationary gt f itis necessary to operate these components while the vehicle is in motion use the function keys on the multifunctional steering wheel gt Refer to the separate operating instructions before putting the PCM into operation When put into operation for the first time a distance of approx 3 miles 5 km must be driven in order for the navigation system to complete the process of fine calibration The same applies when the tires are changed e g summer winter tires or new tires fitted Full location accuracy Is not yet achieved during
329. r if the brake pedal travel has increased one of the two brake circuits has failed A greater braking pressure will be required stopping distances will be longer and the braking behavior will change particularly in curves With correctly adjusted brakes and a correctly working brake system the pedal travel to the point of brake application should be 1 3 16 in to 1 9 16 in 30 to 40 mm Whenever the brake pedal travel exceeds this value have the brake system checked Brake pedal 1 Warning Risk of an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death Any obstruction of the brake pedal could increase the stopping distance gt Always check the movement of the brake pedal before driving and make sure that it is not obstructed by a floor mat or any other object gt Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding into positions that could interfere with the safe operation of your vehicle Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you floor mats of the correct size including a securing possibility Note In case one of the two brake circuits fails increased pedal travel is required to bring your vehicle to a full stop 1N Warning To avoid overheating and premature wear of the brakes gt Before descending a steep grade reduce speed and shift the transmission into a lower gear to control speed gt Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal when not intending to apply br
330. r maintenance instructions 00008 201 PASM Porsche Active Suspension Management FUNCtIONAl description aeiee 208 OE E A E E E 20 Selecting chassis setup E eee ee Warning message on the multi function display 208 Passenger air bag Automatic deactivation of the passenger air bag 50 Warning light in the center console 008 DL PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Warning light in the center console n e 51 Passenger mirror Adjusting Spa sea ee Bienes to es spac mentee 58 Adjusting as parking ANC ease eaten oe ees 60 FPOMCING m ee Oren Per er 59 Folding E E PE 59 PCCB Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake General information cccccceesseeeeeeeeees acta 3 PCM Porsche Communication Management 191 PDCC Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control Functional description eieaa ea 211 OIIE metre ya oe ent ete ee ee ea 201 Warning message on the multi function display 211 PDK selector lever Emergency UMockine a mea 0O PDK transmission E EEA E A T 193 Bie e E E E E T esas LOO E E E ek Kickdown a tre E ens Pee eae 197 Reduced driving POSE sani 199 Rocker switches on the steering wheel 61 Selector lever POSITIONS cccceesseceeeeeessteeeeeeens 195 Shifting gears on the steering wheel E re 196 SOOM MOUS A nies dite eee 195 index 337 Performance tests on roller type test stands 0 253 Performance Technical data cccccccccsssc
331. r important information on laying up your Porsche can be found in other sections gt Please see the chapter BATTERY on page 303 For information on locking the vehicle when the battery is disconnected gt Please see the chapter NOT ALL VEHICLE DOORS ARE LOCKED on page 36 Minor Repairs Exercise Extreme Caution when Working o your VEC Lessee erecreecee tees ee eeetee eee 278 Tires and Wheels 280 Wheel Bolts Laenen 293 PU WAC EEEE E A TE E 293 Electrical System sna 296 Bae e 303 External Power Supply Jump Lead E ee eee en ee ee er ree 306 Changing the Remote Control Battery 307 Replacing BUDS ceea 308 Headlights cecccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeees 308 Side Turn Signal Light ccccccsssssscseseeeees 312 Licence Plate Lights ccsessseeeeesessseeeees 313 Side Marker Light cccccccscccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 313 Changing Light Emitting Diodes and Long Lite BUIDS cenario irren 314 Headlight Adjustment 314 TOMITE eee inte tae eee een 316 Fire EXxtinQuiSher siririna 321 Minor Repairs 277 Exercise Extreme Caution when Working on your Vehicle 4 Danger Ignoring the following instructions may cause serious personal injury or death gt The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a potentially hazardous area If you are not fully familiar with proper repair procedures do not attempt the adjustments described on the following pages Only wor
332. r in good time engine braking lf engine braking is insufficient on steep stretches operate the footbrake at intervals Avoid continuous braking as it overheats the brakes and reduces the braking effect For information on brake fluid and checking the brake fluid level gt Please see the chapter BRAKE FLUID on page 258 Driving and Driving Safety 175 Switch cruise control on off Set increase desired speed Reduce desired speed Interrupt OFF Return to set speed RESUME hWNE Db Cruise Control Cruise control maintains any selected speed between approx 20 150 mph 30 240 km h without you having to use the accelerator Cruise control is operated using the control stalk at the bottom left of the steering wheel 1 6 Driving and Driving Safety Vehicles with PDK Downshifts are carried out to help maintain the pre selected speed especially when driving downhill 4 Warning Risk of accident while using cruise control in heavy traffic and consequent personal injury or death on twisting roads or under unfavorable road conditions e g wintry or wet conditions varying road surfaces gt Do not use the cruise control under such conditions gt Observe all local and national speed limits Risk of an accident personal injury and loss of control gt Do not reach through the steering wheel spokes while driving Switching cruise control readiness on gt Press button A on the
333. r information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 gt Incomplete entries or selection of the wrong tires on the multifunction display affect the accuracy of warnings and messages The settings in the tire pressure menu must be updated following a wheel change or changes in vehicle loading Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 127 gt Use only the pressure differences shown in the Fill info display in the tire pressure menu or from the corresponding tire pressure warning when correcting the tire pressure gt Tires can lose air over time without a tire defect being present A tire pressure warning will then appear on the multi function display Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity 128 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 1 Warning light 1N Warning Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPM malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPM malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intend
334. r opera tion and that the lenses are clean gt Check the headlights for proper aim and if necessary have them adjusted gt Check under the vehicle for leaks Be sure all luggage is stowed securely Emergency equipment It is good practice to carry emergency equipment in your vehicle Some of the items you should have are window scraper snow brush container or bag of sand or salt emergency light small shovel first aid kit etc In the driver s seat Check operation of the horn Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and controls To reduce the possibility of injury from the air bag deployment you should always sit back as far from the steering wheel as is practical while still maintaining full vehicle control Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors Buckle your safety belts Check operation of the foot and electric parking brake Check all warning and indicator lights with ignition on and engine not running Start engine and check all warning displays for warning symbols Never leave an idling car unattended Lock doors from inside especially with children in the car to prevent inadvertent opening of doors from inside or outside Drive with doors locked On the road gt Never drive after you have consumed alcohol or drugs Always have your safety belt fastened Always drive defensively Expect the unexpected Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes
335. r retracts automatically from position B to position A at approx 110 mph 180 km h from position A to the end position at approx 40 mph 60 km h Additional rear spoiler position on vehicles without a turbo engine The rear spoiler also moves to an intermediate position between A and B when extended at speeds of between approx 100 mph 160 km h and 130 mph 205 km h and when retracted at speeds of between approx 110 mph 180 km h and 90 mph 145 km h Sport Plus mode activated The rear spoiler extends straight to position B at approx 55 mph 90 km h The rear spoiler retracts from position B straight to the end position at approx 40 mph 60 km h lf the automatic control system fails the warning message Spoiler failure appears on the multi function display For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Warning Risk of accidents if the Spoiler failure warning appears Driving stability will be adversely affected if the rear spoiler retracts or fails to extend This is due to increased rear axle lift at higher speeds The rear axle will tend to lift reducing the road holding characteristics of the car in higher speed turns gt Adapt your driving style and speed to the changed driving behavior gt Have the fault corrected Please contact a qualified specialist wor
336. r vents gt Please see the chapter AIR VENTS on page 82 Defrosting the windshield Activating defrosting function gt Press button G7 The indicator light on the button lights up The air flows to the windshield and the front side windows The windshield is demisted or defrosted as quickly as possible Deactivating defrosting function gt Press button Qy7 The indicator light on the button goes out or Press button AUTO Note on 4 zone air conditioning In defrosting mode the air supply to the rear is cut off automatically to achieve maximum defrosting efficiency The air flows to the windshield and the front side windows OFF and a lock symbol appear in the displays on the operating unit for the rear air conditioned areas Air conditioning settings cannot be modified Air Conditioning 73 Switching off MONO mode gt Press button mono or The settings for one of the other air conditioned areas change Accepting settings for driver s side for the entire vehicle The MONO function allows the air conditioning settings for the driver s side to be accepted for the entire vehicle Switching on MONO mode gt Press button mono The indicator light on the button lights up The display indicator values for the other areas adopt the same values as the driver s settings 14 Air Conditioning The indicator light on the button goes out Air recirculation mode Switching on air recircul
337. raded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C and they represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 1N Warning The traction grade assigned to this is based on braking straight ahead traction tests and does not include cornering turned traction acceleration hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperatures can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent hig
338. radio sources e g wireless headphones if tire temperatures are too high gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Wm gt OOO Sport Chrono Stopwatch You can use the stopwatch to measure any times e g on race circuits or on work related journeys Measured lap times can be stored and evaluated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche Communication Management PCM gt Please observe the chapter SPORT DISPLAY in the separate PCM operating instructions Stopwatch on the dashboard The stopwatch has an analogue and a digital display The large pointer of the analogue display measures the seconds The two small pointers measure hours and minutes The display restarts at zero after 12 hours Seconds and increments of 1 10 and 1 100 of a second can be read on the digital display The digital display and the display on the on board computer can indicate up to 99 hours and 59 minutes Stopwatch timing displays The stopwatch time is displayed at different positions on the dashboard Inthe stopwatch on the dashboard Inthe Chrono menu in the multi function display on the instrument panel Inthe CAR main menu on the PCM Displaying the time on the stopwatch You can configure the stopwatch on the dashboard to display the time in the multi function display on the instrument panel For information on displaying the time on the stopwatch g
339. rained to the correct level Coolant or engine oil temperature Is too high Switch off engine and allow to cool Check coolant or engine oil level Add more coolant or engine oil if necessary Switch off engine and allow to cool Check coolant level Add coolant if necessary Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Stop in a suitable place and switch engine off Do not continue driving Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Consult a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 153 Light in instrument panel Display of selector lever position flashes Display of selector lever position flashes Display of selector lever position flashes Warning message on multi function N Y lt Battery protection Consumer switch off Start engine manually Start stop operation deactivated Gearshift not engaged Move gear lever to position P Move gear lever to position P Move gear lever to position P or N Press brake Gearbox emergency operation Gearbox emergency operation 154 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Meaning Action required The power supply to various comfort features is deactivated to prevent the battery fro
340. rate speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles 100 to 200 km Longer braking distances must be anticipated Engine oil and fuel consumption During the break in period oil and fuel consump tion may be higher than normal gt Please see the chapter ENGINE DATA on Page 324 As always the rate of oil consumption depends on the quality and viscosity of oil the speed at which the engine is operated the climate and road conditions as well as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the lubricant gt Make a habit of checking engine oil with every refueling add if necessary Overview IIlustrations 0000000222 10 Driver s Cockpit S a Steering Wheel and Instrument Panel 12 BEI lejeysidcheres ae eee eT nC nen ee 13 Front Center Console cecce EEE Overhead Operating Console cccee 15 PEAT nea seria iacninvetuamttan velansacatesusaseneaninss 16 Never ane car theft Ae Pe ee E RE 18 Notes on the Key and Central Locking SY STOW aer E E EER 19 Central Locking System ccc 20 Brief Overview Opening and Locking From OUtSICG ccccecececeeseeeeeeeeceeeueeauseeeeeess 21 Opening and Locking From Outside 22 Opening and Locking From Inside 00 31 Opening and Closing the Engine Compartment Ud irinari isinira 33 Malfunctions When Opening and Closing 35 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 37 Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints 38 Adj
341. re Sport Plus mode must be switched on indicator light on the button comes on and SPORT PLUS appears on the multi function display 1 Press the brake with your left foot 2 Quickly press the accelerator down fully kickdown activated and hold it The engine speed will level off at around 5 000 rpm on the Panamera S around 5 500 rpm on the Panamera 4S around 4 550 rpm on the Panamera Turbo Launch Control active appears on the multifunction display 3 Release the brake within a few seconds Remaining stationary for a long time with Launch Control active can lead to overloading of the transmission To protect the transmission the engine power is then reduced and the Launch Control active process is cancelled Shifting gears on the steering wheel With the shift buttons on the steering wheel you can change temporarily from automatic selection mode D to manual mode M For example Shifting down before bends and on entering built up areas Shifting down on downward slopes engine braking Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration The manual selection mode remains engaged For cornering depending on the lateral acceleration and overrunning When the vehicle is stationary e g at a junction The system leaves manual selection mode automatically after around 8 seconds unless Cornering or overrunning after driving off Kickdown The
342. rential ABD Anti slip control ASR Engine drag torque control MSR HOLD function standstill management Full load bearing air spring struts with integrated shock absorbers Height adjustment with Low Level setting in Sport Plus mode and High Level setting for maneuvering Shock absorber system with adaptive continuous shock absorber control Active chassis control system to stabilise roll tendency of vehicle body when driving Controlled rear differential lock Driving and Driving Safety 201 Porsche Traction Management PTM Porsche Traction Management is an active all wheel control system designed to influence longitudinal and lateral dynamics It is closely linked with the Porsche Stability Management PSM system The permanently driven rear axle enhances the vehicle s sporty features Drive power is distributed fully variably to the front axle depending on the driving situation In conjunction with PSM the PTM system ensures perfect distribution of power among all four wheels in every driving situation This improves traction and driving stability and ensures the same high level of agility and dynamic response 1N Warning In spite of the advantages of PTM and four wheel drive it is still the driver s responsibility to adapt his driving style and maneuvers in line with road and weather conditions as well as the traffic situation The increased safety that is provided should not induce you to take
343. rew and open the filler vent caps of each cell With the car on a level surface the fluid level should meet the indicator mark in each cell gt f necessary top up with distilled water Do not use acid Only fill up to the mark otherwise the electrolyte will overflow when the battery is being charged and cause damage 304 Minor Repairs Winter operation During the winter months battery capacity tends to decrease as temperatures drop Additionally more power is consumed while starting and the headlights heater rear window defogger etc are used more frequently gt Let your Porsche dealer test the battery s capacity before winter sets in Vehicle storage lf the car stands for long periods in the garage or workshop the doors and lids should be closed gt Remove the ignition key and if necessary disconnect the battery Notes on operation gt When the battery is disconnected the alarm system ceases to function lf the vehicle was locked before the battery was disconnected the alarm will be triggered when the battery is reconnected To deactivate the alarm system gt Lock the vehicle and unlock it again Alarm system central locking gt The status of the central locking and alarm system is not changed by disconnecting the battery Maintenance notes Even if you put your vehicle out of operation the battery still discharges The battery will discharge more quickly if your vehicle is not d
344. rfaces and for drying the windows Preservative residues could reduce transparency gt Remove insect residues with insect remover Note The front side windows have a water repellent hydrophobic coating which prevents soiling of the windows This coating is subject to natural wear and can be renewed gt Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Care of windshield wiper blades Windshield wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital for a clear view gt Please see the chapter WIPER BLADES on page 261 gt Have the wiper blades replaced twice per year before and after the cold season or if wiper performance deteriorates or the blades are damaged gt Clean the wiper blades with window cleaner at regular intervals especially after washing the vehicle in a car wash We recommend Porsche window cleaner lf wiper blades are very dirty e g covered with insect remains they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth lf the wiper blades rub or squeak this may be due to the following lf the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash wax residues may adhere to the windshield These wax residues can be removed only by using window cleaner concentrate gt Please see the chapter WASHER FLUID on page 259 Contact your authorized Porsch
345. rges if the ignition key is left inserted lf the vehicle battery is dead the key can only be removed from the ignition lock if the emergency operation Is performed gt Please see the chapter EMERGENCY OPERATION UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY on page 166 Key positions with Porsche Entry amp Drive O Initial position 1 Ignition on 2 Start engine 3 Activate steering column lock Ignition lock position 0 Initial position The ignition key cannot be removed when the ignition is switched on or when the engine has been started To remove the ignition key gt Stop the vehicle gt Move PDK selector lever to position P gt Switch ignition off gt Remove the ignition key Ignition lock position 1 Ignition on gt Turn ignition key to position 1 All electrical equipment can be switched on The warning lights on the instrument panel light up for a lamp check gt Please see the chapter INSTRUMENT PANEL USA MODELS on page 107 lf an electrical consumer is not switched on for 10 minutes after switching on the ignition the ignition must be switched off then on again Ignition lock position 2 Start engine gt Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2 The car key is reset automatically from position 2 to position 1 when you start the engine Ignition lock position 3 Activate steering column lock on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive gt Please see the
346. riven on a daily basis over a distance of several miles The more often you drive your vehicle and the longer the distance driven on each trip the more opportunity the vehicle s charging system will have to recharge the batteries gt To preserve its efficiency charge the battery about every 6 weeks gt Check the battery acid level and top off with distilled water if necessary gt Store a battery that has been removed in a dark cool place but not subject to freezing Replacing the battery The service life of the battery is subject to normal wear it depends greatly on care climatic conditions and driving conditions distances loads gt Only use an original Porsche battery with the correct part number as a replacement Only this battery meets the specific requirements of the vehicle gt Please observe the disposal instructions for batteries Putting vehicle into operation After the battery is connected or after a fully discharged battery is charged the PSM warning light lights up on the instrument panel and a message appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel to indicate a fault This fault can be corrected with a few simple steps 1 Start the engine To do this turn the ignition key or the control unit on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive to ignition lock position 2 twice 2 With the vehicle stationary perform a few steering movements to the left and right and
347. riving normally Driving and Driving Safety 17 1 BRAKE Brake warning light USA Brake warning light Canada lf the electric parking brake could not be applied fully when the vehicle is stopped the brake warning light on the instrument panel starts to flash For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 172 Driving and Driving Safety Brakes gt Make ita habit to check the operation of your brakes before driving Keep in mind that the braking distance increases very rapidly as the speed increases At 60 mph 100 km h for example it is not twice but four times longer than 30 mph 50 km h Tire traction is also less effective when the roads are wet or Slippery gt Therefore always maintain a safe distance from the car in front of you Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake PCCB Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed grey cast iron they will unavoidably start to corrode if your car is parked for an extended period The brakes will tend to rub as a result The nature extent and effects of corrosion depend on the amount of time the vehicle was parked whether road salt or grit was spread and whether grease dissolving agents were used in car washes If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired we recommend having the brake system checked by experts at an authorized Porsche dealer Bra
348. rono gt Stop 2 Res and confirm The stopwatch time A continues 593 808 SWR3 sport Chrono 3 l R 00 00 38 50 7 Hese 10 427 am 82 F P aa Resetting the stopwatch time The stopwatch time can be reset to zero 1 Select gt Chrono gt Stop 2 Reset and confirm All stopwatch time displays are reset to zero Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 137 593 800 SWS Settings Date Time Light Visibility Locking Air conditioning Steering wheel op 10 47 am B F Y aja Vehicle Settings on the Multi Function Display Different settings can be adjusted in the multi function display on the instrument panel depending on the vehicle equipment On vehicles with comfort memory the settings are stored on the car key or the person buttons in the driver s door For information on the comfort memory gt Please see the chapter COMFORT MEMORY on page 40 138 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Selecting settings menu 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings and confirm Setting options The following vehicle functions can be adapted individually Display Adapt the appearance of the multi function display see page 139 Light Visibility Adjust the vehicle lighting wipers and reversing options see page 142 Locking Adjust the locking settings see page 145 Air condi
349. ront passenger seat However there may be serious situations where it might be necessary to place a child in the front seat so that he she can be kept under direct observation to prevent an immediate risk to the child for example while driving to the doctor or hospital The following instructions are provided to you solely for that purpose gt Seek appropriate advice from your authorized Porsche dealer about the possible installation of a Porsche child restraint system gt Ifa child restraint system must be fastened to the passenger s seat adjust the passenger s seat as far away from the air bag as possible Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 53 gt f emergency or other serious conditions require a child to be placed in the front seat exercise extreme caution and defensive driving of your vehicle Child restraint system for up to one year old children lf the child restraint system must be fastened to the passenger s seat in exceptional cases When an up to one year old child is seated in the child restraint system the front air bag is automatically deactivated on the passenger side gt Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up gt Adjust the passenger s seat as far away from the air bag as possible 54 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 1 Danger Risk of serious personal injury or death due to the passenger air bag triggering uninten tionally When the igni
350. rs if the setting process is interrupted All entries made up to this point are lost and the original settings remain in effect Before fitting tires with dimensions that are not already stored in the multi function display the missing information should be added to the multi function display gt Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools gt Use only tires approved by Porsche The available items in the tire pressure menu depend on the model type For this reason it is possible that some of the selection options shown here are not available on your multifunction display Yello warning Inflate Tire pressure warnings The tire pressure warning light on the instrument panel and a corresponding message on the multi function display warn about loss of pressure in two stages yellow and red depending on the amount of pressure loss Yellow warning Inflate The pressure in the tire is too low by more than 4 to 7 psi 0 3 to 0 5 bar The tire pressure warning specifies the affected tire and the target tire pressure Correct the tire pressure at the next opportunity This tire pressure warning appears for approx 10 seconds when the vehicle is Stationary and the ignition is switched off or when the ignition is switched on again The warning can
351. rs in the displays on the operating unit for the rear air conditioned areas Adjusting rear air conditioned areas with the front control panel REAR mode 4 zone air conditioning Switching on REAR mode gt Press button YT and keep it pressed for approx 2 seconds REAR appears on the air conditioning display The rear air conditioned areas can be controlled from the front control panel Switching off REAR mode gt Press button UT and keep it pressed for approx 2 seconds REAR disappears from the display Note on operation gt The function is ended automatically approximately 4 seconds after the last settings are adjusted Recommended air conditioning settings for lone drivers MONO mode is recommended for maximum passenger compartment comfort For information on activating MONO mode gt Please see the chapter ACCEPTING SETTINGS FOR DRIVER S SIDE FOR THE ENTIRE VEHICLE on page 74 Reducing the air quantity in the rear air conditioned areas does not improve passenger comfort in the front areas 4 zone air conditioning only For information on adjusting the air quantity gt Please see the chapter SETTING AIR QUANTITY on page 79 Extended ventilation panel The extended ventilation panel on top of the dashboard can be activated or deactivated separately in the multifunction display on the instrument panel The air flow in the passenger compartment is more diffuse and les
352. rt System 233 4 Remove the handle of the torque wrench D 5 Loosen screws on the underside of the carriers using the short side of the torque wrench The carriers can be adjusted to fit the width of the vehicle gt Once you have adjusted the width of the carriers tighten the screws again using the short side of the torque wrench Lift up the carriers slightly and fit roof channel protectors E into the mounts on the underside of the carriers Remove protective film from the bonding areas of the roof channel protectors Check that the fastening recesses on the roof rails are perfectly clean and free of dust and grease 234 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 8 Carefully fit the carriers into the fastening recesses The roof channel protectors E are bonded permanently into the fastening recesses These protect the paintwork in the fastening recesses during repeated fitting of the roof transport system and make fitting easier 9 Unlock the cover flaps with the key 10 Fold the cover flaps up fully 591 315 11 Tighten the fastening screws on the 12 Fold the cover flaps on the carriers down 13 Cut the cover trims C to size and slide them carriers using the torque wrench F until the fully and slide the desired attachment into sideways into the carriers or press them into arrow markings on the torque wrench are the carriers the carriers from above to protect from perfectly aligned moist
353. s direct The automatic control on the air conditioning system adjusts the air flow quantity automatically For information on activating the extended ventilation control gt Please see the chapter SETTING AIR CONDITIONING on page 146 Air Conditioning 1 Front Air Vents Air Vents Opening air vents gt Turn thumb wheel A clockwise e Closing air vents gt Turn thumb wheel A counter clockwise 82 Air Conditioning Changing air flow direction gt Swivel the air vent fins B in the desired direction Rear air vents Fresh air intake To ensure unhindered air intake gt Keep the fresh air intake between the windshield and the engine compartment lid free from snow ice and leaves Fs a i re wi Air vents glove box Cooled glove box Cooled air is directed into the glove box via a separate air vent The air vent can be opened and closed manually Note Cold air may flow around the glove box lid and into the passenger compartment gt Ifthe outside temperature is low close the air vents in the glove box to ensure the passenger compartment is heated as efficiently as possible 593 800 OWS Settings Date Time Light Visibility Locking Air conditioning Steering wheel op 10 47 am s B F p 4 Multi function display Air conditioning settings on the multi function display Additional settings relating to vehicle air conditioning can be adjusted in the
354. s engaged 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Wiper 2 Rear wiper and confirm 3 Select desired setting and confirm Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 143 Available setting options Automatic The rear wiper performs a series of wipes when reverse gear is engaged Manual The rear wiper is not activated when reverse gear is engaged Adjusting reversing options You can configure the exterior mirrors and the rear roll up blind to lower automatically when reverse gear is engaged 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Revers opt and confirm 144 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Lowering exterior mirror on passenger s side when parking You can configure the exterior mirror on the passenger s side to tilt downwards automatically when reverse gear is engaged to provide a better view of the curb 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt Revers opt and confirm 2 Select Lowering mirr 3 Confirm selection Exterior mirror is lowered Poe Exterior mirror is not lowered Lowering rear roll up blind when parking You can configure the rear roll up blind to lower automatically when reverse gear is engaged 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Light Visibility gt
355. s free operation if available pull off the road and park before using a hand held telephone It is essential to observe the telephone manufacturer s instructions before operating the telephone Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in accordance with the technical requirements of Porsche The transmission power must not exceed 10 W The devices must possess a type approval for your vehicle and have an e symbol If you should require equipment with transmission power values greater than 10 W please consult your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose They are familiar with the technical requirements for installing devices of this kind The antennas for all radios and telephones with a transmitting antenna must be externally mounted The improper installation of radios or telephones or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting antenna inside the car may cause the warning lights to come on Improper installation of such equipment can create a discharged battery or excessive current draw from added equipment lf aftermarket systems are installed by non dealership technicians or outside the selling dealer problems may result Installation of aftermarket equipment Is not covered under the New Car Warranty gt Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about the installation of non Porsche approved equipment Reception quality The reception
356. s inspection interval has elapsed it may not work properly gt Always read the operating instructions on the fire extinguisher gt The fire extinguisher should be checked to ensure correct operation by a specialist workshop every 1 2 years gt Have the fire extinguisher refilled after use Minor Repairs 321 Tire Pressure and Technical Data Vehicle Identification Data 323 Engine Dela vccicivestaarteewsaeuratinasuraaniaiani cial 324 Wheels Tir S ccseecceceeececeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeenees 325 Tire Pressure for Cold Tires 68 F 20 C 326 VVEISUDES EEE E E E E AET E 328 Filling Capacities seeren 329 Driving Performance dnccscsretccectecrceccetstoeses 329 DIMENSIONS sccccastsunceswenesesiacendiavessaunieeeears ets 330 322 Tire Pressure and Technical Data 591 253 A a Vehicle identification number Vehicle Identification Data When ordering spare parts or making inquiries always quote the vehicle identification number Vehicle identification number You will find the vehicle identification number at the bottom left behind the windshield and under the front passenger s seat Safety compliance sticker Safety compliance sticker The safety compliance sticker is your assurance that your new Porsche complies with all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which were in effect at the time the vehicle was manufactured The sticker also shows the month and year of production and t
357. s mixture will be directed to the intake air housing by the tank vent line mixed with the intake air and burned during normal combustion Car Care Instructions gt Please see the chapter EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE on page 252 Regular and correct care helps to maintain the value of your car and is also a precondition for the New Vehicle Warranty and the Anti Corrosion Warranty Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially developed car care products from the Porsche program available either singly or as complete car care sets They will be pleased to help you select suitable products Whether you use Porsche products or other commercially available cleaning agents first make sure of their correct application A Porsche that is well cared for can look like new for years It all depends on the amount of care the owner Is willing to give the car 1N Warning Risk of serious personal injury or damage to the vehicle or property Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your health Most chemical cleaners are concentrates which require dilution High concentrations might cause problems ranging from irritation to serious injury as well as damage to your vehicle gt Keep cleaning agents out of reach from children gt Observe all caution labels gt Always read directions on the container before using any product These directions may contain information necessary to avoid personal in
358. s of 5 mph 10 km h The new desired speed is displayed on the multifunction display in the instrument panel Vehicles with PDK Downshifts are carried out to help maintain the pre selected speed especially when driving downhill Interrupting cruise control operation OFF The speed driven before the interruption remains Stored in the memory and can be reactivated by pressing the control stalk gt Please see the chapter RESUMING THE STORED SPEED RESUME on page 178 gt Press the control stalk down position 3 or Press the brake or clutch pedal or move the PDK selector lever to position N For more information on driving with Porsche Doppelkupplung gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE DOPPELKUPPLUNG PDK on page 193 Cruise control operation is interrupted automatically lf the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more than approx 16 mph 25 km h for longer than 20 seconds lf the actual vehicle speed falls below the set vehicle speed by approx 37 mph 60 km h for longer than 60 seconds e g gradients lf Porsche Stability Management PSM intervenes for longer than 0 5 seconds Driving and Driving Safety 177 Resuming the stored speed RESUME gt Press the control stalk up position 4 Cruise control accelerates decelerates the vehicle to the stored speed Note on operation The stored speed should only be recalled if traffic and road conditions are conducive to
359. s type of work Towing For information on towing gt Please see the chapter TOWING on page 316 Driving and Driving Safety 205 HOLD function Drive Off Assistant and standstill management The HOLD function assists the driver when stopping and driving off on upward slopes The vehicle is automatically prevented from rolling back away from the desired direction of travel When the HOLD function is active the function light oLo on the instrument panel lights up When adaptive cruise control is operating normally the HOLD function holds the vehicle following automatic braking until the vehicle is actively held in a stationary position Notes on operation The HOLD function is not available if the PDK selector lever is in position N lf the PDK selector lever is moved while the HOLD function is active the HOLD function is deactivated lf the driver s seat belt is unbuckled and the driver s door is opened while the HOLD function is active the electric parking brake is activated automatically For information on the electric parking brake gt Please see the chapter ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE on page 171 206 Driving and Driving Safety Warning In spite of the advantages of the HOLD function it is still the driver s responsibility to adapt his driving style and maneuvers in line with road and weather conditions as well as the traffic situation The increased safety that is provided sh
360. se a child restraint system in the front passenger seat Direction of installation for child restraint systems According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions Under all normal circumstances the child seat must be placed in the rear gt Do not use a child restraint system in the front passenger Seat Group 0 and 0 Children up to 29 Ibs 13 kg Children of this weight must be transported in a restraint system which is fitted facing backwards Group l Children in between 20 Ibs 9 kg and 40 Ibs 18 kg Children of this weight are transported in child restraint systems facing forward Group Il Children in between 33 Ibs 15 kg and 55 Ibs 25 kg Children of this weight are transported in child restraint systems facing forward Group Ill Children in between 49 Ibs 22 kg and 80 Ibs 36 kg Children of this weight are transported in child restraint systems facing forward Using child restraint systems in the front passenger seat 1 Danger The use of a child restraint system in the front passenger seat can result in serious personal injury or death to the child from an air bag deployment To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air bag in an accident Porsche strongly recommends gt Under all normal circumstances the child seat must be placed in the rear Do not use a child restraint system in the f
361. se you and answer any questions you may have However the use of other parts or accessories may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle and Porsche can take no responsibility for any loss or damage caused by their use Even if the supplier of other accessories or parts is a recognized supplier the safety of your vehicle may still be affected if such items are installed Due to the large variety of products offered in the accessory market it is not possible for Porsche to inspect and approve every one gt In addition please note that the use of replacement parts that are not genuine Porsche parts or approved parts or the use of accessories not approved by Porsche may also detrimentally affect your vehicle warranty gt Check your vehicle regularly for signs of damage Damaged or missing aerodynamic components such as spoilers or underbody panels impair vehicle handling and must therefore be replaced immediately Radiator fan For information on radiator fans gt Please see the chapter RADIATOR FANS on page 258 1N Warning Danger of injury After the ignition is switched off the engine compartment and coolant temperatures are monitored for approx 30 minutes During this period and depending on temperature the radiator fan may continue to run or start to run gt Carry out work in these areas only with the engine off and exercise extreme caution Measurements on test stands Performance te
362. seceeeeesenteeeeeeeesessees 174 Brakes Applying releasing parking brake eee al 71 Brake pad warning M SSAEC cceseeeeeeeeseeeee L74 Brake pedaler E eae 173 Brake wear warning message ee tte een ET 174 Break in new brake Baus Beene tena ere there ROODE E EE 172 Onne c Penne E a tia Sa ener 253 ERO aM n e a E E tee ease ened 6 Breaking in Ename e ee eee on eae Ener ee neers eae nm ec Engine oil and fuel consumption during break in period A E E E T Un E nee 6 New brake pads and brake dse e a Newe a E comin i daceaine 6 Brief overview Air conditioning front control panel 000008 68 Air conditioning rear control panel 0004 69 Opening and locking the vehicle from outside 21 Windshield Wipers sacc E 101 Bulbs Changing bulb for auxiliary high beam Haagi sol Changing bulb for licence plate light 313 Changing bulb for side marker light 0008 313 Changing bulb for side turn signal light 312 C Car care a E TS Alcantara as nissvceroccdesiennnessevvconectslvvssmesvrennerdenven L70 Alloy wheels ae aa a 274 Cleaning the engine compartment 272 a E T mere Headlights plastic components adhesive foils 214 Laying up your Porsche nesre neea aaar 276 Leaiher E sevuinneddaccatd 219 e E n a EE E E irate nies 271 Seals aee a A NE E EF 275 Se e pita en eM Arr aes or 276 VINEE E E E E baal Use of high pressure cleaning equipment 2
363. sert forward slightly Rear Ashtray 1N Warning Danger of fire gt Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal as it could pose a fire hazard Opening ashtrays in the doors gt Press briefly on the ashtray lid Emptying ashtrays in the doors 1 Open the ashtray lid and carefully press it up The insert pops up slightly 2 Remove the insert and empty it Front cigarette lighter Rear cigarette lighter Cigarette Lighter Using front and rear cigarette lighters A N Warning gt Press briefly on the ashtray lid in the front center console or slide the ashtray lid in the Danger of fire and burning The cigarette rear center console sideways to the left or lighter is ready for use regardless of the right at the handle recess ignition lock position l l 3 Press the lighter into the receptacle When the gt Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended element is red hot the lighter will jump back to gt Never touch the heating element or sides of its initial position the lighter gt Only hold the heated lighter by the knob Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 225 Refrigerated box in the rear of the vehicle The refrigerated box in the rear of the vehicle consists of a compressor operated refrigerated box between the rear seats For information on the refrigerated box gt Please see the separate operating instructions for the refrigerated box Opening the refriger
364. sions with an impact of sufficient severity Below the deployment threshold of the air bag system and during types of collisions which do not cause the actuation of the system the safety belts provide the primary protection to the occupants when correctly worn Therefore all persons within the vehicle must wear safety belts at all times in many states state law requires the use of safety belts to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash gt Please see the chapter SAFETY BELTS on page 44 The front air bags are located under the padded steering wheel panel on the driver s side in the dashboard on the passenger s side and in the knee area for both the driver and the passenger The side air bags for the front and rear seats are installed on the side in or near the seat backrests The head air bags are installed above the doors in the roof area Note To minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts wether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 47 1 Danger To provide optimal occupant protection air bags must inflate at very high speed If you are not wearing your safety belt or are too close to the air bag when it is deployed inflating air bags can result in serious personal injury or death gt Make sure there are no peop
365. splay appears on the central screen of the Porsche communication system Front and rear ParkAssist is not activated in the following situations Ataspeed of more than approx 9 mph 15 km h or when the electric parking brake Is activated or when the PDK selector lever is at position P 1 Warning Injury hazard Even with ParkAssist responsibility for parking and for assessing obstacles lies with the driver A continuous tone sounds when there is a risk of collision gt Make sure that no persons animals or obstacles are within the maneuvering area gt Ifthe continuous tone sounds do not move the vehicle any close to the obstacle Sensors Four ultrasound sensors A in the rear bumper and six sensors B in the front bumper depending on vehicle equipment measure the distance to the closest obstacle Range behind the vehicle approx 71 in 180 cm Range at the side of the vehicle approx 31 in 80 cm Range in front of the vehicle approx 47 in 120 cm Obstacles cannot be detected in the blind sensor area above and below the sensors e g objects hanging down or close to the ground Parking 239 Maintenance notes gt The sensors must always be kept free of dust ice and snow in order to ensure that they are fully functional gt Do not damage sensors by abrasion or scratching gt Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with high pressure cleaning
366. splay contents in vehicle information area You can select four of the many items of vehicle information for display in the Vehicle menu and assignment to the display areas 1 2 3 and 4 140 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Display 2 Vehicle menu and confirm 3 Select 1 or 2 or Ze or A and confirm 4 Select the desired display contents and confirm Available display contents Coolant temp coolant temperature Compass Oil temperature Oil pressure Boost pressure Rem fuel rng Station Track current radio station music title Veh voltage Int Trip time driving time to intermediate destination Int Arrival arrival time at intermediate destination Dst Trip time driving time to destination Destination arrival arrival time at destination Date Phone info network strength network name Blank line area remains blank One item of information cannot be assigned to several areas or one area and the Upper line Adapting upper status area You can assign various items of information to the upper status area A in the multi function display 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings gt Display 2 Upper line and confirm 3 Select the desired display contents and confirm
367. ss steel tailpipes Stainless steel tailpipes can discolor due to soiling strong heat and combustion residues The original shine can be achieved again using commercially available metal lustre paste or metal polish Cleaning door roof lid and window seals 1N Caution The lubricant coating on the inner door seals may be damaged by unsuitable cleaning and care agents gt Do not use any chemical cleaning agents or solvents gt Do not use any preservative agents gt Wash dirt e g abrasion dust road salts from all seals regularly using warm soapy water gt If there is a risk of frost protect the outer door seals and lid seals against freezing into place with a suitable care product Leather care The natural surface markings of leather e g creases healed scars insect sting marks structural differences and slight variations in Shade and grain add to the attractiveness of the high quality natural leather product Observe the following care instructions 1N Caution The leather will be damaged by the use of unsuitable cleaning and care agents and by inappropriate treatment Do not use caustic cleaners or hard cleaning objects gt Perforated leather must under no circumstances get wet on its reverse side gt Clean all types of leather regularly to remove fine dust using a soft damp white woollen cloth or a commercially available microfibre cloth gt Remove heavy contamination with
368. ssages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 gt Adapt your driving style according to the changed conditions gt Contact a qualified specialist workshop in order to correct the fault We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have the trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools for this type of work Checking hydraulic fluid The hydraulic fluid is checked and changed regularly as part of servicing For information on maintenance gt Please see the chapter EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE on page 252 Driving and Driving Safety 2 1 1 Sport and Sport Plus Mode Function The selectable chassis settings mean that the vehicle can offer various modes for a sportier overall setup When Sport or Sport Plus mode is selected all the vehicle s control systems are intentionally shifted towards greater agility and driving performance PASM Porsche Active Suspension Management is automatically changed to PASM Sport or PASM Sport Plus mode resulting in a stiffer suspension setup The vehicle switches to Low Level in PASM Sport Plus mode Please see the chapter PORSCHE ACTIVE SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT PASM on page 208 Just like PASM PDCC is switched to the corresponding Sport or Sport Plus mode whereby th
369. ssenger seat Front and Rear Heated Seats The heated seats are ready for operation when the ignition is on The heating power can be adjusted to one of three settings by repeatedly pressing the heated seat button A Switching on gt Press the heated seat button A repeatedly The number of illuminated lights indicates the selected heat setting Switching off gt Press the heated seat button A repeatedly until all the indicator lights go out Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 43 Switching off gt Press the seat ventilation button B repeatedly until all the indicator lights go out Notes Seat heating is not available when the interior temperature is high Seat ventilation is not available when the interior temperature is low Front and Rear Seat Ventilation The seat ventilation is ready for operation when the ignition is on The seat ventilation can be adjusted to one of three settings by repeatedly pressing the seat ventilation button B Switching on gt Press the seat ventilation button B repeatedly The number of illuminated lights indicates the selected ventilation setting 44 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Safety Belts 4 Danger Always make sure your and your passengers safety belts are properly fastened seated in the vehicle Failure to follow safety belt warnings may result in serious personal injury or death gt For your and your passengers protection use Safety b
370. ssible across the pelvis and ensure that it is not pressing against the abdomen Pull on the diagonal section of the belt now and again during the journey to ensure that the horizontal section remains tight Make sure that the belts and buckles fit correctly on the rear seat bench Releasing the safety belt gt Hold the belt tongue gt Press the red button arrow gt Guide belt tongue to the reel Safety belt height adjustment The heights of the belt deflectors for the driver s seat passenger s seat and the rear seats can be adjusted Adjust the height of the safety belt so that it runs across the middle of the shoulder not against the neck Adjusting belt height gt Upward push belt deflector up gt Downward press button A and move belt deflector Air bag Systems The vehicle is equipped with air bag and lap shoulder belt at both front seating positions The air bag is a supplemental restraint at those seating positions The air bags in combination with the safety belts make up a safety system which offers the driver and the passenger the greatest known protection from injuries in case of accident Your vehicle is equipped with occupant sensing for the passenger s seat in accordance with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 Even if your vehicle is equipped with air bags the safety belts must be worn at all times because the front air bag system Is only actuated by frontal colli
371. ssisisseeseeeeessrerrrrrrrrrrrrns 260 Changing Air Cleaner onenen QOL Changing Particle Filter 261 Wiper Blades iceren 261 Emission Control System 0 00000000000 202 How Emission Control Works ccsscsssessseesseeee 263 Fuel ECONOMY crcaneananeccrntesnedecaedevasde candgaasdvaas 264 Operating Your Porsche in other Countries 264 RO e ean aes spe te S EE E 265 Fuelle Alia aA 267 Fuel RECOMMENAtIONS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 268 Fuel Evaporation Control saser 269 Car Care Instructions 209 Minor Repairs PCa 277 Exercise Extreme Caution when Working ON your Vehicle ccceeeeseeseeteeeeeeeeeeeseeseees 278 Tires and Wheels 280 Wheel Bolts cccccccecccssseceseeceeeeeesseeeseeeaees 293 ele Veal gener eee reer T E en n rere EN 293 Electrical Sleliin aascunenimuriecennianieiin 296 ASICs i Yoda eno ime ne ee aan RD AEREE 306 Changing the Remote Control Battery 307 Replacing BUIDS siccissititsatntewnniavinaviweavarerns 308 ig cie 0 dp Scans es inne A ire EP Meee eee 308 Side Turn Signal Light eerta 312 Licence Plate LIGhtsS c cssccccccsceeseseesserees 313 Side Marker Light ccccesssccceceeeeeeseeeeeees ola Changing Light Emitting Diodes and Long Lite BUDS serene 314 Headlight Adjustment cccccccccessseeeeeeees 314 TONE eee eaeceeen cee teneiivny me acuuereenaiaa rete 316 Fire Extinguisher eeen a 321 Vehicle Identification Data ccccccceeceeeeeseeeees 323 Engin
372. ssure varies depending on the engine speed oil temperature and engine load If oil pressure drops abruptly and a message is displayed on the multi function display when the engine is running or while driving gt Stop immediately in a suitable place gt Switch off the engine gt Check whether there is an obvious oil leak on or under the car gt Select Oil level on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OIL LEVEL DISPLAY AND MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL on page 121 gt Add engine oil if necessary 1N Caution Risk of engine damage gt Do not continue driving if there is an obvious oil leak gt Donotcontinue driving if the warning message appears even when the oil level is correct gt Have the fault corrected Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools G Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge displays the contents of the tank when the ignition is on For information on fuel quality and refill capacities gt Please see the chapter FILLING CAPACITIES on page 329 For information on fuel and refuelling gt Please see the chapter FUEL on page 265 lf the vehicle s inclination changes e g uphill downhill driving minor deviations in the gauge may occur Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display
373. st Performance tests on roller type test stands are not approved by Porsche Brake tests Brake tests must be performed only on roller type test stands The following limit values must not be exceeded on roller type test stands Test speed 4 7 mph 7 5 km h Test duration 20 seconds Testing the electric parking brake Electric parking brake tests on the brake test stand must only be performed with the ignition switched on and with the manual gearshift lever in neutral or the Porsche Doppelkupplung selector lever in position N The vehicle switches automatically to brake test stand mode in which the electric parking brake can be tested The message Electric parking brake in service mode appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel Balancing wheels on the vehicle During finish balancing of the wheels the entire vehicle must be lifted and the wheels must be free to turn Maintenance and Car Care 253 Engine Oil It is important to perform oil changes regularly in accordance with the intervals specified in your Maintenance Schedule Engine oil consumption It is normal for your engine to consume oil The rate of oil consumption depends on the quality and viscosity of oil the speed at which the engine is operated the climate road conditions as well as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the lubricant lf the vehicle is used for repeated short trips and consumes a normal a
374. st be transported with a car transporter or on a trailer Panamera 4S Panamera Turbo Towing a vehicle with PDK and all wheel drive 1N Caution We urge that wherever possible a car transporter or trailer be used to transport a Panamera vehicle that cannot move under its own power This is the safest way to transport a down vehicle For those instances where a car transporter or trailer is not available the vehicle may be towed on all four axles only provided the following conditions are strictly met Failure to meet these conditions will result in serious and expensive damage to the PDK transmission Minor Repairs 3 17 lf the vehicle s transmission or shifter is already damaged serious damage will result if the vehicle is not towed with all four wheels off the ground Porsche cannot be held responsible for damage incurred in cases where a vehicle has been transported on one or both of its axles gt The vehicle must not be towed if the PDK transmission Is in emergency operation mode yellow or red Gearbox emergency operation warning message The vehicle must be transported with a car transporter or on a trailer gt lf a selector lever emergency release was performed the vehicle must not be towed The vehicle must be transported with a car transporter or on a trailer gt The vehicle must have all four wheels on the ground when being towed or it must be transported on a car transporter The vehicle mus
375. stead of wheel bolts 1N Caution Risk of damage to brake discs gt Always screw in the assembly aids when changing a wheel 292 Minor Repairs Screw in two assembly aids on vehicles with PCCB 9 Remove the remaining wheel bolts 10 Take the wheel off and put a new wheel on gt Please see the chapter WHEEL BOLTS on page 293 11 Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand 12 Remove assembly aids and screw in remaining wheel bolts Initially tighten bolts only slightly in diagonally opposite sequence so that the wheel is centerd 13 Inflate the tire if necessary gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE FOR COLD TIRES 68 F 20 C on page 326 14 Lower the vehicle fully and remove the jack 15 Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite sequence Immediately after changing a wheel use a torque wrench to check the prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts 160 Nm 118 ftlb Note on operation for vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring gt On vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring the settings on the multi function display must be updated after the wheel change gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING TPM on page 127 Wheel Bolts gt Always clean the wheel bolts before fitting gt Wheel bolts must not be greased gt Replace damaged wheel bolts Only use genuine Porsche wheel bolts assigned especially to this model or wheel bolts of similar quality that
376. stinnnunerminne Unlocking vehicle door with Porsche Entry amp Drive ccccccccccccecccsecseessssssnsanenees 73 Opening and closing the engine compartment lid 33 Opening and closing the hOOd cccsesseeeeesssssteeeeeeees OO Operating in other countries E a 204 Operating overview Air conditioning system front cccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 76 Operating the homie eo ceeeeces a Ol Optical distortion rear WINCOW cceessseeeeeseeesteeeee ess B4 GEM GEMS OE see ereacer re eneauet E rmaanarvesetametas 263 P Paint Care insStructionS e nneneeennnnnanseeennnnnneeerenneee AL Ponne e earnest Preserving arrea E E neces Perera 271 Removing Spots and stains ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeneneees 271 Repairing damage sereen 2L Panic DUTTON ee a a S ParkAssist SO E E E O E vee can 239 Parking Applying the parking brake cccccsceeeeerel ZL Locking the vehicle 00 EEE nate 24 PDK tranSMiSSiON cccccccceeceesessesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 199 Parking aid SEE a E E A N 239 Swivelling down mirror glass c ccccceeeessseeeeees 60 Parking brake Automatic parking brake release upon RIV Ore E A 171 OWEN ate serene ene cee E E ky clei cre 11 Seeeaeren encore E oer rent tos ee penetra Wai Testing on brake test stand See ene ere cere tee 253 Parking pulling out Functional description ParkAssSist 0ccceee 239 Sensors for ParkASSISt oername L Particle filte
377. strument panel the parking lock is not engaged The vehicle can roll away Shift again from selector lever position R to P gt Activate the electric parking brake and then engage the parking lock If selector lever position P is flashing in the instrument panel the parking lock is not engaged The vehicle can roll away Shift again from selector lever position R to P The ignition key can be removed only in selector lever position P R Reverse gear gt Select only if the vehicle is stationary and the brake is applied N Neutral idling Selector lever position N must be selected for towing or in car washes for example gt Only select the desired position for driving off D M or R when the engine is idling and the brake pedal is pressed D Automatic selection mode Select position D for normal driving The gears are shifted automatically according to the accelerator position and speed Depending on the way the vehicle is driven economical comfortable or sporty driving style and on the resistance e g uphill the gear changing points are shifted towards higher or lower engine speed ranges The accelerator position driving speed engine speed longitudinal and lateral acceleration and the road profile all have an influence on the gear changing characteristic Unwanted upshifts e g when entering bends are prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator pedal Depending on lateral a
378. t Info 216 mi 194 a mml 01 14 2009 10 27 am 4 82 Vehicle information Different items of vehicle information can be displayed on the multi function display 1 Select gt Vehicle The vehicle information display can be adapted individually For information on adapting the vehicle menu gt Please see the chapter MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE on page 140 593 811 SWR3 Message 1 3 Refill washer fluid 10 42 am 82 ie Displaying messages All current warning messages and vehicle messages can be viewed on the multi function display The warning symbol in the lower status area indicates the number of pending warning messages lf several warning messages are pending you can browse through the message list 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Info 2 Messages and confirm Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 1 19 Displaying service intervals The internal mileage counter indicates when the next vehicle service is due 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Info 2 Service intervals and confirm 3 Select the desired service interval and confirm Available service interval displays Service Intermediate service Oil change 120 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Displaying the selected chassis setting You can view information on the current chassis setting 1 Select g
379. t Vehicle gt Info 2 Level and confirm Displaying and resetting average fuel consumption You can display and reset the average fuel consumption if required 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Info gt Consumption and confirm Displaying average fuel consumption 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Info gt Consumption 2 Consumption and confirm Resetting average fuel consumption 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Info gt Consumption 2 Reset and confirm Note on operation Resetting the average fuel consumption also resets the consecutive vehicle data display in the Trip menu For information on the driving data display gt Please see the chapter TRIP INFORMATION on page 126 Oil level Display and measurement of the engine oil level 1N Caution Risk of engine damage gt Regularly check the oil level each time before refuelling gt Do not allow the oil level to fall below the minimum mark Prerequisites for the oil level gauge Ignition is switched on or Engine is running while the vehicle is stationary or in motion After opening the hood the oil level can only be measured after driving for at least 6 miles 10 km Activate the Oil level function on the multi function display 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Oil level and confirm gt Please see the
380. t Do not wash your Porsche in direct sunlight or when its body is hot gt When washing by hand use a car shampoo plenty of water and a soft sponge or washing brush We recommend Porsche car shampoo gt Start washing the vehicle by thoroughly wetting the paintwork and rinsing the heavy dirt off gt After washing the vehicle rinse it thoroughly with water and rub it dry with chamois leather Do not use the same chamois for rubbing dry as you use for cleaning the windshield and windows 1N Warning Risk of accidents Reduced or uneven braking action may be caused by wet brakes gt After washing the vehicle test the brakes and steering and briefly brake the discs dry When doing so make sure that vehicles travelling behind you are not affected Cleaning in car washes Optional add on parts or parts that project beyond the contours of the vehicle may be damaged by design features of car washes The following parts are particularly at risk Windshield wipers and rear wiper always switch them off wiper stalk in position O to prevent them wiping unintentionally in intermittent or sensor operation Exterior mirrors always fold in External antenna always unscrew Roof transport system always remove completely Spoiler Wheels the wider the rim and the lower the tire height the greater the risk of damage gt Please consult the operator before using automa
381. t Please see the chapter DISPLAYING TIME IN STOPWATCH ON DASHBOARD on page 148 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 135 Sport Chrono on multi function display All stopwatch displays are started and stopped in the Chrono menu on the multi function display For instructions on using the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OPERATING THE MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY IN THE INSTRUMENT PANEL on page 115 1 Select gt Chrono and confirm Notes on operation If you exit the Chrono menu while the stopwatch is running measurement will continue The stopwatch stops after the ignition is switched off If the ignition is switched on again within approximately 4 minutes the stopwatch will continue to run The only way to reset the stopwatch to zero is by selecting Reset in the Chrono menu For information on resetting the stopwatch gt Please see the chapter RESETTING THE STOPWATCH TIME on page 137 136 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 593 809 SWR3 sport Chrono lt r Stop Round J 00 01 43 235 int 10 42 am i 82 F a Current stopwatch time Reference time fastest lap Number of completed laps Circle display Compares the current lap time with the reference time Jow Starting timing 1 Select gt Chrono 2 Start and confirm The stopwatch time A is displayed simultaneously on all
382. t a brake booster provides the braking pressure necessary for maximum deceleration at all 4 wheels Combined operation of PSM and PTM In order to ensure optimum stabilisation of the vehicle torque distribution between the front and rear wheels is adapted and the rear differential lock is controlled on vehicles with PDCC In the event of a PTM fault PSM cannot be switched off If PSM is switched off it is switched on again automatically 204 Driving and Driving Safety Automatic brake differential ABD The ABD system controls the front and rear axles separately If one wheel of an axle starts to spin it is braked so that the other wheel on the same axle can be driven ABD recognizes different driving states and it features control strategies adapted to these States In situations in which little propulsive power is required such as when the vehicle moves off on a level gravel surface traction control already becomes active at low engine speeds If a large amount of propulsive power is required e g when driving off on an uphill slope or for rapid acceleration the ABD system is adapted accordingly Anti slip control ASR The anti slip control system prevents the wheels from spinning by adjusting the engine power thereby ensuring good lane holding ability and Stable handling V Engine drag torque control MSR In conditions of excessive slip the engine drag torque control system prevents all driven whee
383. t 5302 Ibs 2405 kg 5379 Ibs 2440 kg 5512 Ibs 2500 kg Maximum roof load 175 Ibs 75 kg 1 Curb weight includes 175 Ibs 75 kg driver and baggage 2 The maximum vehicle weight and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded Note If additional accessories are installed the maximum load will be correspondingly less 3 Only use roof transport systems from the Porsche Tequipment range for your vehicle or roof transport systems that have been tested and approved by Porsche 328 Tire Pressure and Technical Data Filling Capacities Only use fluids and fuels approved by Porsche Your authorized Porsche dealer can advise you Engine oil change quantity without with oil filter Approx 2 17 US gallons 8 2 liters approx 2 38 US gallons 9 0 liters Panamera S Approx 80 litres of which approx 3 96 US gallons 15 liters are reserve Panamera 4S Panamera Turbo Approx 100 litres including approx 3 96 US gallons 15 liters reserve The engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel consumption if unleaded premium fuel with 98 RON 88 MON 93 CLC or AKI is used If unleaded fuels with octane ratings of less than Fuel octane rating 98 RON 88 MON 93 CLC or AKI are used the engine s knock control automatically adapts the ignition timing Porsche recommends that you use fuel with at least 95 RON 85 MON 90 CLC or AKI in your vehicle Window headlight cleaning system Approx 1 45 US gallons 5 5 liters
384. t available in Canada Regulations for switching daytime driving lights on and off vary according to the legal requirements in each country For information on setting the daytime driving lights gt Please see the chapter ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING AUTOMATIC DAYTIME DRIVING LIGHTS on page 142 Static cornering light The static cornering light switches on if the steering wheel is turned sharply Note on operation The static cornering light is also available when the light switch is set to the position D driving light ow beam Dynamic cornering light At speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h the low beam light is swivelled in the direction of the curve to illuminate the road more clearly depending on the speed of the vehicle and the extent to which the steering wheel is turned In the event of a fault in the dynamic cornering light the warning light for the adaptive light system flashes in the instrument panel and a warning message appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel For information on indicator lights and warning lights on the instrument panel gt Please see the chapter INSTRUMENT PANEL USA MODELS on page 107 For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Automatic Coming Home lights Welcome Home function Entry function Switching on Automatic Coming Home lights gt
385. t brakes individual wheels as required If necessary PSM also influences the engine power or the gear changing characteristic of Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK in order to stabilise the vehicle The events below inform the driver of PSM control operations and warn him to adapt his driving style to the road conditions PSM warning light on the instrument panel flashes Hydraulic noises can be heard The vehicle decelerates and steering wheel forces are altered as PSM controls the brakes Reduced engine power The brake pedal pulsates and its position is changed during braking In order to achieve full vehicle deceleration foot pressure must be increased after the brake pedal has begun vibrating Examples of PSM control operations f the front wheels of the vehicle drift on a bend the engine power is reduced and the rear wheel on the inside of the bend is braked if necessary lf the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend the front wheel on the outside of the bend is braked Driving and Driving Safety 203 Brake system prefilling The brake system is prepared for possible subsequent emergency braking if the accelerator pedal is released suddenly and quickly The brake system is prefilled and the brake pads are already applied gently to the brake discs Brake booster Hydraulic Brake Assist In the event of an emergency braking operation where the pedal force is insufficien
386. t driven for prolonged periods the battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks A discharged battery allows rapid formation of sulfates leading to premature deterioration of the plates 4 Danger Hydrogen gas generated by the battery could cause an explosion resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Charge battery in a well ventilated area gt Never charge a frozen battery It may explode because of gas trapped in the ice Allow a frozen battery to thaw out first gt lf you get electrolyte which is an acid in your eyes or on your skin immediately rinse with cold water for several minutes and call a doctor Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you about a suitable charger gt Always observe the instructions provided by the charger manufacturer 1 Connect the charger to the jump lead starting terminals Only plug into the mains and switch the charger on when it is connected up correctly 2 Switch on the charger 3 After charging the battery first switch off the charger and then disconnect it gt Please see the chapter PUTTING VEHICLE INTO OPERATION on page 305 Changing the Remote Control Battery Note gt Please observe the regulations for disposing of batteries Car key lf the battery in the remote control becomes too weak the message Replace ignition key battery will appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel The bat
387. t in the steering system Vehicles with Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control PDCC lf the fluid level is too low the message Check steering oil level will appear on the multi function display gt Have the fluid level checked immediately gt Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Changing Air Cleaner Regular replacement of the filter element is part of servicing gt In dusty conditions clean the filter element more frequently and replace it if necessary gt Please see the chapter EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE on page 252 Changing Particle Filter Regular replacement of the filter is part of servicing A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air throughput in your air conditioning system gt Have the filter replaced Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Note on operation The particle filter ensures that the fresh air entering the passenger compartment is virtually free of dust and pollen gt f the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes press the recirculated air button Wiper Blades Maintenance notes Wiper blades that are in perfect condition
388. t may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 l Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard depending on the date of manufacture Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 237 Parking ParkASSISt cccccccccsecseesceeeeeeeeeeeeeceueeaeeeeeeeas 239 Rearview Camera ccccccccccsssseesseeseeeeeeeeeeees 241 Swivelling Down Mirror Glass as Farkmg Ald ea 242 Garage Door Opener 243 238 Parking ParkAssist When the driver is parking and maneuvering the vehicle ParkAssist indicates the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle by means of signal tones gt For information on the ParkAssist visual display and the rearview camera please refer also to the section ParkAssist in the operating instructions for the Porsche communication Management PCM ParkAssist is activated automatically when reverse gear is selected and the ignition Is on lf the vehicle has front ParkAssist this automatically provides a warning If the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle in front is less than approx 49 in 100 cm A warning signal sounds the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle in front is less than approx 32 in 80 cm The ParkAssist visual di
389. t not be raised at one axle irrespective of whether it is the front or rear axle gt Move PDK selector lever to position N To properly engage selector lever position N on the display and at the selector lever the engine must be started once before towing the vehicle The vehicle can be towed as soon as the selector lever is in position N and selector lever position N appears on the display 3 18 Minor Repairs Switch off the ignition or leave the engine running The ignition key must remain in the ignition lock so that the steering wheel lock does not engage The control unit must be removed from the ignition lock and the key inserted in vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive Please see the chapter REMOVING THE CONTROL UNIT FROM THE IGNITION LOCK on page 165 Make sure that the vehicle is adequately illuminated Do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph 50 km h Maximum towing distance 30 miles 50 km If towing distances are greater the vehicle must be transported with a car transporter or on a trailer Pulling out a vehicle stuck in snow sand etc gt Always pull out the stuck vehicle with the greatest care gt Do not pull out the vehicle abruptly or at an angle gt f possible pull the vehicle out backwards in its own tracks gt Never use the towing lug to tow this or any other vehicle gt Bear in mind the limited ground clearance of your Car on uneven surfaces Fitting the tow
390. tation and position of each wheel should be marked Example FR front right FL RR and RL Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with their marking The perception that tire durability and performance are not affected by storage and age is unfounded Chemical additives which make the rubber elastic lose their effectiveness over the course of time and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks Therefore the tires should be inspected from time to time Note Under no circumstances should tires older than 6 years be used on your Porsche The age of the tire can be obtained from the DOT code number If for example the last three numbers read 1208 then the tire was produced in the 12th week of 2008 Snow tires The installation of Porsche approved snow tires is recommended Use Porsche approved snow tires for grip on snow and ice Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for possible restrictions 4 Danger Risk of loss of control and damage to the vehicle as well as serious personal injury or death The standard tires profile and rubber mixture are optimized for wet and dry driving conditions and may not prove favorable for snow conditions gt Install snow tires before driving in such conditions Before mounting snow tires consult with your Porsche dealer They have the technical information necessary to advise you on wheel and tire compatibility gt Snow tires should have the same load
391. tched on on vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive press and hold the person button fl or 2 until the stored positions have been reached Passenger s side gt Press and hold the person button Ior 2 on the passenger s side until the stored positions have been reached Cancelling settings Automatic settings can be cancelled by pressing the button OFF Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 41 Easy Entry Function The Easy Entry function makes it easier for you to get in and out of the vehicle 1 Warning Risk of crushing if persons are behind the driver s seat when settings are retrieved Risk of damage if the rear seat bench is folded forward when settings are retrieved gt Switch off the Easy Entry function if there are persons behind the driver s seat or if the rear seat bench is folded forward Prerequisite Function must be activated on the multi function display For information on switching the Easy Entry function on and off gt Please see the chapter SWITCHING COMFORT ENTRY ON AND OFF on page 145 42 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Entering the vehicle When the driver s door is opened the steering wheel and passenger seat move upwards or to the rear depending on the position of the seat and steering wheel when the driver left the vehicle Once the driver s door is closed and the ignition key Is inserted or in the case of vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive the ignition
392. ter console for approximately 1 second The indicator light on the button lights up The roll up sunblinds on the rear window and the rear side windows are raised Lowering roll up sunblind on rear side windows gt Push down the corresponding power window button on the inside of the rear door or the driver s door or lf the rear roll up blind is raised press and hold the roll up sunblind button on the front or rear center console for approximately 1 second The indicator light on the button lights up The roll up sunblinds on the rear window and the rear side windows are lowered Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 65 Front roll up sunblind button Roll Up Sunblind Rear Window G Raising lowering roll up sunblind on rear window When the ignition is switched on the roll up sunblind in the luggage compartment cover can be raised and lowered gt Press the front or rear roll up sunblind button The indicator light on the button lights up The roll up sunblind is raised or lowered 66 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel Rear roll up sunblind button Note on operation lf child protection is activated the rear window roll up sunblind can only be operated using the roll up blind button in the front center console For information on child protection gt Please see the chapter DISABLING THE CONTROLS IN THE REAR on page 88 Automatic lowering of the rear window roll up sunblind when reverse gear is engage
393. tery should be changed in this case Minor Repairs 307 Changing the battery CR 2032 3V 1 Remove the emergency key 2 Lever off the cover on the back of the key housing using a small screwdriver 3 Change the battery check polarity 4 Re fit cover and press together firmly 5 Insert the emergency key 308 Minor Repairs Replacing Bulbs Warning Risk of serious personal injury or death The headlights are under high voltage when installed gt Exercise extreme care when working close to the headlights Risk of short circuit gt Always switch off the relevant load when changing bulbs Risk of damage Bulbs of a high wattage can damage the housing gt Only use the bulbs specified in the bulb chart gt Bulbs must be clean and free from grease gt Never touch bulbs with your bare hands Use a cloth or soft paper when replacing bulbs gt Always carry spare bulbs with you In certain countries it is mandatory to carry spare bulbs Headlights 1N Caution Risk of damage to headlights due to abrasion and excessive temperatures n gt Do not affix any coverings e g stone guards or films on or around the headlights gt Use soapy water only to clean light lenses and plastic headlight lenses In no case may chemical cleaners or other volatile cleaning fluids be used gt To prevent scratches do not rub with a dry or merely moist cloth tissue or insect sponges
394. th the relevant equipment For information on storing vehicle settings on the key gt Please see the chapter STORING VEHICLE SETTINGS on Page 40 Emergency operation gt Please see the chapter EMERGENCY OPERA TION UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY on Page 166 Replacement keys Car keys can only be ordered through an autho rized Porsche dealer Sometimes this may take a long time You should therefore always keep a spare key on your person Keep it in a safe place but under no circumstances in or on the vehicle The key codes of new keys have to be reported to the vehicle control module by an authorized Porsche dealer All keys belonging to the vehicle must also be reported again Note Third parties can continue to operate the mecha nical locks using the lost key 593 337 Panic button In dangerous situations or when one s own safety is threatened it is possible to draw attention to the situation by triggering an alarm To trigger an alarm gt Press button The horn sounds and the emergency flasher flashes To stop the alarm gt Press button again The horn becomes silent and the emergency flasher goes out Opening and Locking 19 593 002 Emergency key Removing emergency key 1 Push the release button to the side 2 Pull out the key Inserting emergency key gt Slide in the key until the release button audibly engages 20 Opening and Locking Centr
395. the air bag system gt Check the condition of the passenger air bag system shown by the indicator lamp in the overhead operating console Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel 55 Activating the automatic locking retractor 1 If a child restraint system must be fastened to the passenger s seat adjust the passenger s seat as far away from the air bag as possible 2 Position child seat according to the child seat s manufacturer instructions 3 Pull the safety belt retractor completely out At this point the locking mechanism is activated 4 Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle and make certain that it is properly latched Make no more adjustments to the seat 5 Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight on the child restraint system You may further tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of it to retract Make sure that excessive seat belt forces do not occur by moving the seat with the child Seat installed Releasing the safety belt gt Unbuckle the safety belt latch Then make certain that the belt has fully retracted At this point the automatic locking feature will be disengaged Seek appropriate advice from your authorized Porsche dealer about the possible installation of a Porsche child restraint system 56 Seats Mirrors and Steering Wheel LATCH Child Seat System LATCH child seats are the best option for mounting a child seat in your Porsche Such LATCH child seats can be i
396. the control unit in ignition lock position O Driving and Driving Safety 165 Emergency operation unlocking the ignition key lf the vehicle battery is dead the ignition key can be removed only if the emergency operation is performed 1 Carefully lever off the fuse box cover on the driver s side with a screwdriver and remove it 2 Unclip metal hook A on the inside of the fuse box cover 166 Driving and Driving Safety 3 Use metal hook A to remove the plastic cover B from the ignition lock Make sure that plastic cover B is not lost on it D ih 571 032 Turn ignition key to ignition lock position O initial position Press metal hook A into opening C You will hear an unlocking noise Remove the ignition key in initial position O Re fit the plastic cover B Starting and Stopping the Engine The immobilizer can be deactivated and the engine started only using an authorised ignition key gt Please see the chapter IMMOBILIZER on page 250 Y Warning Risk of poisoning Exhaust gas contains colorless and odorless carbon monoxide CO which is toxic even in low concentrations Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and even death if inhaled gt Never start or let the engine run in an enclosed unventilated area It is not recommended to sit in your car for prolonged periods with the engine on and the car not moving An unattended vehicle with a running
397. the fine calibration process lf the vehicle has been transported e g ferry car train the system may take a few minutes after being switched on before it determines the current location Serious tire slip e g spinning wheels on snow may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation When the battery has been disconnected it may take up to 15 minutes before the navigation system is operational once more Satellite radio You must have the satellite radio activated before you can put it into operation You will need a contract with a provider in order to use this radio gt Refer to the separate radio operating instructions before putting into operation Driving and Driving Safety 191 iPod USB and AUX The iPod USB and AUX interfaces are located in the storage compartment between the front seats gt Please refer to the chapter External audio source in the separate PCM operating instructions Note Do not leave your iPod USB storage device or an external audio source in the vehicle for extended periods of time because extreme ambient conditions temperature fluctuations humidity can occur in the vehicle 192 Driving and Driving Safety Activating voice control gt Press button ub An acoustic signal sounds and help text for using the five most important voice commands appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel Simply say the command For information on switching
398. the fuse is intact Windows and Slide Tilt Roof 89 oo oF m L D ih 1 Press lightly on the front tip of the cover over the left passenger compartment monitoring sensor The opposite end of the cover lifts up 2 Unclip cover gt Take the hexagon key out of the tool kit in the luggage compartment For information on the tool kit gt Please see the chapter TOOL KIT on page 279 90 Windows and Slide Tilt Roof OY Insert the hexagon key all the way into the opening 4 Hold the key in this position and turn 5 Remove the key Stow the key in the tool kit Clip in cover Have the fault corrected Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Storing end position of the slide tilt roof The end position of the slide tilt roof are lost if the vehicle battery is disconnected reconnected or flat the vehicle is started using jump leads the electrical fuse for the slide tilt roof is replaced or after emergency operation 1N Warning Risk of injury when closing the slide tilt roof When the end position is stored the force limiter is not available and the slide tilt roof will close with full force gt Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured when the slide tilt roof closes The vehicle must be stationary to store the
399. the help text on and off on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter DISPLAYING PCM INFORMATION ON THE MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY on page 141 Voice Control Porsche Communication Management PCM can be operated by spoken commands using the voice control system gt Please refer to the chapter VOICE CONTROL in the separate PCM operating instructions Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK Porsche Doppelkupplung PDK is a seven speed transmission with an automatic and a manual selection mode In automatic selection mode selector lever position D gear changing is automatic You can change temporarily from automatic to manual mode using the shift buttons on the steering wheel In manual selection mode selector lever position M you change gear using the shift buttons on the steering wheel or with the PDK selector lever You can change between selector lever positions D and M as you wish while driving Note gt Take care not to operate the shift buttons on the steering wheel inadvertently in either automatic or manual mode thereby triggering undesired gear changes Changing the selector lever position The selector lever is blocked when the ignition is switched off When the ignition is switched on the selector lever can be moved from position P and N only when the release button is pressed and when the brake pedal is pressed Release button The release button arrow in
400. the instrument panel if the brake pads are worn excessively gt Do not continue to operate the vehicle Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect or replace the brake pads For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Brake pads and brake discs Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends to a great extent on the driving style and the conditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed in actual miles on the road The high performance brake system is designed for optimal braking effect at all speeds and temperatures Certain speeds braking forces and ambient conditions e g temperature and humidity can therefore cause the brakes to squeal New brake pads or linings New brake pads have to be broken in and therefore only attain optimal friction when the car has covered several hundred miles or km The slightly reduced braking ability must be compensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder This applies whenever the brake pads and or brake discs are replaced 1 Warning gt Do notobstruct the pedal travel with floor mats or other objects The brake booster is ready for operation only while the engine is running lf the engine is switched off or there is a defect in the brake booster much greater force has to be applied to the pedal when braking gt Vehicles with defective brakes must not
401. the keypad several times to complete the setting process for some devices Repeat steps 2 to 5 to assign signals to the other buttons Notes gt Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer if you have not been able to successfully assign Signals to the buttons even though you have carefully followed the instructions in this section and the operating instructions for the original remote control Your authorized Porsche dealer has a list of all garage door opener signals that can be adapted Make sure that the battery in the remote control for the garage door opener is new If the battery voltage is inadequate faults may occur in signal transmission The system in the vehicle then learns the wrong code which will not be recognized reliably by the garage door opening mechanism Reprogramming an individual button on the keypad 1 Press and hold the button you want to program on the overhead operating console keypad approx 20 seconds until the indicator light A on the button starts to flash slowly You now have 5 minutes to teach the button Hold the original remote control approx 12 in 30 cm away from the marked position figure and press and hold the transmit button until the vehicle s turn signal lights flash on and off three times and or the indicator light A starts flashing quickly The turn signal lights flash three times and the indicator light A flashes quickly to confirm that the new sign
402. the selector lever prevents the gear from being changed unintentionally The release button must be pressed when shifting to position R or P Starting The engine can only be started using the car key if the brake pedal is pressed and the selector lever is in position P or N Driving off gt Only select the desired position for driving off D M or R when the engine is idling and the brake pedal is pressed gt Since the vehicle crawls when in gear do not release the brake until you are ready to drive off Driving off on hills The Drive Off Assistant assists the driver when driving off on hills The vehicle is held on the slope when the driver changes from the brake pedal to the accelerator to facilitate driving off immediately after the brake is released gt Please see the chapter HOLD FUNCTION DRIVE OFF ASSISTANT AND STANDSTILL MANAGEMENT on page 206 Driving and Driving Safety 193 Display for selector lever position and engaged gear When the engine is running the display shows the selector lever position and engaged gear If the selector lever is between two positions Effects The corresponding selector lever position on the instrument panel flashes and the warning Press brake or Selector not engaged appears on the multi function display 194 Driving and Driving Safety Action required gt Operate the footbrake and engage the selector lever properly lf the selector l
403. the ski bag in the middle of the luggage compartment with the tips of the skis facing forward in direction of travel The zip is facing backwards 6 Hook the spring hooks on the side tension straps on the ski bag into the tie down rings at the left and right 7 Tighten the side tension straps on the ski bag securely at the left and right Stowing the ski bag gt Pack the ski bag into the gear bag and stow it behind the luggage net at the left or right of the luggage compartment Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 231 Roof Transport System A roof transport system can be fitted on the vehicle for transporting awkward objects Various objects can be transported safely and securely using the roof transport system and additional attachments e g ski rack bicycle rack surfboard rack roof box or snowboard holder gt Only use roof transport systems that have been tested and approved by Porsche It is not possible to fit commercially available roof rack systems 1 Danger Risk of accidents if the vehicle loses its roof transport system due to excessive speed or improper loading gt Check the roof transport system and attachments before every journey and at regular intervals during a long journey to ensure that they are fitted correctly and securely Tighten all fastening screws again gt Adjust your driving style accordingly by maintaining a reasonable speed and slowing hour vehicle turns
404. the tailgate 2 Press button lt on the key to stop the automatic opening operation at around 2 3 of the opening height 3 Now move the tailgate up by hand until the desired opening height is reached Make sure that there is a sufficient minimum clearance from any obstacle 4 Press the button A in the trim panel on the tailgate for approximately 3 seconds An acknowledgement signal sounds The opening height of the tailgate has now been programmed The tailgate can now be closed by briefly pressing the button This setting cannot be deleted If a different setting is required repeat steps 1 to 4 Malfunctions of the tailgate drive The automatic function is not active if the battery voltage is too low lf a button is pressed the tailgate lock is unlocked and three brief warning signals sound The tailgate can now be opened by hand gt Charge the vehicle battery Emergency operation of tailgate If the automatic opening or closing operation is interrupted by a fault gt Slowly open or close the tailgate by hand Overload protection lf overloading of the tailgate drive is detected three brief warning signals sound The tailgate cannot be operated automatically for approx 30 seconds Opening and Locking From Inside The factory settings of the vehicle are described in this section In the multi function display in the instrument panel you can change the settings and store them on the respective key
405. then drive a short distance in a straight line until the PSM warning light goes out and the message Is erased from the multi function display in the instrument panel 3 If the warnings do not disappear then Drive carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche dealer to have the fault corrected 4 After the warnings go out Stop the vehicle in a suitable place 5 Store the end position for the power windows For information on storing the end positions for the power windows gt Please see the chapter STORING END POSITION OF THE DOOR WINDOWS AFTER CONNECTING THE VEHICLE BATTERY on page 88 6 Teach tires on vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring For information on teaching the Tire Pressure Monitoring system gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING TPM on page 127 7 Store end position on vehicles with a slide tilt roof For information on storing the end position for the Slide tilt roof gt Please see the chapter STORING END POSITION OF THE SLIDE TILT ROOF on page 90 Minor Repairs 305 External Power Supply Jump Lead Starting lf the battery is flat the battery of another vehicle can be used for starting or as an external power Supply with the help of jump leads Both batteries must be 12 V batteries The capacity Ah of the donor battery must not be substantially less than that of the flat battery The flat battery must be connected correctly to the vehicle s ele
406. thods the moving parts must still wear in with each other This wearing in occurs mainly in the first 2 000 miles 3 000 km Therefore gt Preferably take longer trips gt Avoid frequent cold starts with short distance driving whenever possible gt Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops gt Do not exceed maximum engine speed of 4 200 rpm revolutions per minute gt Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in Neutral or in gear gt Do not let the engine labor especially when driving uphill Shift to the next lower gear in time use the most favorable rpm range gt Never lug the engine in high gear at low speeds This rule applies at all times not just during the break in period gt Do not participate in motor racing events sports driving schools etc during the first 2 000 miles 3 000 kilometers There may be a slight stiffness in the steering or other controls during the break in period which will gradually disappear Break in brake pads and brake discs New brake pads and discs have to be broken in and therefore only attain optimal friction when the car has covered several hundred miles or km The slightly reduced braking ability must be compensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder This also applies whenever the brake pads and brake discs are replaced New tires New tires do not have maximum traction They tend to be slippery gt Break in new tires by driving at mode
407. though the parking brake is on The electric parking brake detects the driver s intention to drive off and releases automatically The warning light on the instrument panel goes out lf the driver s door is not closed or the driver s seat belt is not fastened the electric parking brake will not be released automatically when the driver attempts to drive off The message Release electric parking brake appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel The brake warning light on the instrument panel and the indicator light on the switch P start to flash For information on warning messages on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Emergency braking function lf the conventional brake system has failed the vehicle can be decelerated quickly and braked to a stop using the electric parking brake gt Press switch P and keep it pressed The brake warning light on the instrument panel and the indicator light on the switch P Start to flash The message Emergency brake function appears on the multi function display The emergency braking function is deactivated when you release the switch Safety instruction Severe braking Emergency braking takes place with very high braking power gt Only use the emergency braking function in an emergency situation gt Do not use the emergency braking function to stop the vehicle when d
408. tic car washes gt All parts not reached by a car wash such as door and lid seams or door sills must be washed and polished by hand Paint care In order to protect the paint on your vehicle in the best possible way against mechanical and chemical damage you should preserve it regularly polish it if necessary remove spots and stains and repair damaged paintwork General Notes gt Never rub a dusty vehicle with a dry cloth because the grains of dirt will damage the paintwork gt Do not treat matt painted components with preservatives or polishes as these remove the matt effect Preservation The paint surface becomes dull over time due to weathering gt Preserve paint regularly gt Apply paint preservative after washing the vehicle and polish it smooth to preserve the paintwork This keeps the paint shiny and elastic Dirt is prevented from adhering to the paint surface and industrial dust is prevented from penetrating the paint Maintenance and Car Care 27 1 Polishing Only when the original shine can no longer be obtained using preservatives should paint polish be used to clean the paint We recommend Porsche paint polish Removing spots and stains gt Remove tar spatters traces of oil insects etc as soon as possible using an insect remover as they discolor the paint if left to work on it over time gt Wash the treated areas carefully afterwards Repairing minor pa
409. tion is on and the up to one year old child is seated in the child restraint system on the passenger seat the indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be on If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up it could indicate a fault in the system In this case gt Fasten the child restraint system on one of the rear seats immediately gt Have the fault remedied at your nearest authorized Porsche dealer Child restraint system for children older than one year Your vehicle is equipped with occupant sensing for the passenger s seat in accordance with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 Depending on the weight acting on the passenger s seat the passenger s air bag will automatically be switched on or off gt Incase of doubt fasten the child restraint system on one of the rear seats Small adult passengers gt Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up 1N Danger Risk of serious or mortal injury due to the passenger air bag not triggering When the ignition is on and the small adult passenger is seated on the passenger seat the indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be off If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up it could indicate a fault in the system In this case gt Fasten the child restraint system on one of the rear seats immediately gt Have the fault remedied at your nearest authorized P
410. tioning Adapt the air conditioning see page 146 Date time Set the date and time see page 147 Units Set the units of measurement on the instruments and display see page 149 Language Set the language of the multi function display and the instrument panel see page 150 Volume Adjust the volume of the warning and information tones see page 150 Steering wheel operation Change the MFS button assignment on the multi function steering wheel see page 151 Reset Reset to factory settings see page 139 Selecting setting options or activating vehicle functions A symbol positioned in front of a setting option indicates whether the option is selected or a vehicle function is activated Selecting one of several options Option is selected ey Option is not selected Activating and deactivating functions KA Function is activated Fej Function is deactivated Resetting to factory settings All settings made in the multi function display can be reset to the factory settings Note All personal settings that have already been stored will be lost as a result of resetting to factory settings 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Settings 2 Fact settings and confirm 3 Select Yes and confirm Adapting appearance of multi function display The contents and appearance of the multi function display can be adapted individually 1
411. tivated on the passenger side When an adult is seated in the passenger s seat the front air bag is automatically activated 4 Danger The use of a child restraint system in the front passenger seat can result in serious personal injury or death to the child from an air bag deployment To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air bag in an accident Porsche strongly recommends gt Under all normal circumstances the child seat must be placed in the rear Do not use a child restraint system in the front passenger seat PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Note on operation Depending on the weight acting on the passenger s seat it can occur in the case of heavier children that the passenger air bags are active or in the case of very light adults or young persons that the passenger air bags are deactivated The condition of the passenger air bag system is shown by the indicator lamp in the overhead operating console gt fin doubt fasten the child restraint system on one of the rear seats or transport the passenger on a rear seat Note gt After switching on the ignition the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF warning light lights up for a few seconds as a check PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up The passenger s air bags are switched off PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up The passenger s air bags are active and ready for operation 4 Danger Risk of serious pers
412. to detent position 3 Once Briefly move stalk to position 4 holding stalk in position 4 accelerates wiping action Pull stalk to position 5 and hold Push switch B upwards to detent position INT Push switch B all the way up or down Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 101 Windshield Wiper Washer Stalk 1N Caution Danger of injury if the windshield wipers operate unintentionally Risk of damage to the engine compartment lid windshield and wiper system gt Only wipe the windshield when sufficiently wet otherwise it could become scratched gt Loosen frozen wiper blades before starting to drive gt Do not operate a frozen headlight washer system gt Always switch off windshield wipers in car washes to prevent them wiping unintentionally rain Sensor operation gt Do not operate headlight washer system in car washes gt Always switch off windshield wipers before cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional operation rain sensor operation gt Always hold the wiper arm securely when replacing the wiper blade gt Always switch off windshield wipers before opening the engine compartment lid wiper switch in position 0 102 Lights Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers Front wiper and headlight washer system O Windshield wipers off When the windshield wipers are switched off the wipers move up slightly from their rest position so that the wiping edges are aligned correctly
413. tread depth of the other tires This happens especially if only rear tires are replaced However this condition disappears as the new tires are broken in gt Please adjust your driving style accordingly Installation of new tires should only be done by a qualified tire technician Valves gt Use only plastic valve caps gt The rubber valves must be replaced whenever the tires are changed gt The fitting and replacement specifications must be observed for metal valves gt Only use Original Porsche metal valves gt Protect the valve inserts against soiling with valve caps Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss of air Parking at the curb 4 Danger Hard impacts against curbs or traffic islands are dangerous and may cause hidden tire damage which is not noticeable until later Such damage can result in accidents at high speeds causing serious personal injury or death Depending on the force of impact the edge of the rim can also be damaged gt After such an impact have the wheel checked by an expert gt Ifyou must drive over a curb or other obstacle drive slowly and at an obtuse angle Exercise care when parking along curbs Maintenance note Tire repairs are not permissible under any circumstances Wheel alignment wheel balancing As a precaution have wheels with summer tires balanced in the spring and those with mud and snow tires before winter Unbalanced wheels may affect car
414. ttempts with different distances between the vehicle and the original remote control may be necessary 4 The turn signal lights will flash once when the 5 minutes teaching time are up Repeat steps 2 to 3 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to assign signals to the other buttons Assigning garage door opener signal to button with changeable code system 1 The standard factory set codes must be deleted before programming for the first time Press and hold the desired button on the overhead operating console keypad until the indicator light A on the button starts to flash slowly You now have 5 minutes to teach the button Hold the original remote control approx 12 in 30 cm away from the marked position figure and press and hold the transmit button until the vehicle s turn signal lights flash on and off three times and or the indicator light A starts flashing quickly The turn signal lights flash three times and the indicator light A flashes quickly to confirm that the new signal has been programmed successfully Several attempts with different distances between the vehicle and the original remote control may be necessary To synchronize the system Press the programming button on the receiver of the garage door opener Afterwards you usually have approx 30 seconds to initiate step 5 Press the button you selected in step 2 on the overhead operating console keypad You must press the button on
415. tton for trip counter display Brightness setting for instrument panel PDK indicator for selector lever position engaged gear Instrument Panel Canada Models Warning and indicator lights on the tachometer Ks dpe eyeg ou x Emission control warning light Check Engine Air bag warning light Seat belt warning light PSM warning light PSM OFF warning light ABS warning light Turn signal left Turn signal right Brake warning light High beam indicator light Electric parking brake warning light Warning and indicator lights on the speedometer Q Rear fog light indicator light HD HOLD function indicator light ZD Low beam indicator light Z O Adaptive light system warning light ft Tire pressure warning light Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 109 A Tachometer The start of the red zone on the tachometer or rev counter scale is a visual warning of the maximum permissible engine speed lf the red zone is reached during acceleration fuel feed is interrupted in order to protect the engine B Speedometer The analogue display B is located on the left next to the tachometer in the instrument panel C Multi Function Display For information on the multi function display gt Please see the chapter OPERATING THE MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY IN THE INSTRUMENT PANEL on page 115 1 10 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display D Engine Oil Temperature Gauge A war
416. ty corrected at the next opportunity Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools 122 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Measuring the oil level after topping up engine oil or opening the hood After opening the hood the oil level can only be measured after driving for at least 6 miles 10 km The message Display after short drive only appears on the multi function display Failure lf the oil level indicator fails the message Failure Oil level measurement appears on the multi function display Setting speed limits lf a speed limit is preset and activated on the multi function display a warning message appears if the speed limit is exceeded A speed limit can be used to remind the driver to keep to the maximum speed permitted for the tire type fitted to the vehicle for example 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Limits and confirm Setting a speed limit 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Limits 2 Limit 1 or Limit 2 and confirm 3 Select Current speed or i n mm and confirm You can either adopt the current speed of the vehicle or specify your own speed limit Activating and deactivating speed limits 1 Select gt Vehicle gt Limits 2 Limit 1 or Lim
417. ure and dirt 14 Lock the cover flaps Repeated fitting of the roof transport system Steps 5 to 7 can be omitted when the roof transport system is fitted on the same vehicle again Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 235 Loading Information Definitions The rear axle load is the vehicle weight on the rear axle plus the weight of the transported load The Curb weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment fluids and emergency tools This weight does not include passengers and cargo The Gross Vehicle Weight is the sum of the curb weight and the weight of passengers and cargo combined The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum total weight of vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and optional equipment The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum load limit for the front or the rear axle This information is located on the safety comliance sticker located in the driver s side door jamb For determining the compatibility of the tire and vehicle load capabilities gt Please see the chapter TIRES AND WHEELS on page 280 The load capacity coefficient e g 106 is a minimum requirement For more information gt Please see the chapter INSCRIPTION ON RADIAL TIRE on page 288 The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum total weight rating of vehicle passengers and cargo The Vehicle Capacity We
418. usting Front Seats ccccccssssssseeseeseeeees 39 Storing Vehicle Settings 0000000000 Renee I easy Ent Une WON e essiseeensteerare ites 42 Adjusting Rear Seats c ccccessssseseeeeeeeeeees 42 Adjusting Passenger Seat From Rear 43 Front and Rear Heated Seats cc00000eeee 43 Front and Rear Seat Ventilation c0068 44 Safety Bels PEELE 44 Air Dag Systems cecceecseseesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 47 Child Restraint Systems 52 LATCH Child Seat System 56 Externor MIOS e a ate eateceetaceteceaneeseeeteee 58 Steering Wheel ccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 61 Heated steering WhEEl ccccccccccceeeseeeeeeeeees 61 Steering Wheel Adjustment cccccceeeeeees 62 Multi Function sea Wheel ccr 63 UID O nereercn cinavemenrcaenenatiennncm tanner 64 AMY NOC a e 64 Roll Up Sunblinds Rear Side Windows eee 65 Roll Up Sunblind Rear Window nsee 66 Air Conditioning cccsssccsssecssseesees OF Brief Overview Front Control Panel 68 Brief Overview Rear Control Panel 4 Zone Air Conditioning cccccssccesesseeeens 69 Overview of Air Conditioning seeeeeeee 70 General FUNCTIONS cccccccccccessseeeseeesssesseeees 71 Automatically Controlled Air Conditioning 76 72 s t si ea ee et oe eee One eee Neer E o 72 Heated Rear Window Exterior Mirror 2 SI Scena tree As oer me eit cr ete eR Pete ne Oe 84 Wi
419. ve caps gt For safety reasons don t use tire inflating bottles gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE FOR COLD TIRES 68 F 20 C on page 326 Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla tion pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring TPM that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires Is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires aS soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability 282 Minor Repairs Please note that the TPM is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM low tire pressure te
420. vehicle is being driven vehicle speed above 16 mph 25 km h Tire Pressure Monitoring requires a certain amount of time to learn the wheels During this time the current tire pressures are not available on the multi function display The tire pressure warning light remains lit until all wheels have been learned Lines appear on the display of the Tire pressure function 134 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display The required pressures for cold tires 68 F 20 C are indicated under Fill info in the tire pressure menu Position and pressure information is displayed as soon as Tire Pressure Monitoring has assigned the wheels recognized as belonging to the vehicle to the correct wheel positions gt Check the tire pressure for all wheels under Fill info gt Correct the tire pressure to the required pressure if necessary Changing a wheel and replacing tires gt New wheels must be fitted with radio transmitters for Tire Pressure Monitoring Before tires are changed the battery charge condition of the wheel transmitters should be checked Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools gt Switch off the ignition when changing a wheel The tire settings on the multi function display must be updated after changing a wheel
421. vehicles and jack hammers can interfere with the detection of obstacles Deactivating ParkAssist On vehicles with front and rear ParkAssist the ParkAssist can be manually deactivated gt Press button A on the overhead operating console The indicator light on the button lights up ParkAssist is switched off Fault indication Note Correct operation is no longer guaranteed if there is a temporary fault e g caused by ice formation or heavy soiling on the sensors ParkAssist is ready for operation again when the interference has been eliminated In the event of a permanent fault in ParkAssist a continuous tone sounds for three seconds after reverse gear has been selected Possible causes Dirt ice or snow on the sensors gt Clean the sensors carefully Defect or system fault gt Have the fault corrected Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools Rearview Camera The rearview camera is located on the underside of the tailgate gt Please refer to the chapter REARVIEW CAMERA in the separate PCM operating instructions gt Always keep the rearview camera clean and free of ice and snow so that vision is not impaired For car care Instructions gt Please see the chapter CAR CARE INSTRUCTIONS on page 269 Parking 241
422. vice intervals Audio Settings Level Vehicle menu Limits Consumption Upper line Z PCM display Station track Display Lower line Shift request Destination input cihil Bright l Light visibility rightness Start Stop route guidance Exterior lights Locking Interior lights Manual zoom Wiper Show destination position R Air conditionin evers opt yen om Door unlock Ue Door lock Date Time OTURUR Comfort Entry Answer Reject End Units gemas Vent panel Phonebook Center cooler Previous calls Language a Automatic air circ Received calls Time Volume Dat since ss a consecutive Steering wheel op elas to destination Time Chrono Speedometer Fill info Fact settings iene Tire info a ire pressure Charge Limit 1 Limit 2 Boost pressure Comfort press mnan Consumption Adjust Last destination German French N Ti Stored destinations ParkAssist Ww obi hi Start POIs Warn tones s Sport Chono Stop Multif key YV l Round Res Current speed M ACC J _ Curr 1 Int Reset Setting the speed E n NG 1 18 Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display 593 871 ET j G Y i 4 a i Pi a i Displaying vehicle information Pending warning messages information on forthcoming service intervals the current chassis setting and the average fuel consumption can be viewed in the Info submenu of the Vehicle SWR3 main menu area Vehicle 1 Select and confirm om 12 5v gt Vehicle g
423. ving for approx 10 minutes check the tire pressure lf the tire pressure is less than 22 psi 1 5 bar do not continue driving lf a value of more than 22 psi 1 5 bar is indicated correct the pressure to the prescribed value gt Please see the chapter TIRE PRESSURE FOR COLD TIRES 68 F 20 C on page 326 16 Please contact a qualified specialist workshop We recommend that you have an authorized Porsche dealer to do this work as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools gt Please also make sure to follow the separate instructions for use for the tire sealant Note on operation for vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring gt The settings for Tire Pressure Monitoring must be updated on the multifunction display after filling the tire with sealant gt Please see the chapter OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES on page 152 Care instructions After drying any sealant that emerges can be peeled off like a film 1N Warning Risk of accidents resulting in serious personal injury or death gt Have the tire replaced by a specialist workshop as soon as possible Inform the specialist workshop that the tire contains sealant gt Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering speeds gt Observe the maximum speed of 50 mph 80 km h gt Always observe the safety and operating instructions which can be found in the separate operating instructions for the sealant and on
424. w heavy objects as far forward as possible on the floor with lightweight objects behind them gt Never load the vehicle higher than the top edge of the seat backrest gt Always protect the passenger compartment with a luggage compartment cover Do not drive with objects on top of the luggage compartment cover gt lf the rear seats are not occupied the backrests can be additionally secured with the seat belts Simply cross the outer seat belts and insert each into the opposite buckle gt Make sure that the load cannot damage the heating filaments and the TV antenna in the rear window Tie down belts gt Do not use elastic belts or straps to tie down a load gt Do not route belts and straps over sharp edges gt Observe the directions for use and information for the tie down equipment gt Use only belts with a tear strength of at least 1543 Ibs 700 kg and a maximum width of 1 in 25 mm gt Cross the belts over the load 228 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System Driving gt Vehicle handling changes depending on the vehicle load Adapt your driving style to the changed driving behavior gt Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and axle load This information can be found under Technical data in this Owner s Manual gt Please see the chapter WEIGHTS on page 328 gt Never drive with the tailgate open Exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment
425. warranty coverage Before you plan on exchanging wheels or snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims consult your authorized Porsche dealer Your dealer has the technical information necessary to advise you which wheel rims and wheel bolts are compatible with the original factory installations 280 Minor Repairs 1 Danger Risk of loss of control and serious personal injury or death gt lf while driving your vehicle experiences a sudden vibration or ride disturbance and or you suspect that possible damage to your tires or vehicle has occurred you should immediately reduce your speed without excessive use of the brakes Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and inspect the tires If you cannot determine the cause for the disturbance have your vehicle towed to the nearest Porsche or tire dealer to have your vehicle or tire s inspected Continuing to operate the vehicle without correction could result in a loss of control and serious personal injury 593 338 Example Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specific government test course For example a tire g
426. wbeam see fig has to be projected on a vertical screen wall in distance of 24 6 ft 7 5 m from the front lens of the headlamp The correct position of the cutoff is 3 0 in 7 5 cm at 24 6 ft or 7 5 m 0 4 below a horizontal line x cm from ground to the center of the headlamp lens 24 6 ft Screen The screen upon which headlamp beams are projected is perpendicular to the floor and the vehicle s longitudinal axis flat uniformly light in color unobstructed and wide and high enough to accommodate the vehicle beam patterns to be aimed 193 233 The screen should be wide enough to provide at least 3 3 ft 1 m of space outboard of the vehicle s headlamp spacing Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical adjustment unit Distance Visual aim shall be performed at not less than 24 6 ft 7 5 m this value is a rounded down conversion from the 25 foot distance typical of field aim using a screen The 24 6 ft 7 5 m distance is measured from the headlamp lens to the viewing screen Floor The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat and approximately level Minor Repairs 3 15 Height adjustment 1 Switch ignition on 2 Switch on low beam 3 Open engine compartment lid 4 Place allen key 6 mm on adjusting screw 5 Adjust low beam in direction of the arrow 3 16 Minor Repairs 591 227 Towing Certain state statutes an
427. which have been triggered In addition the anchor points of the belts should be checked gt f safety belts do not work properly see your authorized Porsche dealer immediately gt fthe belts show damage to webbing bindings buckles or retractors they should be replaced to ensure safe operation gt Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts in your vehicle gt The belts must be kept clean or the retractors may not work properly Please see the chapter CAR CARE INSTRUCTIONS on page 269 gt Never bleach or dye safety belts gt Do not allow safety belts to retract until they are completely dry after cleaning or this may cause damage to the belt Belt tensioner Depending on the force of a collision fastened seat belts are automatically tightened in an accident The belt tensioners are triggered in Front and rear impacts of sufficient severity Side impacts In cases of vehicle rollover Maintenance notes The belt tensioner system can be triggered only once the system must be replaced afterwards lf there is a fault in the belt tensioner system the air bag warning light lights up Work may be performed on the belt tensioner system only by an authorized Porsche dealer Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are triggered This does not indicate a fire in the vehicle A Safety Belt Warning System An audio visual warning system is interconnected with the driver s safety belt
428. with button in door handle Porsche Entry amp Drive ansees aay 240 Switching off with Car key ccccccccsscesssseeeeeeeesees 247 Multi function display Activating functions opening menus and viewing OPTIONS ccecccccccccceeeeesceeseseseesaeaaeeeeeees 117 Browsing through long lists cccsssseeeeeeeeees ee Aly Checking oleve 2 121 DISP QECAS cone E E ecekeksstaueeyanceuaeuaas 116 Menu overview satceaumninins citieeeinenieasaxendans 117 Operating navigation system eee 123 Operating principle scicctcevseseccsssersessnseenanceseeeiins 115 Operating with multi function a wheel 115 Operating with steering wheel lever L16 Overview of Warning MESSAQES csseseeeseeeeeeees 152 Retrieving vehicle information ssec 119 Selecting a radio station 123 a A a a a E SE Tire pressure WAININGS c0ccceeeeeee PEET TSE 133 TAP IMON A 126 Using the telephone t e a a 12D Multi function steering wheel Changing button assignment on multi function steering wheel ccscssseceeees E SE 151 Functional description cccccceesscceceessssteeeeeeeees Go MFS DUtLOM ccsccccccccssssseccccsssseseccessssseveccessssece bees GG With telephone function ae eee 63 N Pe GT SS eee eee eee ee ede ol Using via multi function display cose cccccccsssseen ein 123 0 Octane ratno a tema anieeeetanentne tate PREE A 268 Octane rating petrolier eee e s 265 Odometer Sens air eee ee Recete Ee E LZ
429. with its full closing force One touch operation is enabled again once the window has been closed completely using the manual closing function 1 Warning Risk of injury If one touch operation is disabled after the window is blocked the window will close with its full closing force when the manual closing function is used gt Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured when the windows close Windows and Slide Tilt Roof 87 Disabling the controls in the rear The power window buttons on the rear doors and the control panel on the rear center console can be disabled by pressing the safety button in the control panel on the driver s door Switching child protection on off gt Press the safety button The indicator light in the safety button lights up if child protection is active 88 Windows and Slide Tilt Roof Storing end position of the door windows after connecting the vehicle battery The end position of the door windows are lost when the battery is disconnected and reconnected One touch operation of the windows is disabled Perform these steps for all windows 1 Close window completely once by pulling the rocker switch 2 lf the window is completely closed briefly pull the rocker switch again 3 Open the window completely once by pressing the rocker switch Slide Tilt Roof The electric slide tilt roof is made of tinted single sheet safety glass It has a sliding roof cover that
430. y Mind remaining distance Instrument Panel and Multi Function Display Meaning Action required Emergency braking function of the electric parking brake active Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Porsche Stability Management was switched off Porsche Stability Management was switched on Porsche Traction Management is overloaded Reduce load Contact a qualified specialist workshop if the fault persists Porsche Traction Management is overloaded Reduce load Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Driving stability is impaired Adjust your driving style Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Close the sunroof Refuel at the next opportunity Light in instrument panel Ks Warning message on multi function display a m Fault Fuel indicator Check fuel tank cap Refill washer fluid Fasten seat belt Air bag warning light failure Steering locked Relieve steering Heated steering wheel on Heated steering wheel off Check steering oil level Ignition key not removed Ignition lock fault Key not recognized Ignition lock faulty Replace ignition key battery Meaning Action required Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist workshop Position tank cap correctly and screw on until
431. y lights up yellow when the vehicle is stopped and if the engine does not stop regularly when the vehicle is stopped despite the fact that the preconditions for stopping the engine automatically are met this may be an indication that the battery is weak gt Have the Auto Start Stop system checked the next time you visit an authorized Porsche dealer Fault reporting lf there is a fault the warning message Start Stop mode deactivated will appear on the multi function display in the instrument panel gt Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer a 591 017 lt a Electric Parking Brake The electric parking brake acts on the rear wheels and serves to secure the vehicle while parked Applying the parking brake gt Press switch P The brake warning light on the instrument panel lights up For information on indicator lights and warning lights on the instrument panel gt Please see the chapter INSTRUMENT PANEL USA MODELS on page 107 Releasing the parking brake The electric parking brake can only be released when the ignition is switched on 1 Press the brake pedal 2 Pull switch P The brake warning light on the instrument panel goes out Automatic electric parking brake release when driver s intention to drive off is detected lf the engine is running the driver s door is closed and the driver s seat belt is fastened it is still possible to drive off even
432. y part in the engine compartment turn the engine off and let it cool down sufficiently Risk of burn injury when standing near or coming into contact with the exhaust pipe The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is turned off gt To prevent injury make a point of noting where your vehicle s exhaust pipe is avoid placing your legs near the exhaust pipe when loading and unloading cargo in the rear and closely supervise children around the vehicle during time when the exhaust pipe could be hot A hot exhaust pipe can cause painful skin burns Radiator fan For information on radiator fans gt Please see the chapter RADIATOR FANS on page 258 1N Warning Danger of injury After the ignition is switched off the engine compartment and coolant temperatures are monitored for approx 30 minutes During this period and depending on temperature the radiator fan may continue to run or start to run gt Carry out work in these areas only with the engine off and exercise extreme caution always anticipating that the fan blade could suddenly start to run Auto Start Stop Function The engine stops automatically when the vehicle is stopped e g at traffic lights or in a traffic jam The Auto Start Stop function thus helps to save fuel The ignition stays on even when the engine switches off automatically All safety functions are still available
433. y press button amp on the key once The vehicle is locked Note on operation On vehicles with Porsche Entry amp Drive the tailgate can no longer be opened when the car key with remote control is out of range Locking the tailgate 1N Warning Danger of crushing The tailgate automatically closes gt Make sure that your fingers are not under the tailgate gt Keep foreign objects or limbs away from moving parts lock striker of the power closing mechanism gt Children must be kept away from the tailgate when closing Children could be killed or severely injured by such a closing Powerlift tailgate Opening and closing tailgate automatically 1N Warning Risk of poisoning Exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment when the tailgate is open gt gt Always keep the tailgate closed when the engine is running Always keep the tailgate closed while driving Risk of injury and damage if the tailgate is automatically opened or closed in an uncontrolled way gt gt Do not leave children in the car unattended Open or close the tailgate only when the vehicle is stationary Never drive with the tailgate open Exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment Open or close the tailgate only when there are no persons animals or objects within its movement range Always keep a close eye on the opening and closing operation so that movement can be stopped at any time i
434. ys lock the latch handle with the emergency key to secure the contents from unauthorized access Cooled glove box The glove box can be cooled if necessary Cooled air is directed into the glove box via a separate air vent For information on cooling the glove box gt Please see the chapter COOLED GLOVE BOX on page 83 Storage tray in the armrest between the front seats Opening gt Press the button arrow on the passenger s side of the armrest The lid pops up automatically Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 2 19 Storage tray in the rear center console Storage tray in the rear armrest Opening An storage tray Is located in the armrest gt Slide the lid sideways to the left or right at the Opening the storage tray in the armrest handle recess pening ge tray 1 Fold armrest down fully 2 Press the button arrow and lift the lid 220 Storage Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System Lower storage compartment in the large center console Storage trays in the large center console in the rear of the vehicle Opening lower storage compartment gt Press the release button and lift the lid Upper storage compartment in the large center console Opening upper storage compartment gt Press the release button arrow and fold down the lid Note on operation The shelf in the upper storage compartment can be folded upwards to increase the storage space St
435. zed Porsche dealer to replace the wiper blades Caution Risk of damage If a wiper blade is not changed properly it can come loose when the car is moving gt Check whether the wiper blade is seated securely The wiper blade must engage the wiper arm properly Maintenance and Car Care 261 Emission Control System In the interest of clean air Pollution of our environment has become a problem that is of increasing concern to all of us We urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner air in controlling the pollutants emitted from the automobile Porsche has developed an emission control system that controls or reduces those parts of the emission that can be harmful to our environment Your Porsche is equipped with such a system Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in your new car under the terms and conditions set forth in the Warranty Booklet You as the owner of the vehicle have the responsibility to provide regular maintenance service for the vehicle and to keep a record of all maintenance work performed To facilitate record keeping have the service performed by authorized Porsche dealers They have Porsche trained technicians and special tools to provide fast and efficient service 262 Maintenance and Car Care To assure efficient operation of the Emission Control System gt Have your vehicle maintained properly and in accordance with the recommendations described in your Maintenance Bookl
436. zed Porsche dealer to do this work as they have the trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools for this type of work Note lf vehicles with air suspension are left stationary for several weeks the ride height can be reduced The vehicle automatically re adjusts to the correct ride height when you start the engine This can take several minutes depending on the operating state Ground clearance is reduced at this time Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control PDCC Function The Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control PDCC system used on vehicles with air suspension is a system for roll stabilisation of the vehicle body when driving Driving comfort and driving safety are improved by active intervention of the anti roll bars on the front and rear axles Vehicle balance and agility are optimised No separate controls are available for the PDCC system When you select a chassis setup in Porsche Active Suspension Management PASM with air suspension and level control the PDCC system automatically activates the corresponding on road driving program For information on selecting a chassis setup gt Please see the chapter PORSCHE ACTIVE SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT PASM WITH AIR SUSPENSION AND LEVEL CONTROL on page 209 Warning message The warning message Fault PDCC or PDCC failure appears on the multi function display in the instrument panel if there is a system fault For information on warning me

Owner`s Manual Panamera

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents